HomeMy WebLinkAboutH-4 Staff Report - Authorization To Solicit Bids For Project W-354CONSENT CALENDAR
H-4
TO: HONORABLE CHAIRPERSON AND MEMBERS OF THE AZUSA UTILITY
BOARD
FROM: MANNY ROBLEDO, DIRECTOR OF UTILITIES
DATE: SEPTEMBER 21, 2020
SUBJECT: AUTHORIZATION TO SOLICIT BIDS FOR PROJECT W-354 TRIANGLE
FLOW CONTROL STRUCTURE CAPITAL IMPROVEMENT PROJECT
BACKGROUND:
Azusa Light & Water’s (ALW) Water Production Section operates several valves at Sierra
Madre Avenue and San Gabriel Canyon Road to balance water flows between the wells and
Joseph F. Hsu Water Filtration Plant (Filtration Plant). To make necessary changes, several
operators, along with essential equipment and traffic control devices, must deploy to this location
and manually actuate applicable valves. This process has proven to be inefficient and
cumbersome, as flow changes may be required several times a day. The proposed project will
automate the operation of a new flow control valve, via the Water Division’s Supervisory
Control and Data Acquisition (SCADA) system, and provide an efficient and reliable means of
monitoring and modifying water flows in real-time.
RECOMMENDATION:
Staff recommends the Utility Board take the following action:
1) Approve the project W-354 plans and specifications; and
2)Authorize advertisement and solicitation of bids for Project W-354 Triangle Flow
Control Structure Capital Improvement Project.
ANALYSIS:
Several critical water transmission mains intersect at Sierra Madre Avenue and San Gabriel
Canyon Road, referred to as the “Triangle.” One of the transmission mains is a 24-inch, low
pressure line, that carries treated effluent water from the Filtration Plant. This line connects to
another 24-inch transmission main coming from ALW’s well field; in particular Well 2 and Well
APPROVED
UTILITY BOARD
9/21/2020
Special Meeting
Advertise Triangle Flow Control Structure W-354
September 21, 2020
Page 2
3. The pressure routinely fluctuates on the transmission main coming from the well field, which
affects the flow of water coming from the Filtration Plant. Currently, when the flow is changed at
the Filtration Plant, the existing isolation valves at the “triangle” must be adjusted manually to
compensate for the well field fluctuations. The existing valves that were installed for isolating
the pipelines are not designed to control flow. ALW staff consulted with Stantec Consulting
Services, Inc., under an existing Professional Services Agreement, to prepare construction plans
and specifications for automation of the current site.
The proposed work consists of constructing a new automated flow control structure, including:
installation of power to the site, electrical, instrumentation, remote terminal unit (RTU), and
SCADA communications, installation of new isolation valves, a flow control valve, connections,
tie-ins, removals, abandonments, appurtenances, street restoration, landscape restoration, traffic
control, and all supplies, equipment, shoring, and transportation necessary to construct and
complete the project entitled: Triangle Flow Control Structure Project No. W-354.
FISCAL IMPACT:
There is no immediate fiscal impact to the bidding of this project. This project, if awarded, will
be funded from the Water Capital Improvement Program budget.
Prepared by: Reviewed and Approved:
Melissa Barbosa, P.E. Manny Robledo
Senior Water System Engineer Director of Utilities
Reviewed and Approved: Reviewed and Approved:
Jared Macias Sergio Gonzalez
Assistant Director of Utilities - Water Operations City Manager
Attachments:
1) W-354 Notice Inviting Bids
2) W-354 Contract Documents
3) W-354 Plans
NIB-1
NOTICE INVITING BIDS
RECEIPT OF PROPOSALS. Notice is hereby given that sealed proposals will be received at
the office of City Clerk, City Hall, 213 East Foothill Boulevard, Azusa, California, 91702, until
2:00 PM, on Tuesday, October 27, 2020, for the Construction of the TRIANGLE FLOW
CONTROL VALVE – PROJECT NO. W-354.
DESCRIPTION OF WORK. The work consists of the construction of one 16-inch automatic
flow control valve by Cla-Val Company in the existing valve vault, including valves, piping, vents,
access ladder, electrical, instrumentation and controls, appurtenances, and all supplies, equipment,
services, bidding schedule items, and transportation necessary to construct and complete the
project entitled:
TRIANGLE WATER FLOW CONTROL VALVE
PROJECT NO. W-354
COMPLETION OF WORK. All work shall be completed within 60 calendar days after date
set forth in the Notice to Proceed.
MANDATORY PRE-BID TELEPHONE CONFERENCE. There will be a mandatory pre-
bid telephone conference meeting held on Tuesday, October 20, 2020 at 2:00 PM via "Zoom."
The telephone conference call will be recorded. Attendees are required to identify themselves by
name and by company and are required to remain in the conference meeting for its entire duration.
Detailed information regarding the conference meeting can be found in the Instruction to Bidders
section.
Meeting ID: 915 9629 4434
Meeting Password: 011102
Call In Number: +1 253 215 8782 US or +1 301 715 8592 US
DRAWINGS AND SPECIFICATIONS. Copies of the Drawings and Specifications may be
examined without charge at the office of the Azusa Light and Water Department, 729 N. Azusa
Avenue, Azusa, CA 91702. Requests for electronic copies via PDF of the Drawings and
Specifications may be sent via email without charge. Please email Ammar Tohmeh at
atohmeh@azusaca.gov with requests, each person and firm will be placed on the plan holder list.
Complete sets may be obtained from the front desk at the Light and Water Department at a charge
of $50.00 (non-refundable) for each set. An additional charge of $20.00 (non-refundable) will be
made for mailing each set.
GUARANTEE. Each bid shall be made on the proposal form furnished by the City herewith and
shall be in accordance with the Drawings, Specifications and other Contract Documents and shall
be accompanied by a certified check, cashier's check or bidders' bond, payable to the City in a sum
not less than ten percent (10%) of the amount of the bid, as a guarantee that the bidder will enter
into the Contract for the work, the full amount of such guarantee to be forfeited to the City should
said bidder fail to enter into said Contract. The successful bidder will be required to furnish a
NIB-2
Faithful Performance Bond in the amount of not less than one hundred percent (100%) of the
Contract price, and a Labor and Material Bond in an amount of not less than one hundred percent
(100%) of the Contract price, said bonds to be secured from a surety company authorized to do
business in the State of California, and to be subject to the approval of the City Attorney.
PREVAILING WAGE RATES. Bidders are hereby notified that pursuant to Section 1773 et
seq. of the Labor Code of the State of California, the City Council of the City of Azusa incorporates
herein by reference the general prevailing rate of per diem wages as determined by the Department
of Industrial Relations (DIR) of the State of California. Copies of the prevailing rate of per diem
wages are on file in the office of the City Clerk and will be made available to any interested party
upon request or online at http://www.dir.ca.gov/dlsr. In accordance with the Labor Code, no
workman employed upon work under contract to the City shall be paid less than the above
referenced prevailing wage rate. A copy of said rates shall be posted at each job site during the
course of construction. The concrete delivery requirements pursuant to AB 219 shall also apply.
Any classification omitted therein shall be paid not less than the prevailing wage scale as
established for similar work in the particular area and all overtime shall be paid at the prevailing
rates as established for the particular area. Sunday and holiday time shall be paid at the wage rates
determined by the DIR. The successful bidder and all subcontractor(s) under the bidder, shall
comply with all applicable Labor Code provisions, which include, but are not limited to the
payment of not less than the required prevailing rates to all workers employed by them in the
execution of the Contract, the employment of apprentices, the hours of labor and the debarment of
contractors and subcontractors. All Contractor and subcontractors (of any tier) shall be registered
with the DIR for any projects with bids and any contract for public work. All Contractors and
subcontractors must register with the DIR prior to bidding on or performing any public work.
Registration must be done online and includes a registration fee. All Contractors must
electronically submit all certified payrolls to DIR and the contract is submit to compliance
monitoring.
SOLE SOURCE. Pursuant to Public Contract Code Section 3400(b), if the City has made any
findings designating certain materials, products, things, or services, by specific brand name or
trade name, such findings and the materials, products, things, or services and their specific brand
or trade names will be set forth on the Contract Plans or Specifications.
PAYMENT. Payment will be made to the Contractor in accordance with the Specifications.
SUBSTITUTION OF SECURITIES. Contractor may, at his sole cost and expense, substitute
securities equivalent to any monies withheld by the City to ensure performance under the Contract.
Such securities shall be deposited with the City or with a state or federally chartered bank as escrow
agent who shall pay such monies upon satisfactory completion of the contract. The Contractor
shall be the beneficial owner of any securities substituted for monies withheld and shall receive
any interest thereon. Securities eligible for substitution shall include those listed in Public Contract
Code Section 22300.
OPENING OF PROPOSALS. The proposals will be publicly opened and read at the time and
date stated above, in the office of the City Clerk of the Azusa City Hall, and the results will
NIB-3
thereafter be referred to the City Council Utility Board for consideration at their next regular
meeting.
CITY'S RIGHTS RESERVED. The City reserves the right to reject any or all bids, to waive
any informality in a bid, and to make awards in the interest of the City. No bidder may withdraw
his bid for a period of 60 days after the bid opening.
COVID-19 (SARS-CoV-2) HEALTH AND SAFETY. Pursuant to the provisions of the
executive orders and regulations issued by Governor Newsom, Los Angeles County, and the City
of Azusa, the successful bidder (Contractor) and all tiers of subcontractor(s) under the bidder shall
comply with all applicable health and safety measures required by the State, County, and City.
This includes, but is not limited to the following: (a) Social Distancing, (b) Zero-tolerance for
working when ill, (c) PPE, including face coverings, (d) Frequent hand-washing, (e) Disinfecting
work areas, and (f) Construction requirements and postings.
REQUIREMENT FOR CONTRACTOR’S LICENSING. The City of Azusa requires that all
contractors be licensed with the State of California in their particular area of expertise. The City
has determined that a Class A or a Class C-34 license is necessary to bid this project. If the bidder
is a specialty contractor, the bidder is alerted to the requirements of Business and Professions Code
section 7059. Per Section 7028.15(e) of the Business and Professions Code, a licensed contractor
shall not submit a bid to a public agency unless his or her contractor's license appears clearly on
the bid, the license expiration date is stated and the bid contains a statement that the representations
therein are made under penalty of perjury. Any bid not containing this information, or a bid
containing information which is subsequently proven false, shall be considered non responsive and
shall be rejected by the City of Azusa. All bidders are required to completely fill out the
"Contractor's License Declaration" contained in the bid documents.
INFORMATION. For further information or questions, contact Melissa Barbosa, PE at (626)
812-5173 or by email at mbarbosa@azusaca.gov. All questions related to this project shall be
submitted in writing via email to Melissa Barbosa, PE at mbarbosa@azusaca.gov. The final date
to submit questions is Wednesday, October 21, 2020 at 4:00 PM. Bidders are encouraged to submit
their pre-bid questions as early as possible in writing, or by email.
CITY OF AZUSA
Dated:
Signature on File
City Clerk
Dates Published:
CONTRACT DOCUMENTS, PLANS,
AND SPECIFICATIONS
FOR CONSTRUCTION
OF
TRIANGLE FLOW CONTROL VALVE
PROJECT NO. W-354
JUNE 2020
PREPARED BY:
Stantec Consulting Services
300 N. Lake Avenue, Suite 400
Pasadena, CA 91101
AZUSA LIGHT & WATER (ALW)
729 N. AZUSA AVENUE
AZUSA, CA 91702
TRIANGLE WATER FLOW CONTROL VALVE
SEPTEMBER 2020
TOC-i
TABLE OF CONTENTS
TABLE OF CONTENTS .............................................................................................................. i
NOTICE INVITING BIDS .......................................................................................................... 1
RECEIPT OF PROPOSALS ................................................................................................ 1
DESCRIPTION OF WORK ................................................................................................. 1
COMPLETION OF WORK ................................................................................................. 1
DRAWINGS AND SPECIFICATIONS .............................................................................. 1
GUARANTEE........................................................................................................................ 1
PREVAILING WAGE RATES............................................................................................ 2
SOLE SOURCE ..................................................................................................................... 2
PAYMENT ............................................................................................................................. 2
SUBSTITUTION OF SECURITIES ................................................................................... 2
OPENING OF PROPOSALS ............................................................................................... 2
CITY'S RIGHTS RESERVED ............................................................................................ 3
REQUIREMENT FOR CONTRACTOR’S LICENSING ................................................ 3
INFORMATION ................................................................................................................... 3
INSTRUCTION TO BIDDERS ................................................................................................... 1
PROPOSAL ........................................................................................................................... 1
AVAILABILITY OF CONTRACT DOCUMENTS .......................................................... 1
EXAMINATION OF CONTRACT DOCUMENTS .......................................................... 1
INTERPRETATION OF CONTRACT DOCUMENTS ................................................... 1
ADDENDA ............................................................................................................................. 2
ALTERNATE BIDS .............................................................................................................. 2
COMPLETION OF PROPOSAL FORMS ......................................................................... 2
DISCREPANCIES IN PROPOSALS .................................................................................. 2
DISCREPANCIES IN PROPOSALS .................................................................................. 3
PROPOSAL GUARANTEE ................................................................................................. 3
BIDDER'S EXAMINATION OF SITE ............................................................................... 3
DESIGNATION OF SUBCONTRACTORS ...................................................................... 3
COMPETENCY OF BIDDERS ........................................................................................... 3
DISQUALIFICATION OF BIDDERS ................................................................................ 4
RETURN OF PROPOSAL GUARANTEE ........................................................................ 4
AWARD OF CONTRACT ................................................................................................... 4
EXECUTION OF CONTRACT .......................................................................................... 4
NON-DISCRIMINATION IN EMPLOYMENT ................................................................ 4
DEPARTMENT OF INDUSTRIAL RELATIONS ........................................................... 4
PROPOSAL ................................................................................................................................... 1
BID SCHEDULE ................................................................................................................... 2
TOC-ii
BID SCHEDULE ................................................................................................................... 4
MATERIAL AND EQUIPMENT MANUFACTURERS .................................................. 5
CONTRACTOR’S EQUIPMENT ....................................................................................... 8
BID BOND FORM ................................................................................................................ 9
NON-COLLUSION AFFIDAVIT ...................................................................................... 20
AGREEMENT ..................................................................................................................... 21
FAITHFUL PERFORMANCE BOND ............................................................................. 23
LABOR AND MATERIAL BOND .................................................................................... 24
LABOR AND MATERIAL BOND .................................................................................... 25
ESCROW AGREEMENT .................................................................................................. 26
GENERAL CONDITIONS .......................................................................................................... 1
SECTION 1 - DEFINITIONS AND ABBREVIATIONS ...................................................... 1
1.01 DEFINITIONS .............................................................................................................. 1
1.02 ABBREVIATIONS....................................................................................................... 2
SECTION 2 - SPECIFICATIONS AND DRAWINGS ......................................................... 3
2.01 INTERPRETATION OF SPECIFICATIONS AND DRAWINGS ......................... 3
2.02 CONFLICTS BETWEEN SPECIFICATIONS AND DRAWINGS ....................... 3
2.03 STANDARD SPECIFICATIONS ............................................................................... 3
2.04 SHOP DRAWINGS ...................................................................................................... 3
2.05 REFERENCE TO STANDARDS, PUBLICATIONS, OR STANDARD
SPECIFICATIONS ............................................................................................................... 4
2.06 REFERENCE TO PROPRIETARY PRODUCTS ................................................... 5
2.07 SPECIFICATIONS AND DRAWINGS FURNISHED TO CONTRACTOR ........ 5
2.08 AS-BUILT DRAWINGS .............................................................................................. 5
SECTION 3 - CITY-ENGINEER-CONTRACTOR RELATIONS ..................................... 6
3.01 AUTHORITY OF CITY .............................................................................................. 6
3.02 AUTHORITY OF THE ENGINEER ......................................................................... 6
3.03 INSPECTION AND TESTING ................................................................................... 6
3.04 CONTRACTOR'S PLANT AND EQUIPMENT ...................................................... 7
3.05 ASSIGNMENT OF CONTRACT ............................................................................... 7
3.06 SUBCONTRACTS ....................................................................................................... 8
3.07 CONTRACTOR'S EMPLOYEES AND SUBCONTRACTORS ............................ 8
3.08 ATTENTION TO WORK ........................................................................................... 9
3.09 SERVICE OF NOTICES ............................................................................................. 9
3.10 DEVIATION FROM CONTRACT ............................................................................ 9
3.11 SUSPENSION OF WORK .......................................................................................... 9
3.12 TERMINATION OF CONTRACT BY CITY (CONTRACTOR NOT AT
FAULT) .................................................................................................................................. 9
TOC-iii
3.13 TERMINATION OF CONTRACT BY CITY (CONTRACTOR AT FAULT) 10
3.14 TERMINATION OF CONTRACT BY CONTRACTOR ...................................... 10
3.15 FAILURE TO COMPLY........................................................................................... 10
3.16 PROTESTS ................................................................................................................. 10
3.17 RIGHTS-OF-WAY ..................................................................................................... 11
3.18 CONSTRUCTION INTERFERENCE ..................................................................... 11
3.19 SURVEYING .............................................................................................................. 13
3.20 SUPERVISION AND INSPECTION ....................................................................... 13
3.21 OBSERVING LAWS AND ORDINANCES ............................................................ 14
3.22 COORDINATION WITH COMMUNITY AGENCIES ........................................ 14
3.23 FIRE HYDRANTS ..................................................................................................... 14
3.24 LOSS AND DAMAGE ............................................................................................... 15
3.25 USE OF IMPROVEMENT DURING PROGRESS OF CONSTRUCTION ....... 15
3.26 ALTERNATIVE METHODS OF CONSTRUCTION ........................................... 15
3.27 EXAMINATION OF WORK .................................................................................... 16
SECTION 4 - MATERIAL, EQUIPMENT AND WORKMANSHIP ............................... 17
4.01 QUALITY ................................................................................................................... 17
4.02 SAMPLES AND TESTS OF MATERIAL............................................................... 17
4.03 PROOF OF COMPLIANCE WITH CONTRACT ................................................. 17
4.04 SAFEGUARDING OF EQUIPMENT, MATERIAL AND WORK ...................... 18
4.05 DEFECTIVE MATERIAL, EQUIPMENT AND WORKMANSHIP .................. 18
4.06 CHARACTER OF WORKMEN .............................................................................. 18
4.07 RUBBISH AND DUST CONTROL.......................................................................... 18
4.08 CLEANING UP .......................................................................................................... 19
4.09 GUARANTEE AND WARRANTY .......................................................................... 19
SECTION 5 - PROGRESS AND PAYMENT ..................................................................... 21
5.01 CONTRACT TIME .................................................................................................... 21
5.02 CONTRACT PRICE .................................................................................................. 21
5.03 CONSTRUCTION SCHEDULE .............................................................................. 21
5.04 OVERTIME WORK .................................................................................................. 21
5.05 EXTENSION OF TIME .......................................................................................... 21
5.06 FAILURE TO COMPLETE ON TIME ................................................................... 22
5.07 MONTHLY ESTIMATES AND PAYMENTS........................................................ 22
5.08 UNPAID CLAIMS ...................................................................................................... 24
5.09 FULFILLMENT OF CONTRACT .......................................................................... 24
5.10 FINAL ESTIMATE OF PAYMENT ........................................................................ 24
5.11 FINAL PAYMENT TERMINATES LIABILITY OF CITY ................................. 25
5.12 NOTICE OF COMPLETION ................................................................................... 25
5.13 CHANGES IN THE WORK ..................................................................................... 25
TOC-iv
SECTION 6 - LEGAL RESPONSIBILITY, SAFETY, BONDS AND INSURANCE ...... 30
6.01 RESPONSIBILITY OF CONTRACTOR ................................................................ 30
6.02 LIABILITY OF CONTRACTOR............................................................................. 30
6.03 LAWS, REGULATIONS AND PERMITS .............................................................. 30
6.04 PATENTS AND COPYRIGHTS .............................................................................. 31
6.05 PERMITS AND LICENSES ..................................................................................... 31
6.06 SALES AND USE TAXES ......................................................................................... 31
6.07 LABOR DISCRIMINATION.................................................................................... 31
6.08 WAGE DETERMINATIONS ................................................................................... 31
6.09 APPRENTICES ON PUBLIC WORKS PROJECTS ............................................. 32
6.10 WORKING HOURS .................................................................................................. 32
6.11 PUBLIC SAFETY AND CONVENIENCE.............................................................. 32
6.12 TRENCH EXCAVATION ......................................................................................... 33
6.13 CONCRETE FORMS, FALSE WORK, AND SHORING .................................... 33
6.14 SANITARY PROVISIONS ....................................................................................... 33
6.15 SAFETY AND HEALTH REGULATIONS ............................................................ 33
6.16 LABOR, MATERIAL AND PERFORMANCE BONDS ....................................... 33
6.17 CONTRACTOR NOT RESPONSIBLE FOR DAMAGE RESULTING FROM 33
CERTAIN ACTS OF GOD ................................................................................................ 33
6.18 INSURANCE .............................................................................................................. 34
6.19 LIABILITY OF CITY AND ENGINEER ............................................................... 36
SPECIAL PROVISIONS ............................................................................................................. 1
7.01 THE REQUIREMENTS .............................................................................................. 1
7.02 CITY DESIGNATED ENGINEER ............................................................................ 1
7.03 BEGINNING AND COMPLETION OF WORK AND WORK HOURS ............... 1
7.04 LIQUIDATED DAMAGES ......................................................................................... 1
7.05 STANDARD SPECIFICATIONS AND HIERARCHY ........................................... 1
7.06 WATER AND POWER ............................................................................................... 2
7.07 TRENCH EXCAVATION ........................................................................................... 2
7.08 PERMITS AND LICENSES ....................................................................................... 2
7.09 LINES, GRADES, AND MEASUREMENTS............................................................ 2
7.10 GUARANTEE ............................................................................................................... 3
7.11 RESTORATION OF EXISTING FACILITIES ....................................................... 3
7.12 CONTRACT DRAWINGS .......................................................................................... 3
7.13 SHOP DRAWINGS ...................................................................................................... 3
7.14 INSPECTION ............................................................................................................... 4
7.15 WATERING ................................................................................................................. 4
7.16 PUBLIC CONVENIENCE, SAFETY, AND TRAFFIC CONTROL ...................... 4
7.17 CONSTRUCTION INTERFERENCES .................................................................... 6
TOC-v
7.18 SCHEDULING AND SEQUENCING OF WORK ................................................... 6
7.19 RIGHT-OF-WAY ......................................................................................................... 7
7.20 SHUTDOWNS AND MAINTENANCE OF WATER SERVICES ......................... 7
7.21 COORDINATION OF CONSTRUCTION ............................................................... 7
7.22 COMPLIANCE WITH NATIONAL CLEAN WATER ACT ................................. 7
7.23 INSURANCE ................................................................................................................ 8
7.24 MEASUREMENT & PAYMENT............................................................................... 9
7.25 LABOR COMPLIANCE ............................................................................................. 9
7.26 COVID-19 (SARS-CoV-2) HEALTH AND SAFETY ............................................. 11
TECHNICAL SPECIFICATIONS ............................................................................................. 1
DIVISION 01 – GENERAL REQUIREMENTS
01 50 00 Mobilization
01 74 30 Pressure Pipe Testing and Disinfection
01 75 00 Project Closeout
01 79 00 Owner Staff Training
DIVISION 02 – EXISTING CONDITIONS
02 41 19 Demolition
DIVISION 03 – CONCRETE
03 31 50 Cast-In-Place Concrete
DIVISION 05 – METALS
05 50 00 Miscellaneous Metalwork
DIVISION 26 – ELECTRICAL
26 00 00 Electrical Work General
26 05 15 Industrial Control Panels
26 05 19 Wire and Cabling
26 05 26 Grounding
26 05 33 Electrical Raceway Systems
DIVISION 40 – PROCESS INTERCONNECTIONS
40 05 00 Piping General
40 91 00 Process Control and Instrumentation
40 91 08 Pressure Measuring
40 95 10 PLC Based Control Systems Hardware
40 95 13 Control Panels
DIVISION 43 – MATERIAL HANDLING EQUIPMENT
43 30 00 Valves, General
43 30 36 Rate of Flow Control Valves
TOC-vi
APPENDICES
APPENDIX “A” – WATER STANDARD DRAWINGS
APPENDIX “B” – PUBLIC WORKS STANDARD DRAWINGS
NIB-1
NOTICE INVITING BIDS
RECEIPT OF PROPOSALS. Notice is hereby given that sealed proposals will be received at
the office of City Clerk, City Hall, 213 East Foothill Boulevard, Azusa, California, 91702, until
2:00 PM, on Tuesday, October 27, 2020, for the Construction of the TRIANGLE FLOW
CONTROL VALVE – PROJECT NO. W-354.
DESCRIPTION OF WORK. The work consists of the construction of one 16-inch automatic
flow control valve by Cla-Val Company in the existing valve vault, including valves, piping, vents,
access ladder, electrical, instrumentation and controls, appurtenances, and all supplies, equipment,
services, bidding schedule items, and transportation necessary to construct and complete the
project entitled:
TRIANGLE WATER FLOW CONTROL VALVE
PROJECT NO. W-354
COMPLETION OF WORK. All work shall be completed within 60 calendar days after date
set forth in the Notice to Proceed.
MANDATORY PRE-BID TELEPHONE CONFERENCE. There will be a mandatory pre-
bid telephone conference meeting held on Tuesday, October 20, 2020 at 2:00 PM via "Zoom."
The telephone conference call will be recorded. Attendees are required to identify themselves by
name and by company and are required to remain in the conference meeting for its entire duration.
Detailed information regarding the conference meeting can be found in the Instruction to Bidders
section.
Meeting ID: 915 9629 4434
Meeting Password: 011102
Call In Number: +1 253 215 8782 US or +1 301 715 8592 US
DRAWINGS AND SPECIFICATIONS. Copies of the Drawings and Specifications may be
examined without charge at the office of the Azusa Light and Water Department, 729 N. Azusa
Avenue, Azusa, CA 91702. Requests for electronic copies via PDF of the Drawings and
Specifications may be sent via email without charge. Please email Ammar Tohmeh at
atohmeh@azusaca.gov with requests, each person and firm will be placed on the plan holder list.
Complete sets may be obtained from the front desk at the Light and Water Department at a charge
of $50.00 (non-refundable) for each set. An additional charge of $20.00 (non-refundable) will be
made for mailing each set.
GUARANTEE. Each bid shall be made on the proposal form furnished by the City herewith and
shall be in accordance with the Drawings, Specifications and other Contract Documents and shall
be accompanied by a certified check, cashier's check or bidders' bond, payable to the City in a sum
not less than ten percent (10%) of the amount of the bid, as a guarantee that the bidder will enter
into the Contract for the work, the full amount of such guarantee to be forfeited to the City should
said bidder fail to enter into said Contract. The successful bidder will be required to furnish a
Faithful Performance Bond in the amount of not less than one hundred percent (100%) of the
Contract price, and a Labor and Material Bond in an amount of not less than one hundred percent
NIB-2
(100%) of the Contract price, said bonds to be secured from a surety company authorized to do
business in the State of California, and to be subject to the approval of the City Attorney.
PREVAILING WAGE RATES. Bidders are hereby notified that pursuant to Section 1773 et
seq. of the Labor Code of the State of California, the City Council of the City of Azusa incorporates
herein by reference the general prevailing rate of per diem wages as determined by the Department
of Industrial Relations (DIR) of the State of California. Copies of the prevailing rate of per diem
wages are on file in the office of the City Clerk and will be made available to any interested party
upon request or online at http://www.dir.ca.gov/dlsr. In accordance with the Labor Code, no
workman employed upon work under contract to the City shall be paid less than the above
referenced prevailing wage rate. A copy of said rates shall be posted at each job site during the
course of construction. The concrete delivery requirements pursuant to AB 219 shall also apply.
Any classification omitted therein shall be paid not less than the prevailing wage scale as
established for similar work in the particular area and all overtime shall be paid at the prevailing
rates as established for the particular area. Sunday and holiday time shall be paid at the wage rates
determined by the DIR. The successful bidder and all subcontractor(s) under the bidder, shall
comply with all applicable Labor Code provisions, which include, but are not limited to the
payment of not less than the required prevailing rates to all workers employed by them in the
execution of the Contract, the employment of apprentices, the hours of labor and the debarment of
contractors and subcontractors. All Contractor and subcontractors (of any tier) shall be registered
with the DIR for any projects with bids and any contract for public work. All Contractors and
subcontractors must register with the DIR prior to bidding on or performing any public work.
Registration must be done online and includes a registration fee. All Contractors must
electronically submit all certified payrolls to DIR and the contract is submit to compliance
monitoring.
SOLE SOURCE. Pursuant to Public Contract Code Section 3400(b), if the City has made any
findings designating certain materials, products, things, or services, by specific brand name or
trade name, such findings and the materials, products, things, or services and their specific brand
or trade names will be set forth on the Contract Plans or Specifications.
PAYMENT. Payment will be made to the Contractor in accordance with the Specifications.
SUBSTITUTION OF SECURITIES. Contractor may, at his sole cost and expense, substitute
securities equivalent to any monies withheld by the City to ensure performance under the Contract.
Such securities shall be deposited with the City or with a state or federally chartered bank as escrow
agent who shall pay such monies upon satisfactory completion of the contract. The Contractor
shall be the beneficial owner of any securities substituted for monies withheld and shall receive
any interest thereon. Securities eligible for substitution shall include those listed in Public Contract
Code Section 22300.
OPENING OF PROPOSALS. The proposals will be publicly opened and read at the time and
date stated above, in the office of the City Clerk of the Azusa City Hall, and the results will
thereafter be referred to the City Council Utility Board for consideration at their next regular
meeting.
NIB-3
CITY'S RIGHTS RESERVED. The City reserves the right to reject any or all bids, to waive
any informality in a bid, and to make awards in the interest of the City. No bidder may withdraw
his bid for a period of 60 days after the bid opening.
COVID-19 (SARS-CoV-2) HEALTH AND SAFETY. Pursuant to the provisions of the
executive orders and regulations issued by Governor Newsom, Los Angeles County, and the City
of Azusa, the successful bidder (Contractor) and all tiers of subcontractor(s) under the bidder shall
comply with all applicable health and safety measures required by the State, County, and City.
This includes, but is not limited to the following: (a) Social Distancing, (b) Zero-tolerance for
working when ill, (c) PPE, including face coverings, (d) Frequent hand-washing, (e) Disinfecting
work areas, and (f) Construction requirements and postings.
REQUIREMENT FOR CONTRACTOR’S LICENSING. The City of Azusa requires that all
contractors be licensed with the State of California in their particular area of expertise. The City
has determined that a Class A or a Class C-34 license is necessary to bid this project. If the bidder
is a specialty contractor, the bidder is alerted to the requirements of Business and Professions Code
section 7059. Per Section 7028.15(e) of the Business and Professions Code, a licensed contractor
shall not submit a bid to a public agency unless his or her contractor's license appears clearly on
the bid, the license expiration date is stated and the bid contains a statement that the representations
therein are made under penalty of perjury. Any bid not containing this information, or a bid
containing information which is subsequently proven false, shall be considered non responsive and
shall be rejected by the City of Azusa. All bidders are required to completely fill out the
"Contractor's License Declaration" contained in the bid documents.
INFORMATION. For further information or questions, contact Melissa Barbosa, PE at (626)
812-5173 or by email at mbarbosa@azusaca.gov. All questions related to this project shall be
submitted in writing via email to Melissa Barbosa, PE at mbarbosa@azusaca.gov. The final date
to submit questions is Wednesday, October 21, 2020 at 4:00 PM. Bidders are encouraged to submit
their pre-bid questions as early as possible in writing, or by email.
CITY OF AZUSA
Dated:
Signature on File
City Clerk
Dates Published:
I-1
INSTRUCTION TO BIDDERS
PROPOSAL. The Proposal shall be made on the forms furnished herewith. The completed
Proposal shall be enclosed in a sealed envelope bearing the name of the bidder and name of the
project. The proposal shall be delivered by the time and to the place stipulated in the Notice
Inviting Bids. It is the bidder's responsibility to see that his proposal is received in proper time.
Any proposal received after the scheduled closing time for receipt of proposals will be returned to
the bidder unopened. The proposal may be withdrawn by the bidder by means of a written request,
signed by the bidder or his properly authorized representative. Such written request must be
delivered to the place stipulated in the Notice Inviting Bids for receipt of proposals prior to the
scheduled closing time for receipt of proposals.
The Proposals will be publicly opened and read at the time and place stipulated in the Notice
Inviting Bids.
Unauthorized conditions, limitations, or provisions attached to a proposal will render it informal
and may cause its rejection. The completed proposal forms shall be without interlineations,
alterations, or erasures. Oral, telegraphic, fax or telephonic proposals or modifications will not be
considered.
AVAILABILITY OF CONTRACT DOCUMENTS. Bids must be submitted to the City on the
Proposal Forms which are a part of the Bid Package for the Project. Contract Documents, Plans,
and Specifications may be obtained from the City at the location(s) and at the time(s) indicated in
the Notice Inviting Bids. Prospective bidders are encouraged to call or email in advance to
determine the availability of Contract Documents, Plans, and Specifications. Any applicable
charges for the Contract Documents, Plans, and Specifications are outlined in the Notice Inviting
Bids.
EXAMINATION OF CONTRACT DOCUMENTS. The City has made copies of the Contract
Documents, Plans, and Specifications available, as indicated above. Bidders shall be solely
responsible for examining the Project Site and the Contract Documents, Plans, and Specifications
including any Addenda issued during the bidding period, and for informing itself with respect to
local labor availability, means of transportation, necessity for security, laws and codes, local permit
requirements, wage scales, local tax structure, contractors’ licensing requirements, availability of
required insurance, and other factors that could affect the Work. Bidders are responsible for
consulting all standards and requirements (including Public Works standards and requirements)
referenced in the Contract Documents, Plans, and Specifications. Failure of Bidder to so examine
and inform itself shall be at its sole risk, and no relief for error or omission will be given except as
required under State law.
INTERPRETATION OF CONTRACT DOCUMENTS. Discrepancies in, and/or omissions
from the Plans, Specifications or other Contract Documents or questions as to their meaning shall
be immediately brought to the attention of the City by submission of a written request for an
interpretation or correction to the City. Such submission, if any, must be sent to Melissa Barbosa,
PE, Water System Engineer (see the Notice of Inviting Bids for contact information).
I-2
Any interpretation of the Contract Documents, Plans, and Specifications will be made only by
written addenda duly issued and mailed or delivered to each person or firm who has purchased a
set of Contract Documents, Plans, and Specifications. The City will not be responsible for any
explanations or interpretations provided in any other manner. No person is authorized to make any
oral interpretation of any provision in the Contract Documents, Plans, and Specifications to any
bidder, and no bidder should rely on any such oral interpretation.
Bids shall include complete compensation for all items that are noted in the Contract Documents
as the responsibility of the Contractor.
ADDENDA. The City reserves the right to revise the Contract Documents, Plans, and
Specifications prior to the bid opening date. Revisions, if any, shall be made by written Addenda.
All addenda issued by the City shall be included in the bid and made part of the Contract
Documents, Plans, and Specifications. Pursuant to Public Contract Code Section 4104.5, if the
City issues an Addendum which includes material changes to the Project less than 72 hours prior
to the deadline for submission of bids, the City will extend the deadline for submission of bids.
The City may determine, in its sole discretion, whether an Addendum warrants postponement of
the bid submission date. Each prospective bidder shall provide City a name, address, telephone
number, and email address to which Addenda may be sent. Copies of Addenda will be furnished
by email, facsimile, first class mail, express mail or other proper means of delivery without charge
to all parties who have obtained a copy of the Contract Documents and provided such current
information. Bidders are responsible for ensuring that they have received any and all Addenda. To
this end, each bidder should contact the Project Engineer, (626) 812-5173 to verify that he/she has
received all Addenda issued, if any, prior to the bid opening.
ALTERNATE BIDS. If alternate bid items are called for in the Contract Documents, the lowest
bid will be determined on the basis of the base bid only. However, the City may choose to award
the contract on the basis of the base bid alone or the base bid and any alternate or combination of
alternates. The time required for completion of the alternate bid items has been factored into the
Contract duration and no additional Contract time will be awarded for any of the alternate bid
items. The City may elect to include one or more of the alternate bid items, or to otherwise remove
certain work from the Project scope of work, accordingly each Bidder must ensure that each bid
item contains a proportionate share of profit, overhead, and other costs or expenses which will be
incurred by the Bidder.
COMPLETION OF PROPOSAL FORMS. Bids shall only be prepared using copies of the
Proposal Forms which are included in the Contract Documents. The use of substitute prposal forms
other than clear and correct photocopies of those provided by the City will not be permitted. Bids
shall be executed by an authorized signatory as described in these Instructions to Bidders. In
addition, Bidders shall fill in all blank spaces (including inserting “N/A” where applicable) and
initial all interlineations, alterations, or erasures to the Proposal Forms. Bidders shall neither delete,
modify, nor supplement the printed matter on the Proposal Forms nor make substitutions thereon.
USE OF BLACK OR BLUE INK, INDELIBLE PENCIL, OR A TYPEWRITER IS REQUIRED.
Deviations in the bid form may result in the bid being deemed non-responsive.
DISCREPANCIES IN PROPOSALS. Each Bidder shall submit its Bid in strict conformity with
the requirements of the Contract Documents, Plans, and Specifications. Unauthorized additions,
modifications, revisions, conditions, limitations, exclusions, or provisions attached to a Bid may
I-3
render it non-responsive and may cause its rejection. Bidders shall neither delete, modify, nor
supplement the printed matter on the Proposal Forms, nor make substitutions thereon. Oral,
telephonic and electronic modifications will not be considered, unless the Notice Inviting Bids
authorizes the submission of electronic bids and modifications thereto and such modifications are
made in accordance with the Notice Inviting Bids.
DISCREPANCIES IN PROPOSALS. The bidder shall furnish a price for all bid items in the
proposal and failure to do so will render the proposal invalid and will cause its rejection. In the
event the total indicated for the schedule does not agree with the sum of the prices bid on the
individual items the prices bid on the individual item shall govern and the total for the schedule
will be corrected accordingly.
PROPOSAL GUARANTEE. Each proposal shall be accompanied by a certified or cashier's
check or bid bond in the amount of not less than ten (10%) percent of the total amount named in
the bidder's proposal. Said check or bond shall be made payable to the City of Azusa and shall be
given as a guarantee that the bidder, if awarded the work, will enter into a contract within ten (10)
calendar days after date of written notice of award and will furnish satisfactory Faithful
Performance Bond and Labor and Material Bond, each of said bonds to be in the amount stated in
the Notice Inviting Bids. In case of refusal or failure to enter into said contract, each check or bond,
as the case may be, shall be forfeited to the City. If the bidder elects to furnish a Bid Bond as his
proposal guarantee, he shall use the Bid Bond form herein, or one conforming substantially to it
in form.
BIDDER'S EXAMINATION OF SITE. Before submitting a proposal, the bidder shall carefully
examine the Drawings, Specifications, and other Contract Documents, and shall visit the site of
the work. Each prospective bidder is responsible for fully acquainting itself with the conditions of
the Project Site (which may include more than one site), as well as those relating to the construction
and labor of the Project, to fully understand the facilities, difficulties and restrictions which may
impact the cost or effort required to complete the Project. The bidder shall be familiar with existing
site conditions and have a clear understanding of the requirements of the Contract regarding the
furnishing of materials and performance of work. The Bidder agrees that the Contract Documents,
Plans, and Specifications are sufficient in scope and detail to convey an understanding of the
conditions for Contractor performance on the job and for furnishing all work in an acceptable
manner. A Mandatory Pre-Bid Meeting will be held for this project (see Notice Inviting Bids).
DESIGNATION OF SUBCONTRACTORS. Pursuant to State law, the Bidders must designate
the name and location of each subcontractor who will perform work or render services for the
Bidder in an amount that exceeds one-half of one percent (1/2%) of the Bidder’s Total Bid Price,
or $10,000 whichever is greater, as well as the portion of work each such subcontractor will
perform on the form provided herein by the City. No additional time will be provided to bidders
to submit any of the requested information in the Designation of Subcontractor form. The total
work performed by subcontractors may not equal or exceed fifty percent (50%) of the total work
required for the project.
COMPETENCY OF BIDDERS. In selecting the lowest responsible bidder, consideration will
be given not only to the financial standing but also to the general competency of the bidder for the
performance of the work covered by the proposal. To this end, each proposal shall be supported
by a statement of the bidder's experience as to recent date on the form entitled "INFORMATION
I-4
REQUIRED OF BIDDER" bound herein. No proposal for work will be accepted from a contractor
who is not licensed in accordance with applicable state law.
DISQUALIFICATION OF BIDDERS. More than one proposal form from an individual, firm,
partnership, corporation, or association under the same or different names will not be considered.
Reasonable grounds for believing that any bidder is interested in more than one proposal for the
work contemplated will cause the rejection of all proposals in which such bidder is interested. If
there is reason for believing that collusion exists among the bidders, all bids will be rejected and
none of the participants in such collusion will be considered for future proposals.
RETURN OF PROPOSAL GUARANTEE. Within ten (10) days after award of the Contract,
the City will return all proposal guarantees, except bonds, to their respective bidder except those
accompanying proposals submitted by the three lowest responsible bidders. Those three will be
held until the Contract has been finally executed after which they will be returned to the respective
bidders whose proposal they accompany.
AWARD OF CONTRACT. Award of a contract, if it is to be awarded, will be made to the lowest
responsible bidder whose proposal complies with all the requirements prescribed. The City
reserves the right to reject any or all bids, to waive any informality in a bid, and to make awards
in the interest of the City. The award, if made, will be made within 10 days of the date for receipt
of proposals. The City reserves the right to eliminate portions of the bid if deemed necessary by
the City.
EXECUTION OF CONTRACT. The bidder to whom award is made shall execute a written
contract with the City on the form of agreement provided, and shall secure all insurance and bonds
required by the Specifications within ten (10) calendar days after the Notice of Award. Failure or
refusal to enter into a contract as herein provided or to conform to any of the stipulated
requirements in connection therewith shall be just cause for annulment of the award and the
forfeiture of the proposal guarantee. If the successful bidder refuses or fails to execute the Contract,
the City may award the Contract to the second lowest responsible bidder. If the second lowest
responsible bidder refuses or fails to execute the Contract, the City may award the Contract to the
third lowest responsible bidder. On the failure or refusal to such second or third lowest bidders to
execute the Contract, such bidders' guarantee likewise shall be forfeited to the City. The work may
then be re-advertised for bids.
NON-DISCRIMINATION IN EMPLOYMENT. Contracts for work under this proposal will
obligate the Contractors and Subcontractors not to discriminate against any person on account of
race, color, religion, sex or national origin.
DEPARTMENT OF INDUSTRIAL RELATIONS. Pursuant to Labor Code Section 1725.5,
all bidders and subcontractors shall be registered with the Department of Industrial Relations
(DIR). Any bid not meeting this requirement will be considered non-responsive and shall be
rejected by the City of Azusa.
I-5
MANDATORY PRE-BID TELEPHONE CONFERENCE
There will be a mandatory pre-bid telephone conference meeting held on Tuesday, October 20,
2020 at 2:00 PM via "Zoom." The telephone conference call will be recorded. Attendees are
required to identify themselves by name and by company and are required to remain in the
conference meeting for its entire duration. Following the instructions below (attendees are
encouraged to join the meeting 15 minutes prior to the start of the meeting):
To join via phone:
1. Call one of the numbers below and enter the Meeting ID followed by your Participant ID
(if applicable):
Meeting ID: 915 9629 4434
Call In Number: +1 253 215 8782 US or +1 301 715 8592 US
To join via your Computer:
1. Log in to "Zoom" by signing up for a new account or by signing in to your existing account
at (signing up for an account is free):
https://zoom.us/signin
2. On your computer, click on or follow the link below and enter the Meeting ID:
https://zoom.us/j/91596294434?pwd=VkNRV04zN2FjKzI5QkNsd2crenlwZz09
Meeting ID: 915 9629 4434
3. Join with Audio by clicking on either the "Phone Call" or "Computer Audio" options. (Note
that the "Computer Audio option requires a computer microphone and speaker)
a. Computer Audio:
Click on the "Computer Audio" tab then click on the "Join with Computer
Audio" button (requires a computer microphone and speaker to work).
b. Phone Call:
Click on the "Phone Call" tab then call one of the numbers and follow the
instructions to enter the Meeting ID, followed by your Participant ID:
Meeting ID: 915 9629 4434
Call In Number: +1 253 215 8782 US or +1 301 715 8592 US
P-1
AZUSA LIGHT AND WATER
PROPOSAL
PROPOSAL - TO THE CITY COUNCIL PROJECT NO. W-354
CITY OF AZUSA
AZUSA, CALIFORNIA
The undersigned bidder hereby proposes to furnish all labor, material, equipment, tools and
services necessary to perform all work required under the City's Specifications entitled:
CONTRACT DOCUMENTS, PLANS, AND SPECIFICATIONS FOR CONSTRUCTION OF
TRIANGLE WATER FLOW CONTROL VALVE
PROJECT NO. W-354
in accordance with the intent of said Specifications, Drawings, and all Addenda issued by said City
prior to opening of the proposals.
Said bidder agrees that, within 10 calendar days after date of written Notice of Award of the
Contract by said City, he will execute a contract in the required form, of which the Notice Inviting
Bids, Instructions to Bidders, Proposal, Specifications, Drawings, and all Addenda issued by said
City prior to the opening of proposals, are part, and will secure the required insurance and bonds;
and that upon failure to do so within said time, then the proposal guarantee furnished by said bidder
shall be forfeited to said City as liquidated damages for such failure; provided, that if said bidder
shall execute the Contract and secure the required insurance and bonds within said time, his check,
if furnished shall be returned to him within 5 days thereafter, and the Bid Bond, if furnished, shall
become void.
Said bidder further agrees to complete all work required under the Contract within the time
stipulated in said Specifications, and to accept in full payment therefore the price named in the
Bidding Schedule.
I am aware of the provisions of Section 3700 of the Labor Code which requires every employer to
be insured against liability for Workmen's Compensation or to undertake self-insurance in
accordance with such provisions before commencing the performance of the work of this Contract.
Dated: ____________
Bidder
____________________________________
Signature
Title
P-2
Bidder’s Initials
AZUSA LIGHT AND WATER
BID SCHEDULE
BID
ITEM ITEM DESCRIPTION QUANTITY UNIT PRICE PRICE
1
Furnish all labor, material and equipment
to mobilize, demobilize, and provide
cleanup of construction site; provide all
bonds and insurances, (40% due at
mobilization, 20% due at 60% project
completion, and 40% due at
demobilization), complete for the Lump
Sum Price of:
________________________________
(Words)
1 LS
$______________
$________________
2
Furnish all labor, material, and equipment
as required to remove existing pipe,
construct (1) 16-inch flow control valve
(Cla-Val 131-01G w/ VC22D controller),
piping and fittings, pipe supports, (2)
pressure transmitters (Endress+Hauser
PMP71S) w/ block-n-bleed manifold
valves, other required items within vault,
and all other appurtenances necessary to
install the flow control valve, complete for
the Lump Sum Price of:
________________________________
(Words)
1 LS
$______________
$________________
3
Furnish all labor, material, and equipment
as required to construct (1) access ladder
and (2) air vents serving the flow control
valve vault, and all other appurtenances
necessary to install per Drawings,
complete for the Lump Sum Price of:
________________________________
(Words) 1 LS
$______________
$________________
P-3
Bidder’s Initials
4
Furnish all labor, material, and equipment
as required to construct (1) meter panel,
(1) control (RTU) panel, and all
Electrical work, serving the flow control
valve, cast-in-place concrete foundations,
protective bollards, wires and cabling,
conduits, grounding, and all other
appurtenances necessary to obtain power,
serve and operate the flow control valve,
complete for the Lump Sum Price of:
________________________________
(Words) 1 LS
$______________
$________________
5
Furnish all labor, material, and equipment
to restore the entire site and surrounding
area to pre-construction conditions or
better and to restore all grading, gravel,
subgrade earthwork, landscaping,
irrigation, hardscape, curb & gutter,
sidewalk, street restoration, natural terrain,
street lighting, electrical conduits, and any
facilities disturbed due to construction,
complete for the Lump Sum Price of:
________________________________
(Words) 1 LS
$______________
$________________
6
Furnish all labor, material, and equipment
to start-up, close-out, pressure test and
disinfect, per ALW standard W-5,
complete, for the Lump Sum Price of:
________________________________
(Words) 1 LS
$______________
$________________
P-4
Bidder’s Initials
BID SCHEDULE
SUBTOTAL BID ITEMS 1 THROUGH 6 $______________
CONTINGENCY – 10% OF TOTAL BID (THE BIDDER SHALL PROVIDE A
10% CONTINGENCY TOTAL ON THE BID FOR POTENTIAL CHANGE
ORDERS ON THE PROJECT. THE CITY RESERVES THE RIGHT TO
IMPLEMENT THE USE OF THIS ITEM, EITHER PARTIALLY OR
COMPLETELY, OR DELETE THIS ITEM IN ITS ENTIRETY).
$______________
TOTAL BID PLUS CONTINGENCY $______________
TOTAL BID PLUS CONTINGENCY (IN WRITTEN WORDS)
(Written)
The City reserves the right to delete any bid item and increase or decrease the estimated
quantities that will serve the City's best interest.
Bid Items 1 through 3 shall be as described in the Special Provisions – Section 7.24 –
Measurement & Payment. Bidder shall initial in acknowledgement ______________.
It is understood that the foregoing quantities are approximate only and are solely for the
purpose of facilitating the comparison of bids, and that the Contractor’s compensation will
be computed upon the basis of the actual quantities in the complete work, whether they be
more or less than those shown.
Bidder hereby acknowledges receipt of Addenda No.’s ______________________________
________________________________________ ______________________________
COMPANY TELEPHONE #
________________________________________ ______________________________
BIDDER’S SIGNATURE LICENSE NO.
Bidder’s Initials
P-5
MATERIAL AND EQUIPMENT MANUFACTURERS
The undersigned bidder understands and agrees that the City may consider this Bid incomplete
unless the Bidder names a manufacturer/supplier for each item of equipment in the following list.
The City may at its discretion reject any bid whose list is incomplete or improperly compiled. Not
more than one manufacturer/supplier shall be named for each item of equipment. The undersigned
Bidder hereby agrees that, after submission of this Bid, a change will not be made in the following
listing of manufacturers/suppliers and will not award a contract or agreement of any kind to a
manufacturer not listed below for the listed items of equipment unless such change, award, or
agreement is first approved in writing by the City according to the provisions of the Contract
Documents pertaining to substitutions and equals. The manufacturers/suppliers named below
produce the listed items of equipment which comply with the requirements of the Contract
Documents, and the undersigned Bidder will furnish and install the complying equipment of the
manufacturers/suppliers named in the following list:
SCHEDULE OF MANUFACTURERS
Item Description
Manufacturer
Bidder’s Initials
P-6
LIST OF SUBCONTRACTORS
In compliance with the Subletting and Subcontracting Fair Practices Act Chapter 4 (commencing at Section
4100), Part 1, Division 2 of the Public Contract Code of the State of California and any amendments thereof
(the “Act”), Bidder shall set forth below: (a) the name and the location of the place of business, (b) the
California contractor license number, (c) the DIR public works contractor registration number unless
exempt pursuant to Labor Code Sections 1725.5 and 1771.1, and (d) the portion of the work which will be
done by each subcontractor who will perform work or labor or render service to the Bidder in or about the
construction of the work or improvement to be performed under this Contract in an amount in excess of
one-half of one percent (0.5%) of the Bidder’s Total Bid Price. Notwithstanding the foregoing, if the work
involves the construction of streets and highways, then the Bidder shall list each subcontractor who will
perform work or labor or render service to the Bidder in or about the work in an amount in excess of one-
half of one percent (0.5%) of the Bidder’s Total Bid Price or $10,000, whichever is greater. No additional
time shall be granted to provide the below requested information.
If a Bidder fails to specify a subcontractor or if a contractor specifies more than one subcontractor for the
same portion of work, then the Bidder shall be deemed to have agreed that it is fully qualified to perform
that portion of work and that it shall perform that portion of the work itself without subcontractor(s). The
Bidder shall not list alternative subcontractors for the same work.
Bidders are advised that pursuant to Public Contract Code section 4110, a prime contractor violating any
provisions of the Act shall be subject to the following penalties, which may be levied by the City in its sole
discretion: (1) termination of the Contract for cause or (2) the assessment of a penalty in the amount of not
more than 10 percent of the amount of the subcontract involved. Further, the City may report any violations
or suspected violations to the Contractors State License Board, which may take disciplinary action in
addition to the penalties noted above.
If additional pages are required, duplicate page P-7.
Name, Address, and Phone
Number of Subcontractor
License #&
Classification DIR No.
Work
Performed by
Subcontractor
% of
Total
Bid
Dollar
Value of
Subcontract
Name:
Address:
Phone Number:
Bidder’s Initials
P-7
Name, Address, and Phone
Number of Subcontractor
License #&
Classification DIR No.
Work
Performed by
Subcontractor
% of
Total
Bid
Dollar
Value of
Subcontract
Name:
Address:
Phone Number:
Name:
Address:
Phone Number:
Name:
Address:
Phone Number:
Name:
Address:
Phone Number:
Bidder’s Initials
P-8
CONTRACTOR’S EQUIPMENT
The undersigned Bidder is licensed in accordance with the laws of the State of California: License
Number , Class .
The following is a list of all major items of construction equipment and vehicles available to the
Bidder which the Bidder believes to be necessary or essential to the completion of the project:
Item Lease/Owned Date/Year of
Manufacturers
Condition
Bidder’s Initials
P-9
BID BOND FORM
SEE ATTACHED
KNOW ALL MEN BY THESE PRESENTS,
That ________________________________________________________ as Principal, and
_____________________________________________________________________ as Surety,
are held and firmly bound unto the City of Azusa hereinafter called "City" in the sum of:
_______________________________________________________________________ dollars,
(not less than 10 percent of the total amount of the bid)
for the payment of which sum, well and truly to be made, we bind ourselves our heirs, executors,
administrators, successors, and assigns, jointly and severally, firmly by these presents.
WHEREAS, said Principal has submitted a bid to said City to perform all work required under the
City's Specifications entitled:
CONTRACT DOCUMENTS, PLANS, AND SPECIFICATIONS FOR CONSTRUCTION OF
TRIANGLE WATER FLOW CONTROL VALVE
PROJECT NO. W-354
NOW THEREFORE, if said Principal is awarded a contract by said City, and, within the time and
in the manner required under the heading "Instructions to Bidders" bound with said Specifications,
enters into a written contract on the form of Agreement bound with said Specifications and
furnished the required insurance and required bonds, one to guarantee faithful performance and
the other to guarantee payment of labor and materials, then this obligation shall be null and void,
otherwise it shall remain in full force and effect.
In the event suit is brought upon this bond by said City and judgment is recovered, said Surety
shall pay all costs incurred by said City in such suit, including a reasonable attorney's fee to be
fixed by the court.
Principal Surety
By By ______________________________
Its Its _____________________________
By By ______________________________
Its Its ______________________________
Surety signatures on this bond must be acknowledged before notary publics, and a legally
sufficient power of attorney must be attached to the bond to verify the authority of any party
signing on behalf of a surety.
Bidder’s Initials
P-10
INFORMATION REQUIRED OF BIDDERS
The following information must be completed by Bidder in a complete and accurate manner and submitted
with the bid. If any information provided by a Bidder becomes inaccurate, the Bidder must immediately
notify the City and provide updated accurate information in writing and under penalty of perjury. The City
may verify any or all information provided in completed bids, consider information provided by sources
other than the Bidder, and conduct such investigations as the City deems appropriate to assist in the
evaluation of the bid. The City reserves the right to determine that any Bidder is non-responsible and
subject to disqualification if it finds the information provided herein is inaccurate, misleading or false, or
upon evidence of collusion or other illegal practices on the part of a Bidder. Failure by Bidder to complete
this form and submit it with its bid may result in rejection of the bid as non-responsive.
A. INFORMATION ABOUT BIDDER
NOTE: Where Bidder is a joint venture, pages shall be duplicated and information provided for all
parties to the joint venture.
1.0 Name of Bidder:
2.0 Type, if Entity:
3.0 Bidder Address:
Telephone Number Fax Number
Email Address
3.1 Type of Firm:
3.2 Corporation organized under the laws of the State of ______________________
3.3 Contractor’s License: State License No. ________________________________
3.4 Contractor’s License: Expiration Date _________________________________
3.5 Department of Industrial Relations (DIR) Registration No. __________________
4.0 How many years has Bidder’s organization been in business as a Contractor?
4.1 Number of years of experience in projects of this type:
Bidder’s Initials
P-11
5.0 How many years has Bidder’s organization been in business under its present name?
5.1 Under what other or former names has Bidder’s organization operated?
6.0 If Bidder’s organization is a corporation, answer the following:
6.1 Date of Incorporation:
6.2 State of Incorporation:
6.3 President’s Name:
6.4 Vice-President’s Name(s):
6.5 Secretary’s Name:
6.6 Treasurer’s Name:
7.0 If an individual or a partnership, answer the following:
7.1 Date of Organization:
7.2 Name and address of all partners (state whether general or limited partnership):
8.0 If other than a corporation or partnership, describe organization and name principals:
9.0 List other states in which Bidder’s organization is legally qualified to do business.
Bidder’s Initials
P-12
10.0 What type of work does the Bidder normally perform with its own forces?
11.0 Has Bidder ever failed to complete any work awarded to it? If so, note when, where, and
why:
12.0 Within the last five years, has any officer or partner of Bidder’s organization ever been an
officer or partner of another organization when it failed to complete a contract? If so, attach
a separate sheet of explanation:
13.0 Within the last five years, has any CSLB license held by Bidder’s organization or its
Responsible Managing Employee (RME) or Responsible Managing Officer (RMO) been
suspended? If so, attach a separate sheet of explanation:
14.0 At any time in the last five years has Bidder been assessed and paid liquidated damages
after completion of a project under a construction contract with either a public or private
owner? If so, attach a separate sheet of explanation:
Bidder’s Initials
P-13
15.0 In the last five years has Bidder, or any firm with which any of Bidder’s owners, officers
or partners was associated, been debarred, disqualified, removed or otherwise prevented
from bidding on, or completing, any government agency or public works project for any
reason? If so, attach a separate sheet of explanation:
16.0 In the last five years has Bidder been denied an award of a public works contract based on
a finding by a public agency that Bidder was not a responsible bidder? If so, attach a
separate sheet of explanation:
17.0 In the past five years has any claim against or filed by Bidder concerning Bidder’s work
on a construction project been filed in court or resolved through any alternative dispute
resolution process including, without limitation, arbitration or mediation? If so, attach a
separate sheet of explanation:
18.0 List Trade References:
19.0 List Bank References (Bank and Branch Address):
20.0 Name of Bonding Company and Name and Address of Agent:
Bidder’s Initials
P-14
21.0 Person(s) who inspected this project’s site of work prior to the bid:
Inspected by: ________________________________ Date: __________
Inspected by: ________________________________ Date:__________
22.0 Person(s) who attended the mandatory pre-bid meeting:
23.0 References:
The bidder is required to state what work of a similar character to that included in the proposed contract
he/she has successfully performed and give references to verify responsibility, experience, skill, and
business and financial standing. Minimum 4 references shall be provided. Additional numbered pages
outlining this portion of the proposal may be attached to this page.
Reference 1
Project Name:
Type of Work:
Year Completed:
Contract Amount:
Name / Address of
Owner / Agency:
Reference Contact:
Name:________________________
Tel:__________________________
Title:____________________
Reference 2
Project Name:
Type of Work:
Year Completed:
Contract Amount:
Name / Address of
Owner / Agency:
Reference Contact:
Name: ________________________
Tel: __________________________
Title: ____________________
Bidder’s Initials
P-15
Reference 3
Project Name:
Type of Work:
Year Completed:
Contract Amount:
Name / Address of
Owner / Agency:
Reference Contact:
Name:________________________
Tel:__________________________
Title:____________________
Reference 4
Project Name:
Type of Work:
Year Completed:
Contract Amount:
Name / Address of
Owner / Agency:
Reference Contact:
Name: ________________________
Tel: __________________________
Title: ____________________
13. Organization Chart:
The bidder is required to submit a complete organization chart for the entire company, including all
owners, officers, personnel, employees, administrative staff, superintendents, foremen, laborers,
tradespersons, and apprentices. Each individual shall have their name and respective titles listed.
Bidder’s Initials
P-16
B. LIST OF CURRENT PROJECTS (ACTIVE OR BACKLOG)
[**Duplicate Page if needed for listing additional current projects.**]
Project Description of
Bidder’s Work
Completion Date Cost of Bidder’s
Work
Name and
Telephone
Number of
Owner
Bidder’s Initials
P-17
C. LIST OF ALL PROJECTS COMPLETED OR SUSPENDED OVER THE LAST FIVE
YEARS
[**Duplicate Page if needed for listing additional completed projects.**]
Please include only those projects which are similar enough to demonstrate Bidder’s ability to perform
the required work.
Project Description of
Bidder’s Work
Completion Date *
Cost of Bidder’s
Work
Name and
Telephone
Number of
Owner
* Any projects that were awarded but not completed due to suspension or cancellation must be explained
in Item 11.0.
Bidder’s Initials
P-18
D. EXPERIENCE AND TECHNICAL QUALIFICATIONS QUESTIONNAIRE
Personnel:
The Bidder shall identify the key personnel to be assigned to this project in a management, construction
supervision or engineering capacity.
1. List each person’s job title, name and percent of time to be allocated to this project:
2. Summarize each person’s specialized education:
3. List each person’s years of construction experience relevant to the project:
4. Summarize such experience:
Bidder agrees that personnel named in this Bid will remain on this Project until completion of all relevant
Work, unless substituted by personnel of equivalent experience and qualifications approved in advance by
the City.
Bidder’s Initials
P-19
Changes Occurring Since Last Submission (If Applicable)
If any substantive changes have occurred since Bidder submitted its bid package for this Project, Bidder
shall list them below. If none are listed, Bidder certifies that no substantive changes have occurred.
_______
Additional Bidder’s Statements:
If the Bidder feels that there is additional information which has not been included in the questionnaire
above, and which would contribute to the qualification review, it may add that information in a statement
here or on an attached sheet, appropriately marked:
_______
E. VERIFICATION AND EXECUTION
These Bid Forms shall be executed only by a duly authorized official of the Bidder:
I declare under penalty of perjury under the laws of the State of California that the foregoing information
is true and correct:
Name of Bidder
Signature
Name
Title
Date
Bidder’s Initials
P-20
NON-COLLUSION AFFIDAVIT
STATE OF CALIFORNIA )
) SS
COUNTY OF )
[NAME], being first duly sworn, deposes and says
that he/she is [SOLE OWNER, PARTNER, PRESIDENT, ETC],
of [CONTRACTOR], the party making the foregoing bid;
that such bid is not made in the interest of or on behalf of any undisclosed person, partnership,
company association, organization, or corporation; that such bid is genuine and not collusive or
sham; that said bidder has not directly or indirectly induced or solicited any other bidder to put in
a false or sham bid, and has not directly or indirectly colluded, conspired, connived, or agreed with
any bidder or anyone else to put in a sham bid, not that anyone shall refrain from bidding; that
said bidder has not in any manner, directly or indirectly, sought by agreement, communications or
conference with anyone to fix the bid price of said bidder or any other bidder, nor to fix any
overhead, profit, or cost element of such bid price, nor of that of any other bidder, nor to secure
any advantage against the public body awarding the contract or anyone interested in the proposed
contract; that all statements contained in such bid are true; and, further, that said bidder has not,
directly or indirectly, submitted his or her bid price or any breakdown thereof, nor the contents
thereof, nor divulged information or date relative thereto, nor paid and will not pay any fee in
connection therewith to any corporation, partnership, company, association, organization, bid
depository, nor to any member or agent thereof, nor to any other individual except to such person
or persons as have a partnership or other financial interest with said bidder in his or her general
business.
Dated: Signed:
[TITLE]
Subscribed and sworn to before me this day of , 2020 .
Notary Public SEAL
P-21
CITY OF AZUSA
AGREEMENT
THIS AGREEMENT, made and entered into as of this day of , 2020 by and
between the CITY OF AZUSA, hereinafter called "City" and ___________________ hereinafter
called "Contractor".
WITNESSETH: That the parties hereto do mutually agree as follows:
ARTICLE I: For and in consideration of the payments and agreement hereinafter mentioned to be
made and performed by said City, said Contractor agrees with said City to perform and complete
in a workmanlike manner all work required under the City's Specifications entitled:
CONTRACT DOCUMENTS, PLANS, AND SPECIFICATIONS FOR CONSTRUCTION OF
TRIANGLE WATER FLOW CONTROL VALVE
PROJECT NO. W-354
in accordance with the Specifications and Drawings thereof, to furnish at his own expense all labor,
materials, equipment, tools, supplies, transportation, utilities, bonds and insurance, permits and
services necessary therefore, except such materials, equipment, and services as may be stipulated
in said Specifications to be furnished by said City, and to do everything required by this Agreement
and the said Specifications and Drawings.
ARTICLE II. For furnishing all said labor, materials, equipment, tools, and services, furnishing
and removing all plant, temporary structures, tools, and equipment, and doing everything required
by this Agreement and the said Specifications and Drawings; also for all loss and damage arising
out of the nature of the work aforesaid, or from the action of the elements, or from any seen
unforeseen difficulties which may arise during the prosecution of the work until its acceptance by
said City, and for all risks of every description connected with the work; also for all expenses
resulting from the suspension or discontinuance of work, except as in the said Specifications are
expressly stipulated to be borne by said City; and for completing the work in accordance with the
requirements of said Specifications and Drawings as directed by the Engineer, said City will pay
and said Contractor shall receive, in full compensation therefore, the price(s) named in the
Proposal.
ARTICLE III. The City hereby employs said Contractor to perform the work according to the
terms of this Agreement for price(s) named in the Proposal, and agrees to pay the same at the time,
in the manner, and upon the conditions as stipulated in the said Specifications; and the said parties
for themselves, their heirs, executors, administrators, successors, and assigns, do hereby agree to
the full performance of the covenants contained.
ARTICLE IV. The Notice Inviting Bids, Instruction to Bidders, Proposal, Information Required
of Bidder, the Faithful Performance Bond, the Labor and Material Bond, the General Conditions,
Special Provisions, Technical Specifications, Plans, Drawings, and all Addenda issued by the City
with respect to the foregoing prior to the opening of bids, are hereby incorporated in and made part
of this Agreement.
P-22
CITY OF AZUSA
AGREEMENT
ARTICLE V. All time limits stated in the Contract Documents are of the essence of this
Agreement. No work, services, materials or equipment shall be performed or furnished under this
Agreement unless and until a Notice to Proceed has been given to the Contractor by the City. City
shall, with no liability to Contractor whatsoever, have an absolute right to withhold delivery of a
Notice to Proceed until the expiration of statute of limitations for challenging the City's
environmental review of this project. City shall, also with no liability whatsoever to Contractor,
have an absolute right to cancel this Agreement in the event that litigation is filed against the City
challenging the City's environmental review process. Notwithstanding the foregoing, the City's
said right to cancellation must be exercised not later than 45 days following the bid opening date,
and before delivery of a Notice to Proceed to Contractor.
IN WITNESS WHEREOF, the parties hereto have caused this Contract to be executed as of the
day and year first above written.
CONTRACTOR'S SIGNATURES MUST BE NOTARIZED AND THE NOTARY
ACKNOWLEDGMENT MUST SPECIFY THAT THE SIGNER OF THE AGREEMENT IS
AUTHORIZED TO EXECUTE THE AGREEMENT. THE CITY'S ATTORNEY SHALL
DETERMINE THE SUFFICIENCY OF CONTRACTOR'S SIGNATURES, AND MAY
REQUIRE NOTARIZED SIGNATURES FROM TWO OFFICERS IN THE EVENT THAT
CONTRACTOR IS A CORPORATION.
CITY OF AZUSA CONTRACTOR
By: By:
Robert Gonzales
Mayor
Name:
Attest:
Title:
Jeffrey Lawrence Cornejo Jr. (corporate seal)
City Clerk
Approved as to Form:
Best Best & Krieger LLP
Jeff F. Ferre
City Attorney
P-23
FAITHFUL PERFORMANCE BOND
KNOW ALL PERSONS BY THESE PRESENTS, that _________________________________ as
Contractor, and as Surety, are held and firmly bound unto the City
of Azusa, hereinafter called "City" in the sum of:
________________________________________________ and no/100 ($_____________) dollars, lawful
money of the United States, said sum being not less than one hundred percent (100%) of the total Contract
amount, for the payment of which sum, well and truly to be made, we bind ourselves, our heirs, executors,
and administrators, successors, and assigns, jointly and severally, firmly by these presents.
WHEREAS, said Contractor has been awarded and is about to enter into the annexed agreement with said
City to perform all work required under the City's Specifications entitled:
CONTRACT DOCUMENTS, PLANS, AND SPECIFICATIONS FOR CONSTRUCTION OF
TRIANGLE WATER FLOW CONTROL VALVE
PROJECT NO. W-354
NOW, THEREFORE, if said Contractor shall perform all the requirements of said agreement required to
be performed on his part, at the times and in the manner specified herein and shall indemnify and save
harmless the said City, its officers, employees and agents, as therein stipulated, then this obligation shall be
null and void, otherwise it shall remain in full force and effect.
PROVIDED, that any alterations in the work to be done or the materials to be furnished, which may be
made pursuant to the terms of said Contract, shall not in any way release said Contractor or said Surety
thereunder, nor shall any extensions of time granted under the provisions of said Contract release either
said Contractor or said Surety, and notice of such alterations or extensions of the Contract is hereby waived
by said Surety.
In the event suit is brought upon this Bond by said City and judgment is recovered, (or settlement made
which is favorable to City), said Surety shall pay all costs incurred by said City in such suit, including a
reasonable attorney's fee to be fixed by the court.
SIGNED AND SEALED, this___________ day of______________, 2020 .
Principal Surety
By By ______________________________
Its Its _____________________________
By By ______________________________
Its Its ______________________________
Surety's Phone___________________________
Address ____________________________________________________________
ALL SIGNATURES ON THIS BOND MUST BE ACKNOWLEDGED BEFORE NOTARY PUBLICS,
AND A LEGALLY SUFFICIENT POWER OF ATTORNEY MUST BE ATTACHED TO THE BOND
TO VERIFY THE AUTHORITY OF ANY PARTY SIGNING ON BEHALF OF A SURETY.
P-24
LABOR AND MATERIAL BOND
KNOW ALL PERSONS BY THESE PRESENTS, that _________________________________
as Contractor, and as Surety, are held and firmly
bound unto the City of Azusa, hereinafter called "City" in the sum of:
________________________________________________ and no/100 ($_____________)
dollars, lawful money of the United States, said sum being not less than one hundred percent
(100%) of the total Contract amount, for the payment of which sum, well and truly to be made, we
bind ourselves, our heirs, executors, and administrators, successors, and assigns, jointly and
severally, firmly by these presents.
WHEREAS, said Contractor has been awarded and is about to enter into the annexed agreement
with said City to perform all work required under the City's Specifications entitled:
CONTRACT DOCUMENTS AND SPECIFICATIONS FOR THE CONSTRUCTION OF
TRIANGLE WATER FLOW CONTROL VALVE
PROJECT NO. W-354
THE CONDITION OF THE OBLIGATION IS SUCH THAT, if said Contractor or any of his
Sub-contractors, fails to pay for any materials, equipment, or other supplies, or for rental of same
used in connection with the performance of work contracted to be done or for work or labor thereon
of any kind, or fails to pay any of the persons named in Section 3181, California Civil Code or
amounts due under the Unemployment Insurance Code with respect to work or labor performed
by any such claimant or for any amounts required to be deducted, withheld and paid to the
Employment Developmental Department or its successor(s) from the work of employees of the
Contractor and his Sub-contractors pursuant to Section 13020 of the Unemployment Insurance
Code with respect to such work and labor and all other applicable laws of the State of California
and rules and regulations of its agencies, then said Surety will pay for the same in an amount not
exceeding the sum specified above. This bond shall inure to the benefit of any persons named in
Section 3181 of said California Civil Code, so as to give a right of action to them or their assigns
in any suit brought upon this bond. This bond shall be subject to and include all of the consistent
provisions of the Civil Code of the State of California relating to Payment Bonds for Public Works,
including but not limited to Civil Code, Sections 3225-3226 and Section 3247-3252.
PROVIDED, that any alterations in the work to be done or the materials to be furnished, which
may be made pursuant to the terms of said Contract, shall not in any way release either said
Contractor or said Surety thereunder, nor shall any extensions of time granted under the provisions
of said Contract release either said Contractor or said Surety, and notice of such alterations or
extensions of the Contract is hereby waived by said Surety.
P-25
LABOR AND MATERIAL BOND
In the event suit is brought upon this bond by said City and judgment is recovered, (or settlement
made which is favorable to City), said Surety shall pay all costs incurred by said City in such suit,
including a reasonable attorney's fee to be fixed by the court.
SIGNED AND SEALED, this__________ day of______________, 2020 .
Principal Surety
By By ______________________________
Its Its _____________________________
By By ______________________________
Its Its ______________________________
Surety's Phone___________________________
Address ____________________________________________________________
ALL SIGNATURES ON THIS BOND MUST BE ACKNOWLEDGED BEFORE NOTARY
PUBLICS, AND A LEGALLY SUFFICIENT POWER OF ATTORNEY MUST BE
ATTACHED TO THE BOND TO VERIFY THE AUTHORITY OF ANY PARTY SIGNING
ON BEHALF OF A SURETY.
P-26
ESCROW AGREEMENT
FOR SECURITY DEPOSITS IN LIEU OF RETENTION
This Escrow Agreement is made and entered into this ______ day of ____________, 2020 , by
and between the CITY OF AZUSA, whose address is 213 E. Foothill Blvd., Azusa, California,
91702 (hereinafter called "City"); __________________________________________, whose
address is _____________________________________________________, (hereinafter called
"Contractor"); and ________________________________________________________, whose
address is __________________________________________________________, (hereinafter
called "Escrow Agent").
For the consideration hereinafter set forth, the City, Contractor and Escrow Agent agree as follows:
1. Pursuant to Section 22300 of the Public Contract Code of the State of California, the Contractor
has the option to deposit securities with the Escrow Agent as a substitute for retention earnings
required to be withheld by the City pursuant to the Contract Agreement entered into between the
City and Contractor for the construction of , in the
amount of $ dated , (hereinafter referred to as the
"Contract"). Alternatively, on written request of the Contractor, the City shall make payments of
the retention earnings directly to the Escrow Agent. When the Contractor deposits the securities
as a substitute for Contract earnings, the Escrow Agent shall notify the City within ten (10) days
of the deposit. The market value of the securities at the time of the substitution shall be at least
equal to the cash amount then required to be withheld as retention under the terms of the Contract
between the City and Contractor. Securities shall be held in the name of the City of Azusa, and
shall designate the Contractor as the Beneficial Owner.
2. The City shall make progress payments to the Contractor for those funds which otherwise would
be withheld from progress payments pursuant to the Contract provisions, provided that the Escrow
Agent holds securities in the form and amount specified above.
3. When the City makes payment of retentions earned directly to the Escrow Agent, the Escrow
Agent shall hold them for the benefit of the Contractor until such time as the escrow created under
this Contract is terminated. The Contractor may direct the investment of the payments into
securities. All terms and conditions of this Agreement and the rights and responsibilities of the
parties shall be equally applicable and binding when the City pays the Escrow Agent directly.
4. The Contractor shall be responsible for paying all fees for the expenses incurred by the Escrow
Agent in administering the escrow account. These expenses and payment terms shall be
determined by the Contractor and Escrow Agent.
5. The interest earned on the securities or the money market accounts held in escrow and all
interest earned on that interest shall be for the sole account of Contractor and shall be subject to
withdrawal by the Contractor at any time and from time to time without notice to the City.
P-27
ESCROW AGREEMENT
FOR SECURITY DEPOSITS IN LIEU OF RETENTION
6. The Contractor shall have the right to withdraw all or any part of the principal in the Escrow
Account by written authorization from the City to the Escrow Agent that the City consents to the
withdrawal of the amount sought to be withdrawn by the Contractor.
7. The City shall have a right to draw upon the securities in the event of default by the
Contractor. Upon seven (7) days written notice to the Escrow Agent from the City of the default,
the Escrow Agent shall immediately convert the securities to cash and shall distribute the cash as
instructed by the City.
8. Upon receipt of written notification from the City certifying that the Contract is final and
complete, and that the Contractor has complied with all requirements and procedures applicable
to the Contract, the Escrow Agent shall release to the Contractor all securities and interest on
deposit less escrow fees and charges of the Escrow Account. The escrow shall be closed
immediately upon disbursement of all moneys and securities on deposit and payments of fees
and charges.
9. The Escrow Agent shall rely upon the written notification from the City and the Contractor
pursuant to Sections (1) to (8), inclusive, of this Agreement and the City and Contractor shall
hold the Escrow Agent harmless from the Escrow Agent's release, conversion, and disbursement
of the securities and interest as set forth above.
10. The names of the persons who are authorized to give written notice or to receive written
notice on behalf of the City and on behalf of the Contractor in connection with the foregoing, and
exemplars of their respective signatures are as follows:
P-28
ESCROW AGREEMENT
FOR SECURITY DEPOSITS IN LIEU OF RETENTION
On behalf of the City: On behalf of Contractor:
City Manager ______________________
Title
___________
Signature Name
213 E. Foothill Blvd.
Azusa, CA 91702 Signature
Address
_____________
_________________
Address
On behalf of Escrow Agent:
__________________________________
Title
__________________________________
Name
__________________________________
Signature
__________________________________
__________________________________
Address
At the time the Escrow Account is opened, the City and the Contractor shall deliver to the
Escrow Agent a fully executed counterpart of this Agreement.
IN WITNESS WHEREOF, the parties have executed this Agreement by their proper officers on
the date first set forth above.
City: Contractor:
City Manager Title
Signature Signature
GC-1
GENERAL CONDITIONS
SECTION 1 - DEFINITIONS AND ABBREVIATIONS
1.01 DEFINITIONS
Wherever the words defined in this Section, or pronouns used in their stead, occur in these
Specifications or in any of the other Contract Documents, the intent and meaning shall be as
follows:
(a) CITY. The City of Azusa, County of Los Angeles, State of California. The terms City and
Owner may be used interchangeably.
(b) CITY COUNCIL. The duly elected Council of the City of Azusa.
(c) CITY ENGINEER and ENGINEER. The City Engineer of the City of local jurisdiction, or an
authorized deputy, agent, representative or inspector. The designated Engineer for Azusa Light &
Water for this Contract is listed in the Special Provisions and is also referred to as the “City
Representative or “Representative” in the Contract Documents.
(d) CONTRACTOR. Contractor shall mean the party entering into contract with the City for
performance of the work called for in these Specifications and shown on the Drawings, including
the Contractor's authorized agents.
(e) SUBCONTRACTOR. Subcontractor shall mean any person, firm, or corporation entering into
agreement with the Contractor for performance of any part of the Contractor's obligation under the
Contract.
(f) CONTRACT. Contract shall mean the Contract Documents and shall include the written
agreement entered into by the City and the Contractor for the performance of work described in
the Specifications and shown on the Drawings, together with the Notice Inviting Bids, the
Instructions To Bidders, the Proposal, the Information Required of Bidders, the Specifications, the
Plans, the Drawings, all Addenda issued by the City with respect to the foregoing prior to the
opening of bids, and all Change Orders issued by the City and signed by the Contractor pertaining
to the Contract after the Contract is awarded.
(g) SPECIFICATIONS. Specifications shall mean the Contract Documents consisting of written
requirements for the General Conditions, the Special Provisions and the Technical Specifications
of the Contract, together with all Addenda and Change Orders issued with respect thereto. All
worked performed shall be in accordance with the Standard Specifications for Public Works
Construction (SSPWC), current edition, except as modified herein. In case of conflict between
SSPWC and the Contract Documents, the Contract Documents shall prevail.
GC-2
(h) DRAWINGS. Drawings, Plans, or Contract Drawings shall mean those drawings
accompanying the Specifications which show the location, nature, extent and form of the work,
together with applicable details.
(i) SHOP DRAWINGS. Drawings, diagrams, illustrations, schedules, performance charts,
brochures and other data prepared by the Contractor or any Subcontractor, manufacturer, supplier
or distributor, which illustrates how specific portions of the work shall be fabricated and/or
installed. Shop Drawings are not considered to be part of the Contract Documents.
1.02 ABBREVIATIONS
Wherever the following abbreviations are used they shall have the meanings listed:
AASHTO American Association of State Highway and Transportation Officials
ACI American Concrete Institute
AGA American Gas Association
AI The Asphalt Institute
AIA American Institute of Architects
AIEE American Institute of Electrical Engineers
AISC American Institute of Steel Construction
AISI American Iron and Steel Institute
ANSI American National Standards Institute
API American Petroleum Institute
ASCE American Society of Civil Engineers
ASHRAE American Society of Heating, Refrigeration and Air Conditioning Engineers
ASME American Society of Mechanical Engineers
ASTM American Society of Testing Materials
AWPA American Wood Preservers Association
AWS American Welding Society
AWWA American Water Works Association, Inc.
CRSI Concrete Reinforcement Steel Institute
NEMA National Electrical Manufacturer's Association
NIC Not in Contract
NTS Not to Scale
OAE Or Approved Equal
OSHA Occupational Safety and Health Act
PCA Portland Cement Association
SSPC Steel Structures Painting Council
SSPWC Standard Specifications for Public Works Construction
UBC Uniform Building Code
UPC Uniform Plumbing Code
USACE United States Army Corps of Engineers
U/L Underwriters Laboratories, Inc.
*** END OF SECTION 1 ***
GC-3
SECTION 2 - SPECIFICATIONS AND DRAWINGS
2.01 INTERPRETATION OF SPECIFICATIONS AND DRAWINGS
The Specifications and the Drawings are intended to be explanatory of each other. Any work
indicated in the Drawings and not in the Specifications, or vice versa, shall be executed as if
indicated in both. As the figured dimensions shown on the Drawings and in the Specifications of
the Contract may not in every case agree with scale dimensions, the figured dimensions shall be
followed in preference to the scaled dimensions, and drawings to a large scale shall be followed in
preference to the Drawings to a small scale. Should it appear that the work to be done or any of
the matters relative thereto are not sufficiently detailed or explained in the Contract Documents,
the Contractor shall apply to the Engineer for such further explanations as may be necessary, and
shall conform thereto as part of the Contract. In the event of any doubt or question arising
respecting the meaning of the Specifications or Drawings, reference shall be made to the Engineer
and the Engineer's decision therein shall be final.
2.02 CONFLICTS BETWEEN SPECIFICATIONS AND DRAWINGS
In case of conflict between the Specifications and the Drawings, the Specifications shall govern
over the Drawings. In cases of conflict between the General Conditions and Special Provisions of
the Specifications, the Special Provisions shall govern over the General Conditions.
2.03 STANDARD SPECIFICATIONS
A reference to the Standard Specifications shall mean "Standard Specifications for Public Works
Construction" (SSPWC), the current edition and amendments. All work performed shall conform
to the SSPWC.
2.04 SHOP DRAWINGS
(a) Wherever called for in these Specifications or on the Drawings, or where required by the
Engineer, the Contractor shall furnish to the Engineer for review six (6) prints of each Shop
Drawing. The Shop Drawings shall be approved by the Contractor prior to submittal to the
Engineer. Unless otherwise required, said drawings shall be submitted at a time sufficiently early
to allow review of same by the Engineer, and to accommodate the rate of construction progress
required under the Contract.
(b) The Contractor shall stamp all six copies of the Shop Drawings stating his approval of the
submittal and that the Contractor has determined and verified all field measurements and
quantities, field construction criteria, materials, catalog numbers and similar data, and that the
Contractor has reviewed and coordinated the information in the Shop Drawings with the
requirements of the work and the Contract Documents. Any Shop Drawings submitted without
complying with this Section will not be reviewed by the Engineer.
(c) Except as may be otherwise provided in the Special Provisions, the Engineer will return two
prints of each Shop Drawing to the Contractor, with comments noted thereon, within 15 calendar
GC-4
days following their receipt at the Engineer's office. The Contractor shall make a complete and
acceptable submittal to the Engineer by the second submission of drawings. The City reserves the
right to withhold moneys due the Contractor to cover additional costs of the Engineer's review
beyond the second submittal.
(d) If the Shop Drawings are returned to the Contractor marked APPROVED AS SUBMITTED,
formal revision and re-submittal of said drawing will not be required.
(e) If the Shop Drawings are returned to the Contractor marked APPROVED AS NOTED, formal
revision and re-submittal of said drawing will not be required, but the noted correction will be
adhered to by the Contractor.
(f) If one print of the Shop Drawing is returned to the Contractor marked REVISE AND
RESUBMIT the Contractor shall revise said drawing and shall resubmit six (6) copies of said
revised drawing to the Engineer.
(g) If one print of the Shop Drawing is returned to the Contractor marked NOT APPROVED,
Contractor shall resubmit six (6) copies of a material or installation process specified in the
Contract Documents and/or acceptable to the Engineer.
(h) Fabrication of an item shall not be commenced before the Engineer has reviewed the pertinent
Shop Drawings and returned copies to the Contractor marked either APPROVED AS
SUBMITTED or APPROVED AS NOTED. Revisions indicated on Shop Drawings shall be
considered as changes necessary to meet the requirements of the Contract Drawings and
Specifications and shall not be taken as the basis of claims for extra work. The Contractor shall
have no claim for damages or extension of time due to any delay resulting from the Contractor's
having to make the required revisions to Shop Drawings (unless review by the Engineer of said
drawings is delayed beyond a reasonable period of time and unless the Contractor can establish
that the Engineer's delay in review actually resulted in a delay in the Contractor's construction
schedule). The review of said drawings by the Engineer will be limited to checking for general
agreement with the Specifications and Drawings and shall in no way relieve the Contractor of
responsibility for errors or omissions contained therein, nor shall such review operate to waive or
modify any provision contained in the Specifications or Contract Drawings. Fabricating
dimensions, quantities of material, applicable code requirements and other Contract requirements
shall be the Contractor's responsibility.
2.05 REFERENCE TO STANDARDS, PUBLICATIONS, OR STANDARD
SPECIFICATIONS
Any reference made in the Specifications or Drawings to any specification, standard, or publication
of any organization shall, in the absence of a specific designation to the contrary, be understood to
refer to the latest edition of the specification, standard or publication in effect as of the date of
advertising the work.
GC-5
2.06 REFERENCE TO PROPRIETARY PRODUCTS
Where references to proprietary products appear in the Specifications or Drawings, whether or not
followed by the words "or approved equal", it is for the purpose of establishing an acceptable
standard of quality or design. Unless a substitute is expressly prohibited, the Contractor may
request approval of a substitute for any such proprietary product. Such approval normally will not
be given by the Engineer prior to award of a Contract. A request for substitution must be in writing
and must include descriptive literature, specifications, test reports or samples, as appropriate, to
enable the Engineer to determine the acceptability of the product proposed for substitution. If
substitution is requested as part of a Shop Drawing submittal, the item(s) proposed for substitution
shall be clearly indicated. No substitute product shall be used on the work until written approval
has been received from the Engineer. Any revisions to structures, piping, mechanical, electrical,
instrumentation, or any other work made necessary by such substitution must be approved by the
Engineer and the entire cost of these revisions shall be borne by the Contractor.
2.07 SPECIFICATIONS AND DRAWINGS FURNISHED TO CONTRACTOR
The City will furnish to the Contractor two sets of Contract Documents including Specifications
together with Drawings. Additional quantities of Specifications and Drawings will be furnished at
reproduction cost. Contractor shall maintain a clean, undamaged set of Contract Documents at the
project site at all times.
2.08 AS-BUILT DRAWINGS
The Contractor shall maintain, on the job site, a set of full-size blueline or blackline prints of the
Contract Drawings. On these the Contractor shall mark all as-built conditions, locations,
configurations, and other details which may vary from the details represented on the original
drawings. This master record of as-built conditions, including all revisions made necessary by
addenda, change orders and field conditions shall be maintained up-to-date during the progress of
the work.
In the case of those drawings which depict the detailed requirement for equipment to be assembled
and wired in the factory, such as motor control centers and instrumentation, the as-built drawings
shall be updated by indicating those portions which are superseded by final Shop Drawings, and
by including a reference note describing the Shop Drawings by manufacturer, drawing and revision
number and date.
Upon completion of the work but prior to final acceptance, the as- built drawings maintained by
the Contractor shall be delivered to the City or Engineer.
*** END OF SECTION 2 ***
GC-6
SECTION 3 - CITY-ENGINEER-CONTRACTOR RELATIONS
3.01 AUTHORITY OF CITY
(a) The work and the manner of performing the same shall be done to the satisfaction and approval
of the City.
(b) The Contract Documents do not purport to control the method of performing the work but only
the requirements as to the nature of the completed work. The Contractor shall assume the entire
responsibility for methods of performing the work.
3.02 AUTHORITY OF THE ENGINEER
(a) The Engineer is the agent of the City and is employed to act as advisor and consultant to the
City in engineering matters relating to the Contract. The City has delegated its authority under this
Contract to the Engineer to determine the amount, quality, acceptability and fitness of the several
kinds of work, material and equipment which are to be paid for under the Contract; to decide for
the City all questions relative to the construction, meaning and intent of the Contract Documents;
to decide all questions relative to the classification, measurements of quantities, materials and the
fulfillment of this Contract, and to reject or condemn all work or material which does not conform
to the terms of this Contract to recommend, for consideration and action of the City, progress
payments and change orders. The Engineer's decision in all matters is the decision of the City and
can only be changed in writing by the City Manager of the City.
(b) It is expressly agreed and understood that the Engineer will have no liability whatsoever
resulting from the obligations entered into under the Contract; that the City must look solely to the
Contractor for the furnishing of the work; that the Contractor and City must look solely to each
other for the enforcement of any claims or liabilities arising under or by reason of the Contract. If
the Contractor files any suit arising under the Contract and names the Engineer as a party and if
no recovery is had against the Engineer, then the Engineer shall recover damages from the
Contractor for reasonable attorney's fees for time spent by the attorney for the Engineer in the
defense of the suit and the Engineer shall recover from the Contractor and be paid by the Contractor
at the rate of $1,000.00 per day for the time of the Engineer required in connection with the
preparation and defense of the suit. This provision is specifically intended as a Contract between
the Contractor and the City for the benefit of the Engineer.
3.03 INSPECTION AND TESTING
(a) All materials furnished and all work performed under the Contract shall be subject to inspection
by the Engineer. Such inspection may include mill, plant, shop or field inspection as required. The
Engineer shall be permitted access to all parts of the work, including plants where material or
equipment are manufactured or fabricated, and the Engineer shall be furnished with such materials,
information and assistance by the Contractor and Subcontractors and suppliers as is required to
make a complete and detailed inspection.
GC-7
(b) Work done in the absence of prescribed inspection may be required to be removed and replaced
under proper inspection, and the entire cost of removal and replacement, including the cost of all
materials which may be furnished by the City and used in the work thus removed, shall be borne
by the Contractor, regardless of whether the work removed is found to be defective or not. Work
shall not be covered up without the authority of the Engineer. If so covered without authority, the
work, upon order of the Engineer, shall be uncovered to the extent required, and the Contractor
similarly shall bear the entire cost of performing all the work and furnishing all the material
necessary for the removal of the covering and its subsequent replacement, as directed and approved
by the Engineer.
(c) Except as otherwise provided herein, cost for ordinary City inspection fees will be paid by the
City. All inspection fees and costs imposed by agencies other than the City and extraordinary
inspection by the City shall be paid by the Contractor.
(d) The Engineer will make, or have made, such tests as he deems necessary to insure that the
work is being accomplished in accordance with the requirements of the Contract. Unless otherwise
specified in the Special Provisions, the cost of such testing will be borne by the City. In the event
such tests reveal non-compliance with the requirements of the Contract, the Contractor shall bear
the cost of such corrective measures deemed necessary by the Engineer, as well as the cost of
subsequent re-testing.
(e) The City will provide inspection for an 8-hour day and 40-hour work week for Monday through
Friday. Overtime inspection shall be paid for by Contractor. No work shall be performed on
weekends unless approved in writing by the City. Any shutdown of any portion of the City's water
system will take place on Monday, Tuesday, Wednesday, or Thursday only; other times by
agreement between the Contractor and City. The Contractor shall reimburse the City at rates
established by the City for inspection in excess of the foregoing including legal holidays.
3.04 CONTRACTOR'S PLANT AND EQUIPMENT
The Contractor shall at all times be responsible for the adequacy, efficiency and sufficiency of the
Contractor's plant and equipment and any Subcontractor's plant and equipment.
3.05 ASSIGNMENT OF CONTRACT
(a) The Contractor shall not assign, sublet, sell, transfer or otherwise dispose of the Contract or
any portion thereof, or his right, title or interest therein, or his obligations thereunder, without the
prior written consent of the City. The City shall have no obligation whatsoever to provide such
written consent.
(b) If the Contractor violates the provisions of this section, the Contract may be terminated at the
option of the City and the City shall be relieved of all liability and obligations to the Contractor,
and to his assignee or transferee, growing out of such termination.
GC-8
3.06 SUBCONTRACTS
(a) All proposed Subcontractor's shall be listed by the Contractor at the time of bid opening and
shall be contained in the Information Required of Bidders. The Contractor may request a
replacement of a previously approved Subcontractor only through the specific procedures
contained in Public Contract Code, Section 4107. Any such request is subject to approval by the
City.
(b) The Contractor shall perform not less than 50 percent of the work with his own forces (i.e.,
without subcontracting). This requirement shall be understood to refer to work, the value of which
totals not less than 50 percent of the Contract price. Refer to Section 2-3 of the SSPWC for
clarification.
(c) In the City's discretion, subject to the requirements of Section 3.07(a), subcontracts may be
permitted to such extent as shall be shown to be necessary or advantageous to the Contractor in
the prosecution of the work and without injury to the City's interests. The re-subletting of work by
a Subcontractor shall be subject to the same limitations as an original subletting. Each
Subcontractor shall be properly licensed for the type of work which he is to perform.
(d) A copy of each subcontract, if in writing (or if not in writing, then a written statement signed
by the Contractor giving the name of the Subcontractor and the terms and conditions of each
subcontract), shall be filed promptly with the Engineer upon the Engineer's request. Each
subcontract shall contain a reference to the Contract between the City and the Contractor, and the
terms of that Contract shall be made a part of each subcontract insofar as applicable to the work
covered thereby. Each subcontract shall provide for annulment of same by the Contractor upon
written order of the Engineer if, in the Engineer's opinion, the Subcontractor fails to comply with
the requirements of the prime Contract insofar as the same may be applicable to this work.
(e) The Contractor shall be responsible to the City for the acts and omissions of his Subcontractors
and their employees to the same extent as the Contractor is responsible for the acts and omissions
of employees. Nothing contained in this section shall create any contractual relationship between
any Subcontractor and the City or Engineer or relieve the Contractor of any liability or obligation
under the prime Contract.
(f) The Contractor shall be permitted to rent equipment maintained and operated as long as the
work performed is directed and constantly supervised by the Contractor. Any other arrangement
will be construed as unauthorized subcontracting and such action will be subject to Contract
termination.
3.07 CONTRACTOR'S EMPLOYEES AND SUBCONTRACTORS
The Contractor shall at all times be responsible for the adequacy, efficiency and sufficiency of
persons employed by the Contractor and any Subcontractor or persons employed by the
Subcontractor. All workmen must have sufficient knowledge, skill and experience to perform
properly the work assigned to them.
GC-9
3.08 ATTENTION TO WORK
The Contractor shall supervise the work and at all times shall be represented by a competent
English speaking superintendent who shall receive and obey all instructions or orders given under
the Contract, and who shall have full authority to execute the same, and to supply materials, tools
and labor without delay, and who shall be the legal representative of the Contractor.
3.09 SERVICE OF NOTICES
Any notice, order, direction, request or other communication given by the City to the Contractor
under the Contract shall be deemed to be well and sufficiently given to the Contractor if left at any
office used by the Contractor, or delivered to any of the Contractor's officers, or mailed in any post
office addressed to the Contractor at the address mentioned in the Contract, or at the Contractor's
last known place of business. If mailed it shall be deemed to have been given to and received by
the Contractor two days after the day of mailing in any post office in the vicinity of the work.
3.10 DEVIATION FROM CONTRACT
The Contractor shall not make any alteration or variation in or addition to or deviation or omission
from the Contract without the advance written consent of the City.
3.11 SUSPENSION OF WORK
The Engineer acting on behalf of the City may, by written notice to the Contractor, suspend the
work, in whole or in part, for such period or periods as he may deem necessary due to unsuitable
weather, delay in delivery of City furnished equipment or materials, or such other conditions as
are considered unfavorable for prosecution of the work, or failure on the part of the Contractor to
carry out the provisions of the Contract or to provide material or workmanship meeting the
requirements of the Specifications. Suspended work shall be resumed by the Contractor within a
reasonable time, as designated by the Engineer, after receipt from the Engineer of written notice
to proceed. Contractor shall not be entitled to receive extra or additional compensation, except as
may otherwise be provided for explicitly in the Contract Documents, on account of suspension of
work pursuant hereto.
3.12 TERMINATION OF CONTRACT BY CITY (CONTRACTOR NOT AT FAULT)
The City may terminate the Contract upon ten calendar days written notice to the Contractor, if it
is found that reasons beyond the control of either the City or Contractor make it impossible or
against the City's interests to complete the work. In such a case, the Contractor shall have no claims
against the City except (1) for the value of work performed up to the date the Contract is
terminated, and (2) for the cost of materials and equipment on hand, in transit, or on definite
commitment as of the date the Contract is terminated, which would be needed in the work and
which meet the requirements of the Specifications. The value of work performed and the cost of
materials and equipment delivered to the site, as mentioned above, shall be determined by the
Engineer in accordance with the procedure prescribed for the making of the final estimate and
payment and shall be paid in accordance with the same procedure.
GC-10
3.13 TERMINATION OF CONTRACT BY CITY (CONTRACTOR AT FAULT)
(a) The City may terminate the Contract upon ten calendar days written notice to the Contractor
in the event of any default by the Contractor. Without limitation, it shall be considered a Contract
default whenever the Contractor shall: (1) declare bankruptcy, become insolvent or assign assets
for the benefit of creditors, (2) disregard or violate important provisions of the Contract
Documents or Engineer's instruction or fail to prosecute the work according to the approved
progress schedule, or (3) fail to provide a qualified superintendent, competent workmen or
Subcontractors, or materials or equipment meeting the requirements of the Specifications and
Drawings.
(b) In the event the Contract is terminated, the City may take possession of the work and of all
materials, which have been provided in connection with the work and may complete the work by
whatever method or means is selected. The cost of completing the work shall be deducted from
the balance which would have been due the Contractor had the Contract not been terminated and
the work completed in accordance with the Specifications and Drawings. If such cost exceeds the
balance which would have been due, the Contractor shall pay the excess amount to the City. If
such cost is less than the balance which would have been due, the Contractor shall have no claim
to the difference except to such extent as may be necessary, in the opinion of the Engineer, to
reimburse the Contractor or the Contractor's sureties for any expense properly incurred for
materials, tools, equipment, property and labor devoted to the execution of the work, of which the
City shall have received the benefit. In computing such expense, as it relates to equipment and
property, the salvage value at completion of the work shall be deducted from the depreciated value
at the time the Contract was terminated and the difference shall be considered as an expense.
3.14 TERMINATION OF CONTRACT BY CONTRACTOR
The Contractor may terminate the Contract upon ten calendar days written notice to the City
whenever: (1) the entire work has been suspended in accordance with Section 3.12, for 60
consecutive calendar days through no fault or negligence of the Contractor and notice to resume
work or to terminate the Contract has not been received from the City within this time period, or
(2) the City shall fail to pay the Contractor any substantial sums due in accordance with the terms
of the Contract and within the time limits prescribed. In the event of such termination, the
Contractor shall have no claims against the City except for those claims specifically enumerated
in Section 3.13 and determined in accordance with that section.
3.15 FAILURE TO COMPLY
If the Contractor should refuse or neglect to comply with the provisions of the Contract or the
orders of the Engineer, the City may have such provisions or orders carried out by others at the
expense of the Contractor.
3.16 PROTESTS
If the Contractor considers any work demanded of him to be outside the requirements of the
Contract, or if he considers any order or ruling of the Engineer, or of any inspector to be unfair, he
shall, immediately upon such work being demanded or such order or ruling being made, ask for
GC-11
written instructions or decision, whereupon he shall proceed without delay to perform the work or
to conform to the order or ruling; but unless the Contractor finds such instructions or decisions
satisfactory, he shall, within five (5) days after receipt of same, file a written protest with the
Engineer, stating clearly and in detail any objections and the reasons therefore. The Engineer shall,
as soon as practicable after receipt of such written protest from the Contractor, forward said protest
through appropriate channels to the City including any written comments on the issue or issues
involved. The decision of the City on all such matters shall be considered final and binding upon
all parties concerned. Except for such grounds for protests or objections as are made of record in
the manner specified and within the time stated herein, the Contractor hereby waives all grounds
for protests or objections to the orders, rulings, instructions or decisions of the Engineer and hereby
agrees that, as to all matters not included in such protest, the orders, instructions and decisions of
the Engineer shall be final and conclusive.
3.17 RIGHTS-OF-WAY
(a) Lands or rights-of-way for the work to be constructed under the Contract will be provided by
the City as shown on the Drawings. Nothing contained in the Specifications or Drawings shall be
interpreted as giving the Contractor exclusive occupancy of the lands or rights-of-way provided.
Any additional lands or rights-of-way required for construction operations shall be provided by
the Contractor at the Contractor's own expense.
(b) Except as may otherwise be provided, the Contractor shall secure from the agencies having
jurisdiction the necessary permits to create obstructions, to make excavations if required under the
Contract and to otherwise encroach upon rights-of-way and shall present evidence to the Engineer
that such permission has been granted before work is commenced. Regulations and requirements
of all agencies concerned shall be strictly adhered to in the performance of this Contract, including
the furnishing of insurance and bonds if required by such agencies. The enforcement of such
requirements under this Contract shall not be made the basis for claims for additional
compensation.
(c) The Contractor shall not do any work that would affect any oil, gas, sewer, storm drain, or
water pipeline, any telephone, telegraph, or electric transmission line, fence, or any other structure,
nor enter upon the rights-of-way involved until notified by the Engineer that the City has secured
authority therefore from the proper party. After authority has been obtained, the Contractor shall
give said party due notice of any intention to begin work and shall give said party convenient
access and every facility for removing, shoring, supporting, or otherwise protecting such pipeline,
transmission line, ditch, fence or structure and for replacing same. The Contractor shall not be
entitled to any extension of time or extra compensation on account of any postponement,
interference, or delay caused by any such pipeline, transmission line, fence or structure being on
the line of the work except as provided herein.
3.18 CONSTRUCTION INTERFERENCE
(a) As used in this section, the word "utility" shall be understood to include tracks, overhead or
underground wires, cables, pipelines, conduits, ducts, sewers or storm drains. The term "service
connection" shall be understood to mean all or any portion of a pipeline (including sewer house
laterals), conduit, wire, cable or duct, including meter, between a utility distribution line and an
individual customer or customers when served by a single service connection. The term
GC-12
"construction interference" shall be understood to include any utility or service connection within
the limits of excavation or over excavation required for the work under the Contract as shown, or
ordered by the Engineer, or any utility, or service connection located in the space which will be
required by any of the work under the Contract.
(b) In the event any utility or service connection is required to be disturbed or removed to permit
construction of a pipeline or other structure under the Contract, such disturbance or removal shall
be done only with the approval of the Engineer and following notification to the owner of the
interfering utility or service connection. Any such utility or service connection removed or
otherwise disturbed shall be reconstructed as promptly as possible in its original or other
authorized location in a condition at least as good as prior to such removal or disturbance, subject
to the inspection of the owner of same. The Contractor's responsibility under this section to remove
or replace shall apply even in the event such damage or destruction occurs after backfilling or is
not discovered until after completion of backfilling. The owner of the utility or service connection
shall be notified immediately after damage or destruction occurs or is discovered.
(c) During the performance of the work under this Contract, the owner of any utility affected by
the work shall have the right to enter when necessary upon any portion of the work for the purpose
of maintaining service and to make repairs to said utility.
(d) The Drawings show the approximate positions of known utilities in the immediate vicinity of
the work but the City does not guarantee that all existing utilities are shown. Service connections
normally are not shown on the Drawings. The Contractor, before commencing any excavation,
shall ascertain from records or otherwise, the existence, horizontal and vertical position and
ownership of all existing utilities and service connections. If the Contractor discovers any utility
in the line of the work which is not shown on the Drawings, he shall immediately notify the
Engineer of the existence of same. The City will not be liable for any consequences arising as a
result of a service connection being incorrectly located in the field by the agency having
jurisdiction over said service connection.
(e) All costs involved in removing, relocating, protecting, supporting, repairing, maintaining or
replacing a main or trunkline utility which actually constitutes a construction interference when
said utility is not shown with reasonable accuracy as an interference or is omitted from the
Drawings, will be paid for by the City as extra work. In such case, the City also will compensate
the Contractor for equipment on the project necessarily idled during and by reason of such work.
The City's obligation to repair damage to such a facility and to compensate the Contractor for idled
equipment shall not extend to damage resulting from the failure of the Contractor to use reasonable
care.
(f) All costs involved in removing, relocating, protecting, supporting, repairing, maintaining or
replacing any utility or service connection other than those described in Subsection (e) herein shall
be borne by the Contractor.
(g) The Contractor shall not be assessed liquidated damages for failure to complete the work on
time to the extent that such delay was caused by failure of the City or of the agency having
jurisdiction over the utility or service connection to authorize or otherwise provide for its removal,
relocation, protection, support, repair, maintenance or replacement.
GC-13
(h) The City reserves the right, upon determination of the actual position of existing utilities and
service connections, to order changes in alignment or grade of the City's pipelines when, by so
doing, the necessity for relocation of existing utilities or service connections will be avoided. Such
changes will be ordered in writing by the Engineer. Where applicable, adjustment in the Contract
price will be on the basis of the unit prices stated in the proposal. Where unit prices in the proposal
are not applicable, adjustment in Contract price will be in accordance with Section 5.13.
3.19 SURVEYING
(a) All surveying necessary and adequate for construction purposes shall be done by the
Contractor.
(b) The Contractor shall give two (2) working days notice, in writing, before surveying services
are to commence for laying out any portion of the work, and he shall dig all holes necessary for
line and grade stakes. The Contractor shall preserve all stakes set for the lines, grades or
measurements of the work in their proper places until authorized to remove them by the Engineer.
Any expenses incurred in replacing said stakes that the Contractor may have failed to preserve
shall be borne by the Contractor.
(c) Grades for all work will be set on the surface of the ground and the Contractor shall transfer
them to the construction as necessary. At no time shall less than three (3) consecutive grade points
be used in common so that any variation from a straight grade can be detected. Any such variation
shall be reported to the Engineer and in the absence of such report, the Contractor shall be
responsible for any error in the grade of the finished work.
(d) The Contractor shall preserve all bench marks, stakes and other survey marks, and in case of
their removal or destruction by the Contractor's employees or by a Subcontractor's employees, he
shall be liable for the cost of their replacement.
3.20 SUPERVISION AND INSPECTION
(a) The Engineer shall decide within the provisions of the Specifications all questions which may
arise concerning the quality or acceptance of materials furnished and work performed and all
questions concerning the acceptable fulfillment of the Contract by the Contractor.
(b) All work shall be done in a thorough and workmanlike manner under the direction and to the
satisfaction of the Engineer, and the materials used shall comply with these Specifications. Work
shall be started and continued at such time and at such points as may be designated by the Engineer
and shall be carried on diligently and without unnecessary delay.
(c) Each day the Contractor shall furnish the Engineer a duplicate copy of all delivery and
shipment tags or slips for all materials delivered on the work. Tags or slips shall show the actual
quantity of material received on the work. No materials shall be used on the work until such tags
or slips have been furnished to the Engineer.
GC-14
(d) All tests of materials shall be made under the direction of the Engineer. The costs of tests for
materials shall be borne by the Contractor and shall be included in the unit prices for appropriate
items of work. At the Contractor's own expense the materials for testing shall be delivered at the
time and to the place designated by the Engineer. Should the materials fail, the retesting cost shall
be borne by the Contractor.
(e) The Contractor shall prosecute work only in the presence of the Engineer or his designated
representative, and any work done in the absence of said Engineer or his designated representative
shall be subject to rejection for that reason. The Contractor shall give written notice to the Engineer
at least 24 hours before beginning any work and shall furnish said Engineer all reasonable facilities
for obtaining full information respecting the progress and manner of work.
(f) Any day shall be considered as a normal work day except Saturdays, Sundays or legal holidays
or days on which the Contractor is specifically required by the Specifications, by labor contract,
or by law to suspend construction operations, or is prevented from working at the beginning of the
work day for cause defined in Section 6 of the SSPWC or conditions resulting therefrom, or is
prevented from preceding with at least 75 percent of the normal labor and equipment force for at
least five (5) hours toward completion of the current controlling operation shall be considered as
a normal work day.
3.21 OBSERVING LAWS AND ORDINANCES
(a) The Contractor shall keep himself fully informed of all Federal, State and local laws,
ordinances and regulations which may affect the conduct of the work, those engaged or employed
by the Contractor, the materials used, and all orders and decrees of bodies or tribunals having any
jurisdiction or authority over the work. The Contractor shall observe and comply therewith, and
shall protect and indemnify the City against any claim or liability arising from or based on the
violation thereof.
(b) The Contractor shall secure and pay for all necessary permits, licenses and make all necessary
deposits before starting work.
3.22 COORDINATION WITH COMMUNITY AGENCIES
(a) The Contractor shall notify the local Police Department, Fire Department and refuse contractor
of any construction causing street closure forty-eight (48) hours prior to start of such closure.
(b) The Contractor also shall be responsible for notifying, in writing, affected businesses and
residents forty-eight (48) hours prior to start of construction or street closures.
3.23 FIRE HYDRANTS
(a) Free access shall be provided to all ALW fire hydrants at all times. The Contractor shall not
draw any water from a fire hydrant for use on the work, other than for extinguishing fire, without
first obtaining permission, and a hydrant meter, from the City of Azusa.
GC-15
(b) Whenever required by the City of Azusa, the Contractor shall obtain a fire hydrant meter to
record water usage. A deposit as established by the City of Azusa shall be paid by Contractor and
refunded upon return of said hydrant meter. The water usage fees shall be paid as defined in the
Special Provisions.
3.24 LOSS AND DAMAGE
(a) All loss or damage to the City or to third persons, occurring during the progress of the work
being performed under this Contract, which loss or damage occurs before acceptance of the work
by the City and which results from: (1) the negligence of the Contractor, or Contractor's agents or
employees, or (2) any act or omission on the part of the Contractor or Contractor's agent or
employees which is not authorized by these Specifications shall be sustained and borne by the
Contractor.
(b) Excavation shall be braced in accordance with CAL OSHA Standards so that they will be safe
and the ground alongside the excavations will not slide or settle, and all existing improvements of
any kind, either on public or private property, shall be fully protected from damage. If any damage
does result, the necessary repairs as directed by the City Engineer, shall be made by and at the
expense of the Contractor.
(c) Performance under this Contract by the Contractor shall not be excused by any unforeseen
obstruction or difficulties which may be encountered, including damage to or destruction of the
project under construction by action of the elements or otherwise.
3.25 USE OF IMPROVEMENT DURING PROGRESS OF CONSTRUCTION
At any time during the progress of work, ALW may, upon written notice to the Contractor, take
over and utilize the whole or any part of the improvement or appurtenance thereto which has been
completed, giving if desired, permits to utilize same. Such uses by ALW shall not constitute
acceptance of that part of the improvement. The Contractor shall continue to guarantee the
improvement per Section 4.09 of these General Conditions.
3.26 ALTERNATIVE METHODS OF CONSTRUCTION
Whenever the Drawings and Specifications provide that more than one specified method of
construction or more than one specified type of construction equipment may be used to perform
portions of the work and leave the selection of the method of construction or the type of equipment
to be used up to the Contractor, it is understood that the City does not guarantee that every such
method of construction or type of equipment can be successfully used throughout all or any part
of any project. It shall be the Contractor's responsibility to select and use the alternative(s) which
will satisfactorily perform the work under the conditions encountered. In the event some of the
alternatives are not feasible or it is necessary to use more than one of the alternatives on the
project, full compensation for any additional cost involved shall be considered as included in the
Contract price paid for the item of work involved and no additional compensation will be allowed
therefore.
GC-16
3.27 EXAMINATION OF WORK
(a) Contractor must examine the location, physical conditions and surroundings of the proposed
work and judge for themselves the nature of the excavation to be made and the work to be done.
(b) The Drawings for the work show conditions as they are supposed or believed to exist by the
Engineer, but it is not intended or to be inferred that the conditions as shown thereon constitute a
representation or warranty, express or implied, by the City or its officers, that such conditions are
actually existent, nor shall the Contractor be relieved of the liability under this Contract, nor the
City or any of its officers be liable for any loss sustained by the Contractor as a result of any
variance between conditions as shown on the Drawings and the actual conditions revealed during
the progress of the work or otherwise.
(c) Execution of the Contract shall be conclusive evidence that the Contractor has satisfied himself
through his own investigation as to the conditions to be encountered; the character, quality and
quantity of work to be performed; materials and equipment to be furnished; and all requirements
of the Drawings and Specifications.
*** END OF SECTION 3 ***
GC-17
SECTION 4 - MATERIAL, EQUIPMENT AND WORKMANSHIP
4.01 QUALITY
(a) Material and equipment shall be new and of the quality specified. All work shall be executed
in conformity with the best accepted standard practice of the trade so as to contribute to maximum
efficiency of operation, accessibility and appearance, and minimum cost of maintenance and
construction of future alterations and additions.
(b) Whenever the Contractor shall furnish materials or manufactured articles or shall do work for
which no detailed Specifications are set forth, the materials or manufactured articles shall be of
the best grade in quality and workmanship obtainable in the market from firms of established good
reputation or, if not ordinarily carried in stock, shall conform to the usual standards for first-class
materials or articles of the kind required with due consideration of the use to which they are to be
put. In general, the work performed shall be in full conformity and harmony with the intent to
secure the best standard of construction and equipment of the work as a whole or in part.
4.02 SAMPLES AND TESTS OF MATERIAL
(a) Samples of materials to be supplied by the Contractor shall be prepared and submitted for
checking, if required by the Specifications or the Engineer. The samples or test specimens shall be
prepared and furnished with information as to their source in such quantities and sizes as may be
required, with all freight and charges prepaid.
(b) All samples shall be submitted before shipment of the material to the site of the work and in
ample time to permit the making of proper tests, analyses, examinations, rejections and
resubmissions before the time at which it is desired to incorporate the material into the work. All
tests of materials furnished by the Contractor will be made by the Engineer in accordance with
recognized standard practice. No such materials shall be used in the work unless or until they have
been accepted in writing by the Engineer and samples of materials will be retained by the Engineer
for reference and comparison purposes.
(c) The cost of material inspection and testing in the vicinity of the work unless specified otherwise
herein, will be borne by the City. If the inspection and testing of material in the vicinity of the
work is not practicable, the Contractor may request such inspection and testing take place at the
point of manufacture. In such an event, the additional cost to the City of remote inspection and
testing shall be paid for by the Contractor. Such additional costs will consist of reimbursement for
travel time and expense to and from the remote point.
4.03 PROOF OF COMPLIANCE WITH CONTRACT
In order that the Engineer may determine whether the Contractor has complied with the
requirements of the Contract Documents not readily determinable through inspection and tests of
plant, equipment, work or materials, the Contractor shall, at any time when requested, submit to
the Engineer properly authenticated documents or other satisfactory proof as to compliance with
such requirements.
GC-18
4.04 SAFEGUARDING OF EQUIPMENT, MATERIAL AND WORK
The Contractor shall properly safeguard all equipment, material and work against loss, damage,
malicious mischief or tampering by unauthorized persons until acceptance of the work by the City.
Locked and covered storage or continuous surveillance by a watch- man shall be provided if
required to accomplish this purpose.
4.05 DEFECTIVE MATERIAL, EQUIPMENT AND WORKMANSHIP
(a) Inspection of the work shall not relieve the Contractor of any of his obligations under the
Contract. Even though equipment, material or work required to be provided under the Contract
have been inspected, accepted and estimated for payment, the Contractor shall, at the Contractor's
own expense, replace or repair any such equipment, material or work found to be defective or
otherwise not to comply with the requirements of the Contract up to the end of the maintenance
and guarantee period.
(b) Any equipment or material brought upon the job site by the Contractor and subsequently
rejected by the Engineer as not complying with the requirements of the Contract shall be removed
immediately by the Contractor.
(c) If the Contractor shall fail to repair or replace unsatisfactory equipment, material or work or to
remove unsatisfactory equipment or material from the job site within 10 calendar days after being
ordered to do so by the Engineer, the Engineer, acting on behalf of the City, may make the ordered
repairs or remove the condemned equipment or material and the City will deduct the cost thereof
from any moneys due or to become due the Contractor.
4.06 CHARACTER OF WORKMEN
Skilled workmen shall be employed on work requiring special qualifications. When required in
writing by the Engineer, the Contractor or any Subcontractor shall discharge any person who is, in
the opinion of the Engineer, incompetent, unfaithful, disorderly or otherwise unsatisfactory and
shall not again employ such discharged person on the work except with the consent of the
Engineer. Such discharge shall not be the basis of any claim for compensation or damages against
the City or any of its officers.
The Contractor shall provide, at all times, a superintendent on the job site who shall be able to
speak, read and write the English language per Section 7-6 of the SSPWC.
4.07 RUBBISH AND DUST CONTROL
(a) During the progress of the work, the Contractor shall keep the site of the work and other areas
utilized by the Contractor in a neat and clean condition and free from any accumulation of rubbish.
(b) The Contractor shall at all times conduct work so as to avoid unnecessary dust. The Contractor
shall provide adequate equipment, water and implement procedures to comply with the South
Coast Air Quality Management District rules to prevent dust emissions.
GC-19
4.08 CLEANING UP
The Contractor shall promptly remove from the vicinity of the completed work, all rubbish, unused
material, concrete forms, equipment and temporary structures used during construction. Additional
clean-up work, if provided in the Special Provisions, shall be performed by the Contractor.
4.09 GUARANTEE AND WARRANTY
(a) Besides guarantees required elsewhere in this Contract Document, the Contractor shall and
hereby does guarantee all work for a period of two (2) years after the date of acceptance of the
work by the City and shall repair and replace any and all such work, together with any other work
which may be displaced, that may prove defective in workmanship and/or materials within the two
(2) year period from the date of acceptance, without expense whatsoever to the City. Ordinary
wear and tear and usual abuse or neglect is excepted. In the event of failure to comply with the
above mentioned conditions within seven (7) days after being notified in writing, or in the event
of an emergency, the City is hereby authorized to proceed to have the defects repaired and make
good at the expense of the Contractor, who hereby agrees to pay the cost and charges therefore
immediately on demand.
(b) The Contractor hereby guarantees that the entire work constructed under this Contract will
meet fully all requirements thereof as to quality of workmanship and of materials furnished by the
Contractor. The Contractor hereby agrees to make any repairs or replacements made necessary by
defects in materials or workmanship supplied by the Contractor that becomes evident within the
guarantee period, and to restore to full compliance with the requirements of these Specifications,
including the test requirements set forth herein for any part of the work constructed hereunder,
which during said period is found to be deficient with respect to any provision of the
Specifications. The Contractor also agrees to hold the City harmless from claims of any kind
arising from damage due to said defects. The Contractor shall make all repairs and replacements
promptly upon receipt of written orders for same from the Engineer. If the Contractor fails to make
the repairs and replacements promptly, the City may do the work and the Contractor and the
Contractor's surety shall be liable to the City for the cost of such work.
(c) Upon acceptance of the work by the City, any and all manufacturer's guarantees held by the
Contractor shall be delivered to the City.
(d) The guarantees and agreements set forth hereinbefore shall be secured by a surety bond which
shall be delivered by the Contractor to the City before the notice of completion shall be filed by
the Engineer. Said bond shall be in an approved form and executed by a surety company or
companies satisfactory to the City, in the amount of ten percent of the Contract price. Said bond
shall remain in force for the period specified herein. Instead of providing a surety bond, the
Contractor may, at his option, provide for the Faithful Performance Bond furnished under the
Contract to remain in force for said amount until the expiration of the required period.
(e) The Contractor warrants that all materials and equipment furnished under this Contract shall
be new unless otherwise specified in the Contract Documents; and that all work conforms to the
Contract Document requirements and is free of any defect whether performed by the Contractor
or any subcontractor or supplier.
GC-20
(f) Unless otherwise stated, all warranty periods shall begin upon the filing of the Notice of
Completion. Unless otherwise stated, the warranty period shall be for one year.
(g) The Contractor shall remedy at its expense any damage to City-owned or controlled real or
personal property.
(h) The Contractor shall furnish the City with all warranty and guarantee documents prior to final
Acceptance of the Project by the City.
(i) The City shall notify the Contractor, in writing, within a reasonable time after the discovery of
any failure, defect, or damage. The Contractor shall within ten (10) Days after being notified
commence and perform with due diligence all necessary work. If the Contractor fails to promptly
remedy any defect, or damage; the City shall have the right to replace, repair, or otherwise remedy
the defect, or damage at the Contractor’s expense.
(j) In the event of any emergency constituting an immediate hazard to health, safety, property, or
licensees, when caused by work of the Contractor not in accordance with the Contract
requirements, the City may undertake at the Contractor’s expense, and without prior notice, all
work necessary to correct such condition.
(k) With respect to all warranties, express or implied, from subcontractors, manufacturers, or
suppliers for work performed and materials furnished under this Contract, the Contractor shall:
1) Obtain for the City all warranties that would be given in normal commercial practice;
2) Require all warranties to be executed, in writing, for the benefit of the City; and
3) Enforce all warranties for the benefit of the City, unless otherwise directed in writing by
the City.
This Article shall not limit the City’s rights under this Contract or with respect to latent defects,
gross mistakes, or fraud. The City specifically reserves all rights related to defective work,
including but not limited to the defect claims pursuant to California Code of Civil Procedure
Section 337.15.
*** END OF SECTION 4 ***
GC-21
SECTION 5 - PROGRESS AND PAYMENT
5.01 CONTRACT TIME
(a) Time is of the essence of the Contract. The Contractor shall commence work promptly under
the Contract and all portions of the work shall be prosecuted so that the entire work shall be
completed and ready for use within the time stipulated.
(b) A bidder may contact the Engineer prior to bid opening with concerns regarding Contract time
allowed for completion of the work to initiate a re-evaluation. Any adjustments to time allowed
will be made prior to bid opening and all decisions are final. All other time extensions will be per
Section 5.05 of these General Conditions.
5.02 CONTRACT PRICE
Prior to commencement of the work, the Contractor shall submit a detailed price breakdown of
any of the bid items for the work contained in lump sum items. Such price breakdown shall include
quantities, unit prices, and any other information required in sufficient detail to enable it to be used
in preparing monthly progress estimates.
5.03 CONSTRUCTION SCHEDULE
The Contractor shall submit a construction schedule showing the order in which the Contractor
proposes to carry on the work and the dates when the various parts are to be begun and completed.
The timing associated with submitting the schedule will be determined by the Engineer. The
schedule shall be subject to the approval of the Engineer and if in the Engineer's opinion a schedule
submitted is inadequate to secure the completion of the work in the time agreed upon, or is
otherwise not in accordance with the Specifications, the Engineer may require the Contractor to
submit a new schedule which will insure timely completion of the work. It is mandatory that an
up-to-date construction schedule be submitted with each request for progress payment.
5.04 OVERTIME WORK
Except as otherwise provided in this section, the Contractor shall receive no additional
compensation for overtime work even though such overtime work may be required under
emergency conditions and may be ordered by the Engineer in writing. Additional compensation
will be paid the Contractor for overtime work only in the event extra work is ordered by the
Engineer and the change order specifically authorizes the use of overtime work, and then only to
such extent as overtime wages are regularly being paid by the Contractor for overtime work of a
similar nature in the same locality.
5.05 EXTENSION OF TIME
(a) The Contractor may be entitled to an extension of Contract time: (1) if the work has been
suspended by the City, in whole or in part; or (2) where weather or other circumstances occur
which delay progress and which are clearly beyond the control of the Contractor; provided that, in
GC-22
either case, the Contractor is not at fault and is not negligent under the terms of the Contract. The
extension of time allowed shall be as determined by the Engineer.
(b) To receive consideration, a request for extension of time must be made in writing to the
Engineer stating the reason for said request, and such request must be received by the Engineer
within ten days following the end of the delay-causing condition and approved or denied by the
Engineer in writing.
5.06 FAILURE TO COMPLETE ON TIME
(a) The Contractor shall pay liquidated damages to the City in the amount specified in the Special
Provisions if the Contractor fails to complete the work within the time agreed upon. The period
for which said damages shall be paid shall be the number of calendar days from the agreed date of
completion as contained in the Contract, or from the date of termination of any extension of time
approved by the Engineer, to the date the Engineer certifies completion of work to the City. The
City may deduct the amount of said damages from any moneys due or to become due the
Contractor.
(b) The said amount is fixed and agreed upon by and between the Contractor and the City because
of the impracticability and extreme difficulty of fixing and ascertaining the actual damages the
City would sustain. Said amount is agreed to be the amount of damages which the City would
sustain.
5.07 MONTHLY ESTIMATES AND PAYMENTS
(a) On or about the 25th of each month, the Contractor will prepare, certify, and submit to ALW,
an estimate of the cumulative amount and value of work performed by the Contractor up to that
date. All payments will be paid within approximately 60 days. Except as may otherwise be
provided in the Special Provisions, said amount will include 80 percent of the value of all
acceptable materials and equipment delivered to the site of the work. Said value will be based on
certified copies of paid invoices delivered by the Contractor to the Engineer. To this figure will be
added all amounts due or paid the Contractor for performance of extra work in accordance with
change orders.
From the total computed above, in conformance with Public Contract Code Section 7201, a
deduction of 5 percent will be made from each monthly pay estimate for the term of the Contract
unless the Director of the Light & Water Department has made a finding prior to the bid that the
project is substantially complex and therefore requires a higher retention amount than 5 percent.
Further deductions will be made for: (1) amounts due the City for equipment or materials furnished
or services rendered; (2) amounts due the City under the terms of the Contract; (3) amounts of any
claims of lien filed with the City in accordance with Section 6.02(b), and (4) amounts required to
be deducted by federal, state or local governmental authority. From the balance thus determined
will be deducted the amount of all previous payments and the remainder shall constitute the
monthly payment due the Contractor.
(b) Pursuant to the provisions of Public Contract Code Section 22300, the Contractor is permitted
to substitute securities for any moneys withheld to ensure performance of this Contract. At the
GC-23
request and expense of the Contractor, securities equivalent to the amount withheld shall be
deposited with the State Treasurer or a state or federally chartered bank in California as the escrow
agent, who shall then pay the moneys to the Contractor. Upon satisfactory completion of the
Contract, the securities shall be returned to the Contractor.
Alternatively, the Contractor may request and the City shall make payment of retentions earned
directly to the escrow agent. The Contractor may direct the investment of the payments into
securities and the Contractor shall receive the interest earned on the investments upon the same
terms provided for in this section for securities deposited by the Contractor. Upon satisfactory
completion of the Contract, the Contractor shall receive from the escrow agent all securities,
interest, and payments received by the escrow agent from the City pursuant to the terms of this
section.
Securities eligible for investment under this section shall include those listed in Section 16430 of
the Government Code, bank or savings and loan certificates of deposit, interest-bearing demand
deposit accounts, standby letters of credit, or any other security mutually agreed to by the
Contractor and the City.
The Contractor shall be beneficial owner of any securities substituted for moneys withheld and
shall receive any interest thereon.
The escrow agreement used pursuant to this section shall be null, void and unenforceable unless it
is substantially similar to the form enclosed.
(c) The Engineer's estimate of the monthly payment due the Contractor will not be required to be
made by strict measurement, an approximation will suffice. The monthly payments may be
withheld or reduced if, in the Engineer's opinion, the Contractor is not diligently or efficiently
endeavoring to comply with the intent of the Contract or if the Contractor fails to pay labor and
material bills as they become due.
(d) The Contractor shall furnish the Engineer promptly, upon request, all information and records
necessary to determine the cost of the work for purposes of estimating monthly payments,
including an itemized statement, in a form satisfactory to the Engineer, of the actual cost of all
acceptable materials delivered by the Contractor to the site.
(e) No monthly payment shall be construed as an acceptance of the work or of any portion of the
work, nor shall the making of such payment preclude the City from demanding and recovering
from the Contractor such damages as it may sustain by reason of the Contractor's failure to comply
with the requirements of the Contract.
(f) In the event the Contract is terminated, any funds due the Contractor and retained by the City
shall become the property of the City to the extent necessary to repay to the City any excess in the
Contract price above the cost of the work completed at the time of termination. After issuance of
notice to discontinue work, no further payment will be made to the Contractor for the work covered
by the notice until completion of the work and final settlement has been made.
GC-24
5.08 UNPAID CLAIMS
If, upon or before completion of the work, or at any time prior to expiration of the period within
which claims of lien or stop notices may be filed for record, any person claiming to have performed
any labor or to have furnished any materials, supplies or services toward the performance of this
Contract, or to have agreed to do so, shall file with the City a verified statement of such claim
stating in general terms the kind of labor and materials, the value of same and the name of the
person to or from whom the same was furnished, together with a statement that the same has not
been paid; or if any person shall bring against the City or any of its agents any action to enforce
such claim or stop notice, the City will, until the action is settled, withhold from moneys due to
the Contractor an amount sufficient to satisfy the decision of the court together with costs.
5.09 FULFILLMENT OF CONTRACT
The Contractor shall protect and care for all work until the Contract has been fulfilled to the
satisfaction of the Engineer, and subsequent acceptance of the work by the City Council.
The Contractor shall remove all rubbish, excess earth and rock, leaving the site in a neat, orderly
and presentable condition before the Engineer makes final inspection of the work to determine the
fulfillment of the Contract.
5.10 FINAL ESTIMATE OF PAYMENT
(a) When the Engineer is of the opinion that the Contractor has completely performed all work
required under the Contract, the Engineer shall certify to the City that the work is complete, and,
using data provided by Contractor, shall submit to the Contractor a draft of the final estimate. The
Contractor shall submit a written approval of said final estimate within five calendar days after
receipt, or, in the event the Contractor disagrees with said final estimate, the Contractor shall,
within said five day period, file a written statement of all claims to be presented. If the Contractor
delays more than five calendar days in approving said final estimate or in presenting claims, the
time for final payment shall be extended by the period of such delay.
(b) After timely acceptance of the work by the Utility Board/City Council and 35 calendar days
after recording of the Notice of Completion, the City will pay to the Contractor the amount
remaining after deducting all prior payments and all amounts to be kept or retained under the
provisions of the Contract. In the event acceptance of the work is delayed more than 30 calendar
days beyond the date of the last partial payment under the Contract, the City will make a further
partial payment in accordance with Section 5.07.
(c) If the Contractor disagrees with the Engineer's final estimate and files a timely (within 15
calendar days) written statement of his claims, the Engineer will issue, as a semi-final estimate,
the proposed estimate submitted to the Contractor, and the City will make payment to the
Contractor in accordance with the provisions of Subsection 5.10(b). The Engineer then will
investigate the Contractor's claims, make any revisions to said semi-final estimate as the
Contractor deems appropriate and certify in writing to the City the amount and value of the work
performed by the Contractor. The City then will make final payment to the Contractor in
accordance with the provisions of Subsection 5.10(b).
GC-25
5.11 FINAL PAYMENT TERMINATES LIABILITY OF CITY
The acceptance by the Contractor of the final payment shall be a release of the City and its agents
from all claims of and liability to the Contractor for anything done or furnished for, or relating to,
the work or for any act or neglect of the City or of any person relating to or affecting the work.
5.12 NOTICE OF COMPLETION
As required by the California Code of Civil Procedure, and within 10 calendar days after date of
acceptance of the work by the Utility Board/City Council, the City will file, in the county recorder's
office, a notice of completion of the work.
5.13 CHANGES IN THE WORK
(a) The City, without invalidating the contract, may order changes in the work consisting of
additions, deletions, modifications, or revisions with the contract amount and contract time being
adjusted accordingly. All such changes in the work shall be authorized by Change Order and shall
be relayed between the City and Contractor in written form. All Change Order work shall be
performed under the applicable conditions and requirements of the Contract Documents. A Change
Order signed by the Contractor indications the Contractor’s agreement therewith, including any
adjustment in the Contract amount or the Contract time, and the full and final settlement of all
costs (direct, indirect, and overhead) related to the work authorized by the Change Order.
(b) Change Order work is defined as added work of a different character or function and for which
no basis for payment is prescribed; or that involving revisions of the details of the work in such a
manner as to render inequitable payment under items upon which the Contractor bid; or that work
to be done under the stipulated prices given in the bidding schedule.
(c) The signing of the Contract by the Contractor will be deemed to be an agreement on the part
of the Contractor to perform extra work, as and when ordered by the City.
(d) If required extra work results in delay to the work, the Contractor will be given an equivalent
extension of time.
(e) All claims for additional compensation of the contractor shall be presented in writing before
the expense is incurred and will be adjusted as provided herein. No work shall be allowed to lag
pending such adjustment, but shall be promptly executed as directed, even if a dispute arises. No
claim will be considered after the work in question has been done unless a written contract Change
Order has been issued or a timely written notice of claim has been made by the Contractor. The
Contractor shall not be entitled to claim or bring suit for damages, whether for loss of profits or
otherwise, on account of any decrease, increase, revision, modification, or omission of any item
or portion of work to be done. Whenever any change is made as provided for herein, such change
shall be considered and treated as though originally included in the Contract, and shall be subject
to all terms, conditions, and provisions of the original Contract.
GC-26
(f) Owner Initiated Change. The Contractor must submit a complete cost proposal, including any
change in the Contract time, within 7 days after receipt of a scope of a proposed Change Order,
unless the City requests that proposals be submitted in less than 7 days.
(g) Contractor Initiated Change. The Contractor must give written notice of all proposed Change
Orders. The City shall be notified, immediately and in writing, of any discoveries that may give
rise to a potential Change Order. The Contractor shall, within 7 days of such discoveries of facts,
submit a complete cost proposal, including any change in the Contract time. The City shall have
the right to request a complete proposal to be submitted by the Contractor in less than 7 days.
(h) Upon decision of the City to have extra work performed, or to delete or modify work, the
City's representative will so inform the Contractor, acquainting the Contractor with the essential
details. The Contractor shall thereupon prepare an estimate of cost and submit said price and
estimate to the City's representative who will secure the City's approval in writing before work is
started. The City reserves the right to reject any claims as a result of extending the work under the
bid prices, which has not been approved by the City in the same manner herein provided.
(i) All price quotations and proposals from the Contractor shall be accompanied by sufficiently
detailed supporting documentation to permit verification by the City. This documentation shall
include, but not be limited to, material and supplies quotations, labor rates,
(j) The Contractor shall, for all price quotations and proposals, include written reports and break-
downs showing all items of cost which apply to Change Order work. If required by the Engineer,
the Contractor shall furnish books, time sheets, vouchers, invoices, and any other records to
substantiate the cost items listed in said reports and break-downs. All Change Order work
documentation shall include a report detailing the work that was completed each day. These daily
reports shall include both original Contract work (if any) and Change Order work completed each
day and shall include a detailed break-down of all labor, equipment, and materials.
(k) If the Contractor fails to submit the cost proposal and all requested reports and break-downs,
within 7 days (or as requested), the City has the right to order the Contractor, in writing, to
commence work immediately on a force account basis and/or issue a lump sum change to the
Contract price in accordance with the City’s estimate of cost. If the change is issued based on the
City estimate, the Contractor will waive its right to dispute the action unless, within 15 days
following completion of the added/deleted work, the Contractor presents written proof that the
City’s estimate was in error.
(l) Any adjustment in Contract price shall be based on unit price bid items or additive and
deductive bid items submitted by the Contractor in the original bid on the work where such bid
items are applicable. If the original bid prices are not applicable, the adjustment in Contract price
shall be based on a lump sum or unit price agreed upon by the City and the Contractor prior to
executing the Change Order. The City shall have the right to choose either a lump sum or unit
price option for the proposal and payment of all Change Order work.
(m) If the original bid prices are not applicable and the City and Contractor are unable to agree
upon a lump sum or unit price prior to executing the Change Order, the adjustment in Contract
price shall be made on a cost-plus (Time & Material) basis.
GC-27
(n) All proposals, whether unit price, lump sum, or Time & Material, shall only include direct
expenditures necessitated specifically by the subject Change Order, and shall be as follows:
4) Labor. The costs of labor will be the actual cost for wages prevailing locally for each craft
or type of worker at the time the Change Order work is done, plus employer payments of
payroll taxes and insurance, health and welfare, pension, vacation, apprenticeship funds,
and other direct costs resulting from Federal, State, or local laws, as well as assessment or
benefits required by lawful collective bargaining agreements. The use of a labor
classification which would increase the extra work cost will not be permitted unless the
contractor establishes the necessity for such additional costs. Labor costs for equipment
operators and helpers shall be reported only when such costs are not included in the invoice
for equipment rental. Only the labor costs of workers directly engaged at the job site in the
performance of the Change Order work shall be included.
5) Materials. The cost of materials reported shall be at invoice or lowest current price at which
such materials are locally available in the quantities involved, plus sales tax, freight and
delivery. Materials cost shall be based upon supplier or manufacturer’s invoice. If invoices
or other satisfactory evidence of cost are not furnished within 15 days of delivery, then the
Engineer shall determine the materials cost, at its sole discretion. The City reserves the
right to furnish such materials as it deems advisable and the Contractor shall not be paid
for those materials or any mark-up on those materials.
6) Tool and Equipment Use. No payment will be made for the use of small tools or tools
which have a replacement value of $1,000 or less. Regardless of ownership, the rates to
be used in determining equipment use costs shall not exceed listed rates prevailing locally
at equipment rental agencies, or distributors, at the time the work is performed. Only the
equipment directly used or engaged at the jobsite in the performance of the Change Order
work shall be included.
7) Overhead, Profit, and Other Charges. The mark-up for overhead (including supervision)
and profit on work added to the Contract shall be according to the following:
• “Net Cost” is defined as consisting of costs of labor, materials, tools, and equipment
only excluding overhead and profit. The costs of applicable insurance and bond
premium will be reimbursed to the Contractor and subcontractors at cost only,
without mark-up.
• For work performed by the Contractor’s forces the added cost for overhead and
profit shall not exceed fifteen (15%) percent of the Net Cost of the work.
• For work performed by a subcontractor, the added cost for overhead and profit shall
not exceed fifteen (15%) percent of the Net Cost of the work done by the
subcontractor, to which the Contractor may add five (5%) percent of the
subcontractor’s Net Cost.
GC-28
• Fore work performed by a sub-subcontractor, the added cost for overhead and profit
shall not exceed fifteen (15%) percent of the Net Cost of the work done by the sub-
subcontractor, to which the subcontractor and Contractor may each add an
additional five (5%) percent of the Net Cost of the lower tier sub-contractor.
• No additional markup will be allowed for lower tier sub-contractors, and in no case
shall the added cost for over and profit payable by the City exceed twenty-five
(25%) percent of the Net Cost as defined herein.
(o) The Contractor shall submit to the City's representative for his verification, on a daily basis,
work sheets showing an itemized breakdown of labor, materials, tools and equipment used in
performing the work. No payment will be made for work not verified by the City's representative.
(p) For added or deducted work by subcontractors, the Contractor shall furnish to the City the
subcontractor’s signed detailed estimate of the cost of labor, material and equipment, including the
subcontractor markup for overhead and profit. The same requirement shall apply to sub-
subcontractors.
(q) For added or deducted work furnished by a vendor or supplier, the Contractor shall furnish to
the City a detailed estimate or quotation of the cost to the Contractor, signed by such vendor or
supplier.
(r) Any change in the work involving both additions and deletions shall indicate a net total cost,
including subcontracts and materials. Allowance for overhead and profit, as specified herein, shall
be applied if the net total cost is an extra; overhead and profit allowances shall not be applied if
the net total cost is a credit. The estimated cost of deductions shall be based on labor and material
prices on the date the Contract was executed.
(s) Contractor shall not reserve a right to assert impact costs, extended job site costs, extended
overhead, constructive acceleration, and/or actual acceleration beyond what is stated in the Change
Order for work. No claims shall be allowed for impact, extended overhead costs, constructive
acceleration, and/or actual acceleration due to a multiplicity of changes and/or clarifications. The
Contractor may not change or modify the City’s Change Order form in an attempt to reserve
additional rights.
(t) If the City disagrees with the proposal submitted by the Contractor, it will notify the Contractor
and the City will provide its opinion of the appropriate price and/or time extension. If the
Contractor agrees with the City, a Change Order will be issued by the City. If no agreement can
be reached, the City shall have the right to issue a unilateral Change Order setting forth its
determination of the reasonable additions or savings in costs and time attributable to the extra or
deleted work. Such determination shall become final and binding if the Contractor fails to submit
a claim in writing to the City within 15 days of the issuance of the unilateral Change Order,
disputing the terms of the unilateral change order.
(u) No dispute, disagreement, or failure of the parties to reach agreement on the terms of the
Change Order shall relieve the Contractor from the obligation to proceed with performance of the
work, including extra work, promptly and expeditiously.
GC-29
(v) Any alterations, extensions of time, extra work, or any other changes may be made without
securing consent of the Contractor’s surety or sureties.
(w) No payment shall be made for any item not set forth above, including without limitation,
Contractor's overhead, general administrative expense, supervision, or damages claimed for delay
in prosecuting the remainder of the work.
(x) The completed change order, when signed by the Contractor and the City shall become a
contractual extension of the Contract and all sureties, bonds, and insurance in effect under the
Contract shall be extended intact to include the work described in the change order.
*** END OF SECTION 5 ***
GC-30
SECTION 6 - LEGAL RESPONSIBILITY, SAFETY, BONDS AND INSURANCE
6.01 RESPONSIBILITY OF CONTRACTOR
(a) The work shall be under the Contractor's responsible care and charge. The Contractor shall
bear all loss and damage whatsoever and from whatever cause, except that caused solely and
exclusively by the fault or negligence of the City which may occur on or to the work during the
fulfillment of the Contract. If any loss or damage occurs, the Contractor shall immediately make
good any such loss or damage and in the event of the Contractor refusing or neglecting so to do,
the City may itself or by the employment of some other person make good any such loss or damage
and the cost and expense of so doing shall be charged to the Contractor.
(b) The Contractor alone shall at all times be responsible for the safety of employees and any
Subcontractor's employees and for plant and equipment and any Subcontractor's plant and
equipment and the method of prosecuting the work.
6.02 LIABILITY OF CONTRACTOR
(a) The Contractor shall be liable for all damages and injury which shall be caused to City of
property on or in the vicinity of the work or which shall occur to any person or persons or property
whatsoever arising out of the performance of this Contract, whether or not such damage or injury
be caused by the negligence of the Contractor and whether or not such damage or injury be caused
by the inherent nature of the work as specified except the willful or negligent acts of the City, its
officers or agents.
(b) In case any suit or legal proceedings shall be brought against the City or the Engineer or any
of their officers, agents or employees on account of loss or damage sustained by any person or
property as a result of the performance of the work covered by this Contract, whether or not such
injuries or damage be due to the negligence of the Contractor and whether or not such injuries or
damage be caused by the inherent nature of the work as specified, the Contractor agrees to assume
the defense thereof and to pay all expenses connected therewith including reasonable attorneys'
fees and any judgment that may be obtained against the City or the Engineer or any of their officers,
agents or employees in such suits, and in the event that any lien is placed upon the property of the
City or the Engineer or any of their officers, agents or employees, as a result of such suits, the
Contractor agrees to at once cause the same to be dissolved and discharges by giving bond or
otherwise.
6.03 LAWS, REGULATIONS AND PERMITS
(a) The Contractor shall give all notices required by law and comply with all laws, ordinances,
rules and regulations pertaining to the conduct of the work. The Contractor shall be liable for all
violations of the law in connection with work furnished by the Contractor. If the Contractor
observes that the Drawings or Specifications are at variance with any law, ordinance, rule or
regulation, the Contractor shall promptly notify the Engineer in writing and any necessary changes
shall be made by instruction or change order. If the Contractor performs any work knowing it to
GC-31
be contrary to such laws, ordinances, rules and regulations and without giving such notice to the
Engineer, the Contractor shall bear all cost arising therefrom.
(b) Unless otherwise specified herein, permits and licenses which are necessary only for and
during the prosecution of the work and the subsequent guaranty period thereafter shall be secured
and paid for by the Contractor while those permits and licenses of regulatory agencies which are
necessary to be maintained after the completion of the guaranty period of the Contract will be
secured and paid for by the City.
6.04 PATENTS AND COPYRIGHTS
The Contractor shall hold harmless, indemnify and defend the City and Engineer, their officers,
agents and employees against all claims of liability arising from the use of any patented or
copyrighted design, device, material or process, furnished, or used by the Contractor or any
Subcontractors in the performance of the work.
6.05 PERMITS AND LICENSES
Unless otherwise provided in the Special Provisions, the Contractor shall obtain at the Contractor's
own expense all permits and licenses required for prosecution of the work and shall pay all fees
and taxes properly assessed against equipment or property used in connection with the work.
6.06 SALES AND USE TAXES
The Contractor shall pay all sales and use taxes assessed by federal, state or local authorities on
materials furnished by the Contractor in the performance of the work.
6.07 LABOR DISCRIMINATION
No discrimination shall be made in the employment of persons on the work by the Contractor or
by any Subcontractor because of race, color or religion of such persons.
6.08 WAGE DETERMINATIONS
(a) As required by the California Labor Code, the Contractor shall pay not less than the prevailing
rate of per diem wages as determined by the Director, Department of Industrial Relations, State of
California. Copies of such prevailing rate of per diem wages are on file at the City Clerk's office,
which copies will be made available to any interested party upon request. The Contractor shall
post a copy of such determination at each job site.
(b) The Contractor shall, as penalty to the City, forfeit $50.00 for each calendar day, or portion
thereof, for each worker paid less than the specified prevailing rates for such work or craft in which
such worker is employed, whether paid by the Contractor or by any Subcontractor.
(c) In accordance with the provisions of the California Labor Code, the Contractor shall secure
the payment of compensation to employees.
GC-32
6.09 APPRENTICES ON PUBLIC WORKS PROJECTS
The Contractor shall comply with all applicable provisions of the California Labor Code relating
to employment of apprentices on public works projects.
6.10 WORKING HOURS
The Contractor shall comply with all applicable provisions of the California Labor Code relating
to working hours. The Contractor shall, as a penalty to the City, forfeit $25.00 for each worker
employed in the execution of the Contract by the Contractor or by any Subcontractor, for each
calendar day during which such worker is required or permitted to work more than 8 hours in any
one calendar day and 40 hours in any one calendar week, unless such worker receives
compensation for all hours worked in excess of 8 hours at not less than 1 1/2 times the basic rate
of pay.
6.11 PUBLIC SAFETY AND CONVENIENCE
(a) The Contractor shall at all times conduct work so as to assure the least possible obstruction to
traffic and inconvenience to the general public and adequate protection of persons and property in
the vicinity of the work. No street shall be closed to the public without first obtaining permission
of the Engineer and proper governmental authority. Where excavation is being performed in
primary streets or highways, one lane in each direction shall be kept open to traffic at all times
unless otherwise provided or shown. Toe boards shall be provided to retain excavated material.
Fire hydrants on or adjacent to the work shall be kept accessible to fire-fighting equipment at all
times. Temporary provisions shall be made by the Contractor to assure the use of sidewalks and
the proper functioning of all gutters, storm drain inlets and other drainage facilities.
(b) The Contractor shall provide adequate barricades, signs, warning lights, watchmen and
flagmen as required, as directed by the Engineer and agency having jurisdiction, to protect the
work and the safety of the public. Warning lights using inflammable liquids will not be permitted.
Only electrically-operated warning lights will be approved for use. Warning lights shall operate
from sunset to sunrise. Barricades shall be painted to increase their visibility at night.
(c) "NO PARKING" signs with specific time frames shall be supplied and posted by the
Contractor 72 hours prior to start of work. The Contractor shall notify the local Police Department
of such restrictions and obtain approval for the posting.
(d) Flyers notifying all surrounding or affected businesses and residents shall be distributed 7 days
prior to the start of work.
(e) Project Information Signs (2) and Changeable Message Boards (2) shall be placed 14 days
prior to the start of work as prescribed in the Drawings and Specifications and per Special
Provisions Section 7.16.
GC-33
6.12 TRENCH EXCAVATION
Prior to excavating any trench five feet or more in depth the Contractor shall submit to the Engineer
a detailed plan showing the design of shoring, bracing, sloping or other provisions to be made for
worker protection from the hazard of caving ground. If such plan varies from the shoring system
standards established by the Construction Safety Orders of the California Division of Industrial
Safety, the plans shall be prepared by a civil engineer registered in California. In no case will the
Contractor be permitted to use a shoring, sloping or other protection system less effective than that
required by said Orders. Nothing contained herein shall be construed to impose a tort liability upon
the City, Engineer or any of their officers, agents or employees.
6.13 CONCRETE FORMS, FALSE WORK, AND SHORING
The Contractor shall comply with the requirements of CAL OSHA, Construction Safety Orders,
regarding the design of concrete forms, false work and shoring and the inspection of same prior to
placement of concrete. The Contractor shall employ a civil engineer registered in California to
prepare design calculations and working drawings of the false work or shoring system, to inspect
such system prior to placement of concrete and to certify in writing to the Engineer 24 hours prior
to placing concrete that the false work or shoring system complies with the design and that the
materials and workmanship are satisfactory for the purpose intended.
6.14 SANITARY PROVISIONS
The Contractor shall provide and maintain sanitary facilities for the use of employees and
Subcontractors necessary to comply with the requirements of state and local health departments.
6.15 SAFETY AND HEALTH REGULATIONS
All work shall be performed in accordance with requirements of the California Division of
Industrial Safety, the California Occupational Safety and Health Act and the William Steiger
Occupational Safety and Health Act of 1970. The job safety conditions will be the responsibility
of the Contractor.
6.16 LABOR, MATERIAL AND PERFORMANCE BONDS
The Contractor shall furnish two bonds each in the amount shown in the Notice Inviting Bids, one
as security for the faithful performance of the work and the other as security for the faithful
payment and satisfaction of all persons furnishing materials and performing labor on the work.
The bonds shall be issued by a corporation duly and legally licensed to transact surety business in
the State of California. Such bonds shall remain in force throughout the period required to complete
the work. The bond must be executed by a duly licensed surety company approved by the City.
6.17 CONTRACTOR NOT RESPONSIBLE FOR DAMAGE RESULTING FROM
CERTAIN ACTS OF GOD
As provided in Section 7105 of the Public Contract Act, the Contractor shall not be responsible
for the cost of repairing or restoring damaged portions of the work determined to have been caused
GC-34
by an act of God, in excess of five percent of the Contract amount, provided, that the work damaged
was constructed in accordance with accepted and applicable building standards and the
Specifications and Drawings. The Contractor shall obtain insurance to indemnify the City for any
damage to the work caused by an act of God if the premium of said insurance coverage is called
for as a separate bid item in the proposal for the work. The term "Act of God" shall include only
the following occurrences or conditions and effects: (1) earthquakes and (2) Tsunami.
6.18 INSURANCE
(a) GENERAL. The Contractor shall procure and maintain for the duration of the Contract,
insurance against claims for injuries to persons or damages to property which may arise from or
in connection with the performance of the work hereunder by the Contractor, Contractor's agents,
representatives, employees or Subcontractors. The cost of said insurance shall be included in the
Contractor's bid. The Contractor shall not commence work under this Contract until ALL
insurances required herein are obtained and until such insurance has been approved by the City.
The Contractor shall not allow any Subcontractor to commence work on any subcontract until the
insurance required of the Subcontractor has been so obtained and approved.
The insurance required herein shall be maintained continuously during the life of the Contract up
to the date of acceptance of the work by the City Council, however, the Contractor's liabilities
under this Contract shall not be limited in any way to the insurance coverage required. Each
insurance policy required herein shall be endorsed to state that coverage shall not be suspended,
voided, canceled, reduced in coverage or in limits except after thirty (30) days prior written notice
by certified mail, return receipt requested, has been given to the City. Insurance is to be placed
with insurer's having a Best's rating of no less than A and a Financial Class VII or higher.
(b) GENERAL LIABILITY AND AUTOMOBILE LIABILITY COVERAGES. The policies are
to contain, or be endorsed to contain the following provisions:
1. The City, its Council Members, officials, employees, designated agents and volunteers,
and the Engineer, his directors, employees, contract employees and agents are to be
covered as insures with the following: liability arising out of activities performed by or on
behalf of the Contractor; products and completed operations of the Contractor; premises
owned, leased or used by the Contractor; or automobiles owned, leased or used by the
Contractor. The coverage shall contain no special limitations on the scope of protection
afforded to the City, its Council Members, officials, employees, designated agents or
volunteers, and the Engineer, his directors, employees, contract employees and agents.
2. The Contractor's insurance coverage shall be primary insurance with respect to the City,
its Council Members, officials, employees, designated agents and volunteers, and the
Engineer, his directors, employees, contract employees and agents. Any insurance or self-
insurance maintained by the City, its Council Members, officials, employees, designated
agents or volunteers, and the Engineer, his directors, employees, contract employees and
agents shall be excess of the Contractor's insurance and shall not contribute with it.
GC-35
3. Any failure to comply with reporting provisions of the policies shall not affect coverage
provided to the City, its Council Members, officials, employees, designated agents or
volunteers, and the Engineer, his directors, employees, contract employees and agents.
4. Coverage shall state that the Contractor's insurance shall apply separately to each insured
against whom claim is made or suit is brought except with respect to the limits of the
insurer's liability.
(c) WORKERS' COMPENSATION INSURANCE. The Contractor shall procure and maintain
workers' compensation insurance as required by applicable state law for all employees to be
engaged in work at the site of the project under this Contract and, in case of any such work sublet,
the Contractor shall require the Subcontractor to provide workers' compensation insurance for all
of the latter's employees to be engaged in such work unless such employees are covered by the
protection afforded by the Contractor's workers' compensation insurance. The Subcontractor's
insurance coverage shall be subject to all of the same requirements stated herein for the
Contractor's insurance coverage. In case any class of employees engaged in hazardous work under
this Contract is not protected under the workers' compensation statute, the Contractor shall provide
and shall cause each Subcontractor to provide adequate employers' liability insurance for the
protection of such employees that are not otherwise protected.
(d) CONTRACTOR'S PUBLIC LIABILITY AND PROPERTY DAMAGE INSURANCE AND
VEHICLE LIABILITY INSURANCE. The Contractor shall procure and maintain contractor's
public liability insurance, contractor's property damage insurance and vehicle liability insurance
in the amounts listed in the Special Provisions.
(e) SUBCONTRACTOR'S PUBLIC LIABILITY AND PROPERTY DAMAGE INSURANCE
AND VEHICLE LIABILITY INSURANCE. The Contractor shall either: (1) require each
Subcontractor to procure and to maintain subcontractor's public liability and property damage
insurance and vehicle liability insurance of the type and in amounts specified, or (2) insure the
activities of Subcontractors in the Contractor's own policy, in like amount.
(f) BUILDER'S RISK INSURANCE (ALL RISK COVERAGE). The Contractor shall procure
and maintain builder's risk insurance (all risk coverage) on a 100 percent completed value basis
for the benefit of the City, the Contractor and Subcontractors as their interest may appear.
(g) MINIMUM SCOPE OF INSURANCE. Coverage shall be at least as broad as:
1. Insurance Services Office form number GL 0002 (Ed. 1/73) covering Comprehensive
General Liability and Insurance Services Office form number GL 0404 covering Broad
Form Comprehensive General Liability; or Insurance Services Office Commercial General
Liability coverage ("occurrence" From CG 0001).
2. Insurance Services Office form number CA 0001 (Ed. 1/78) covering Automobile
Liability, code 1 "any auto" and endorsement CDA 0025.
3. Workers' Compensation insurance as required by the State of California and Employers
Liability insurance.
GC-36
(h) MINIMUM LIMITS OF INSURANCE. Contractor shall maintain limits no less than the
following unless modified in the Special Provisions:
1. Comprehensive General Liability: $1,000,000 per occurrence for bodily injury, personal
injury and property damage. If Commercial General Liability Insurance or other form with
a general aggregate limit is used, either the general aggregate limit shall apply separately
to this project/location or the general aggregate limit shall be twice the required occurrence
limit.
2. Automobile Liability: $1,000,000 per accident for bodily injury and property damage.
3. Workers' Compensation: Limits as required by the State of California and Employers
Liability limits of $1,000,000 per accident.
(i) DEDUCTIBLES AND SELF INSURED RETENTIONS. Any deductibles or self-insured
retentions must be declared to and approved by the City. At the option of the City, either the insurer
shall reduce or eliminate such deductibles or self-insured retentions with respect to the City, its
directors, officials, employees, designated agents and volunteers, and the Engineer, his directors,
employees, contract employees and agents; or the Contractor shall procure a bond guaranteeing
payment of losses and related investigations, claim administration and defense expenses.
(j) VERIFICATION OF COVERAGE. The Contractor shall furnish the City with certificates of
insurance and with original endorsements affecting coverage required by this section. The
certificates and endorsements for each insurance policy are to be signed by a person authorized by
that insurer to bind coverage on its behalf.
The certificates and endorsements are to be on forms provided by the City and are to be received
and approved by the City before work commences.
(k) The certificates of insurance shall name as additionally insured the City agents listed in the
Special Provisions.
6.19 LIABILITY OF CITY AND ENGINEER
To the fullest extent permitted by law, the Contractor shall defend, indemnify and hold harmless
the City, Engineer and their officers, agents and employees against and from all claims, suits or
actions arising under or by reason of the work agreed to be undertaken in the Contract or any
performance of the work from the sole negligence of the Contractor or employees or agents or
negligence which could be jointly attributed to City employees or the Contractor, but not from the
sole negligence or willful misconduct of the City or the Engineer.
*** END OF SECTION 6 ***
SP-1
SPECIAL PROVISIONS
7.01 THE REQUIREMENTS
(a) The work consists of the construction of one 16-inch automatic flow control valve by Cla-Val
Company in the existing valve vault, including valves, piping, vents, access ladder, electrical,
instrumentation and controls, appurtenances, and all supplies, equipment, services, bidding
schedule items, and transportation necessary to construct and complete the project entitled:
TRIANGLE WATER FLOW CONTROL VALVE
PROJECT NO. W-354
7.02 CITY DESIGNATED ENGINEER
The City has designated Melissa Barbosa, P.E. as the Engineer for this Contract Tel: (626)-812-
5163, Fax: (626) 334-3163, e-mail: mbarbosa@azusaca.gov. The Project Manager is Melissa
Barbosa, P.E., Tel: (626) 812-5173, Fax: (626) 334-3163, email: mbarbosa@azusaca.gov.
7.03 BEGINNING AND COMPLETION OF WORK AND WORK HOURS
The work shall commence within 10 working days after the date set forth in the "Notice to Proceed"
to begin work. All work shall be completed within 60 calendar days after set date. All work under
this contract shall be performed between 7 a.m. and 5 p.m., Monday through Friday, unless
otherwise stated in the Contract Documents, Plans, or Specifications.
7.04 LIQUIDATED DAMAGES
The City and Contractor agree that it would be impracticable or extremely difficult to fix actual
damages in case of the Contractor's delay in completion of work beyond the time agreed upon,
therefore, the City and Contractor agree that the Contractor shall pay to the City as fixed, agreed
and liquidated damages the amount of $1,500 for each calendar day's delay in completion of the
work beyond the time agreed upon, and agrees that said liquidated damages is a reasonable
estimate of the damages to be sustained by the City.
7.05 STANDARD SPECIFICATIONS AND HIERARCHY
The work shall be in accordance with these Specifications and the "Standard Specifications for
Public Works Construction", latest Edition, published by Building News, Inc., 990 Park Center
Drive, Suite E, Vista, CA 92801 (760-734-113), and are referred to elsewhere in these
Specifications as SSPWC. Copies of the "SSPWC" are on file in the office of the Engineer and are
open to public inspection during regular business hours. When the Specifications and SSPWC
conflict, the Specifications shall supersede the SSPWC. Where the Plans conflict with the
requirements of the Specifications and SSPWC, the Specifications and SSPWC shall prevail.
SP-2
7.06 WATER AND POWER
(a) All temporary utilities, including but not limited to electricity, water, gas, and telephone, used
on the work shall be furnished and paid for by the Contractor. The Contractor shall provide
necessary temporary distribution systems from distribution points to points on the work where the
utility is needed. Upon completion of the work, the Contractor shall remove all temporary
distribution systems. The Contractor, at his own expense, shall pay all fees for such utilities.
(b) The Contractor shall provide all necessary and adequate utilities and pay all costs for water,
electricity, gas, oil, and sewer charges required for completion of the Project. This shall include,
but not be limited to, all water for pressure testing and disinfection.
(c) Upon the Contractor making a deposit for each meter, the Contract shall then obtain and cause
a meter to be installed on a fire hydrant as near as possible to the site of the work. The Contractor
at his own expense shall provide facilities for conveying the water from the meter to the point of
use.
(d) The Contractor shall provide temporary electric power as required for his construction
operations under the Contract. He shall pay for the meter installation and for all power used.
7.07 TRENCH EXCAVATION
The Contractor, prior to excavating any trench five feet or more in depth shall submit to the
Engineer a detailed plan showing the design of shoring, bracing, sloping or other provisions to be
made for worker protection from the hazard of caving ground. If such plan varies from the shoring
system standards established by the CAL OSHA, the plans shall be prepared by a registered civil
or structural engineer.
7.08 PERMITS AND LICENSES
A City of Azusa business license is required for Contractors and Subcontractors for work in the
City of Azusa. Business licenses may be required by other jurisdictions in which the project is
located. The Contractor is responsible to obtain a business license at his own expense. The
Contractor is responsible for obtaining and paying for an excavation permit from the City of Azusa
Public Works department and obtain and pay for all other required permits for this project.
7.09 LINES, GRADES, AND MEASUREMENTS
(a) All lines and grades required for proper execution of the work shall be furnished by the
Contractor who will be held responsible for constructing the work to the lines and grades shown
on the Drawings.
(b) The Contractor shall preserve all bench marks, monuments, survey marks and stakes and, in
case of their removal or destruction, he shall be liable for the cost of their replacement.
SP-3
7.10 GUARANTEE
The Contractor hereby guarantees for a two-year period, following acceptance by the Utility
Board/City Council, that the entire work constructed by him under this Contract will meet fully all
requirements thereof as to quality of workmanship and of materials furnished by him.
7.11 RESTORATION OF EXISTING FACILITIES
(a) ROADS AND STREETS. All roads and streets in which the surface is removed, broken or
damaged, or in which the ground has caved or settled due to work under this Contract, shall be
completely resurfaced and brought to the original grade and crown section unless otherwise
indicated. Before resurfacing material is placed, edges of pavements shall be trimmed back far
enough to provide clean, solid, vertical faces, and shall be free of any loose material. Paving shall
be one-inch thicker than adjoining pavement and shall conform to the requirements of these
Specifications. Roadways used by the Contractor for hauling materials, equipment, supplies, etc.,
shall be cleaned and repaired if the condition of the roadway is damaged or otherwise affected due
to the Contractor's operation.
(b) CULTIVATED AREAS AND OTHER SURFACE IMPROVEMENTS. All cultivated areas,
either agricultural or landscaping, and other surface improvements which are damaged by actions
of the Contractor shall be restored as nearly as possible to their original condition.
(c) EXISTING STAKES AND MARKS. All section, section subdivisions, plat, U.S.E.D., U.S.C.
& G.S., U.S.G.S., and any other official monuments or bench marks shall be carefully preserved
or replaced. In the event any such monument or marker is disturbed as a result of the Contractor's
operation, the Contractor shall replace or reset such monument or marker in a manner satisfactory
to the Engineer. Replaced or reset monuments shall be of acceptable type and quality and shall be
located so as to clear existing utilities or any other interference. They shall be placed in a manner
consistent with good and recognized engineering and surveying practice.
(d) SIDEWALK RECONSTRUCTION. Where sidewalk, curbs, or gutters are to be repaired, the
repairs shall be made by removing and replacing the entire section back to the nearest score lines
and not by refinishing the damaged portion.
7.12 CONTRACT DRAWINGS
The Contract Drawings applicable to the work to be performed under this Contract are bound
herein or attached hereto.
7.13 SHOP DRAWINGS
The Contractor shall furnish Shop Drawings to the Engineer for review in accordance with Section
2.04 of the General Conditions.
SP-4
7.14 INSPECTION
The City shall provide inspection between the hours of 9 a.m. and 3 p.m., Monday through Friday.
No work shall be performed on weekends, unless approved in writing by the ALW Project
Manager. The Contractor shall reimburse the City at rates established by the City for inspection in
excess of the foregoing, including legal holidays.
7.15 WATERING
(a) Water for compacting original ground, fill material, subgrades, and water required for laying
dust caused by grading operations and the passage of traffic through the work shall be applied as
directed by the Engineer or Project Manager.
(b) Full compensation for furnishing water for any of the construction operations shall be
considered as included in the prices paid for the various contract items of work and no additional
allowance shall be made therefore.
7.16 PUBLIC CONVENIENCE, SAFETY, AND TRAFFIC CONTROL
(a) Traffic and access shall comply with Section 7-10 of the “Standard Specifications for Public
Works Construction” and the requirements set forth herein.
The Contractor shall be responsible for all traffic control during construction, and any other
activity or condition that may alter existing traffic control and place in jeopardy the safety of the
public or those in the employ of the Contractor. He shall be responsible for placing at an absolute
minimum the chance of harm or injury to the public or to those in the employ of the Contractor
through the use of accepted construction traffic control standards and techniques. An engineered
traffic control plan shall be prepared and submitted by Contractor when required by the applicable
jurisdiction.
The Contractor shall be in strict conformance with the “Work Area Traffic Control Handbook”
(WATCH). Any situation not addressed by the WATCH Manual shall conform to the detour/lane
reduction plan provided by the Contractor or the direction of the Engineer. The Contractor shall
immediately correct any deficiencies in existing traffic control as directed by the Engineer. Arrow
boards shall be installed at both ends of a work area where traffic lanes are reduced or diverted.
(b) No street or access closure to through traffic will be allowed without the express approval of
the local jurisdiction, Public Works Department, or appropriate City Engineer.
(c) All existing stop signs, street name signs and regulatory signs shall be maintained in visible
locations during construction and permanently relocated or removed as directed by the plan and
the Engineer.
(d) The Contractor shall provide access through the site for the use of emergency vehicles and
local traffic to residences and businesses.
(e) Temporary no parking is authorized along the streets in the project areas. Contractor shall post
“Temporary No Parking” signs after notifying and receiving approval from the local jurisdiction.
SP-5
Type of sign and method and location of posting shall also be subject to the Engineer’s approval.
The Contractor shall notify all affected residences and business establishments at least seven (7)
days prior to the posting of signs. The “No Parking” signs shall be posted at least 72 hours prior
to work.
(f) All warning signs, lights, and devices to be used by the Contractor shall conform to the
standards of the “Manual of Traffic Controls - Warning Signs, Lights, and Devices for Use in
Performance of Work Upon Highways” Issued by the Department of Transportation, State of
California, latest edition.
(g) Payment for traffic control will be included in related payment items and no additional
compensation will be allowed therefore.
(h) Contractor shall maintain access to driveways wherever possible and no driveway or drive
approach shall remain closed for more than (2) two consecutive days. All driveways and drive
approaches which are not poured the same day in which the existing area was excavated and graded
shall be ramped with aggregate base material to the satisfaction of the Engineer. All approaches to
other proposed concrete improvements normally used as an access way for traffic (i.e. cross-
gutters, spandrels, etc.) shall be treated in a similar fashion. While working on any driveway where
vehicular passage will be temporarily interrupted, he shall notify the property owner 24 hours
before commencing work so that the owner may park his/her vehicles off his property.
(i) In addition, if the Contractor fails or refuses to place adequate warning lights, and or barricades
necessary for the public’s convenience and safety, the City will place warning lights or barricades
to protect or warn the public of any dangerous condition connected with Contractor’s operations.
Contractor shall become liable to the City at the rate of five hundred dollars ($500) per night.
(j) At least 5 working days in advance of closing or partially closing any street or alley, Contractor
shall submit a plan for detouring of traffic to the Engineer for his approval.
(k) This project requires (2) Project Information Signs made of 3 mm thick white “dibond”
aluminum composite substrate or approved equal. Signs shall be 48 inches wide by 72 inches tall,
shall be placed 14 days prior to the start of work, and shall remain until project completion. Printing
shall be in color, using latex or eco solvent UV inhibited ink. A drawing must be submitted for
review and approval by ALW and shall include the following:
1. Azusa Light & Water (2-Inch Letter Height)
2. Azusa Light & Water Logo (Color, 8-Inch High)
3. Mayor, Mayor Pro Tem, and Council Members as they appear (1.25-Inch Letter Height):
a. Mayor: Robert Gonzales
b. Mayor Pro Tem: Uriel E. Macias
c. Council Member: Edward J. Alvarez
d. Council Member: Jesse Avila
e. Council Member: Andrew N. Mendez
4. Project Name: Triangle Water Flow Control Valve Project (2.75-Inch Letter Height)
5. Project Duration Dates (2.75-Inch Letter Height)
SP-6
6. Name of the Contractor, including contact person and 24-hour phone number (1.75-Inch
Letter Height)
(l) This project requires (2) Changeable Message Boards (location to be determined by ALW).
Changeable Message Board shall be placed 14 days prior to the start of work and shall remain until
project completion. Message displayed shall be submitted to ALW for review and approval.
(m) Traffic Control shall be performed based on the following:
• Contractor shall follow MUTCD Latest Edition for Traffic Control. All traffic lanes shall
be opened at the end of each working day.
(n) Full compensation for providing for the public convenience as set forth in this Section shall
be considered as included in the prices paid for the various contract items of work and no additional
allowance will be made therefore.
7.17 CONSTRUCTION INTERFERENCES
(a) Insofar as practicable, during the progress of the work, the Contractor shall not disturb, but
shall support and protect against injury and maintain in good operating condition at his own
expense, all subsurface, surface and overhead utilities, fences, structures and other facilities
whether or not they are shown on the Drawings.
(b) All facilities removed shall be reconstructed as promptly as is reasonably possible in their
original or other authorized locations and in a condition at least as good as when removed and
subject to the inspection of the City, or the governing body having jurisdiction.
(c) During the performance of the work under these Specifications, the City or agencies in control
of any of the facilities affected by the work shall have the right to enter when necessary upon the
pipeline right-of-way, or upon any portion of the work thereof, for the purpose of maintaining
service and of making changes in or repairs to said facilities.
(d) The Contractor shall be responsible for and shall make good all damage due to utilities,
structures or other facilities as shown on the Drawings due to his operations, and the provisions of
this section shall not be abated even in the event such damage occurs after backfilling or is not
discovered until after completion of backfilling.
(e) The Drawings show the approximate position of known subsurface, surface and overhead
utilities, fences, structures, and other facilities as they are supposed to exist in the immediate
vicinity of the work, but the City does not guarantee that all existing facilities are shown on the
Contract Drawings. The Contractor will not be assessed for liquidated damages due to delay in
removal or relocation of utility facilities.
7.18 SCHEDULING AND SEQUENCING OF WORK
The Contractor shall submit a detailed schedule of work to the Engineer for his approval prior to
commencing construction of any portion of the project. The Engineer shall have the right to revise
SP-7
or alter the Contractor's work schedule. The Contractor shall not commence work until he has
received Notice to Proceed from the City.
7.19 RIGHT-OF-WAY
(a) The Contractor shall not do any work that would affect any oil, gas, storm drain or water
pipelines, any telephone, telegraph or electric transmission lines, fences or any other structure, nor
enter upon the rights-of-way or other lands appurtenant thereto until notified by the Engineer that
the City has secured authority therefore from the proper companies or parties. Authority to enter
onto land for the Contractor’s convenience shall be obtained by the Contractor.
(b) After authority has been obtained, the Contractor shall give said companies or parties due
notice of his intention to begin work and he shall give them convenient access and every facility
for removing, shoring, supporting or otherwise protecting such pipelines, transmission lines,
ditches, fences or structures and for replacing same.
7.20 SHUTDOWNS AND MAINTENANCE OF WATER SERVICES
(a) All shutdowns shall require a minimum of one (1) week advance notification to the City
(including the Engineer). The notification shall include a plan detailing the schedule and duration
of the shutdown(s), as well as coordination with ALW staff regarding the affected services.
(b) The Contractor, at all times, shall maintain the supply of water to customers, except at the
scheduled shutdowns (approved by ALW) required to construct the connections to existing water
mains. All shutdowns and connections shall be completed in accordance with the Contract
Documents, Plans, and Specifications.
7.21 COORDINATION OF CONSTRUCTION
The Contractor shall coordinate construction as required by the Engineer with other adjacent utility
and building projects, and provide adequate access to adjoining properties at all times. The
Contractor shall provide for this in his bid and therefore shall have no claims for damages or extra
compensation in the event his work is delayed by the work performed by others.
7.22 COMPLIANCE WITH NATIONAL CLEAN WATER ACT
The Contractor is required to comply with the National Clean Water Act as follows:
(a) General Practices:
i. Develop and implement erosion/sediment control plans for embankments, if any.
ii. Schedule excavation and grading work for dry weather. Check for and repair leaking
equipment.
iii. Perform major equipment repairs in designated areas, away from the construction site.
SP-8
iv. Designated a location away from storm drains for refueling and vehicle/equipment
maintenance.
v. Do not use diesel oil to lubricate equipment or parts.
vi. Recycle used oil, concrete, broken asphalt, etc. whenever possible.
vii. Use good materials storage, spill prevention and other “housekeeping” practices to
prevent runoff contamination by toxic chemicals such as paints, solvents, pesticides,
fuels or metals from building materials.
(b) Asphalt/Concrete Removal:
i. After breaking old pavement, be sure to remove all chunks and pieces.
ii. Make sure broken pavement does not come in contact with rainfall or runoff.
iii. Shovel or vacuum saw-cut slurry and remove from the site. Cover or barricade storm
drain during saw-cutting if necessary.
(c) During Construction:
i. Cover and seal catch basins and maintenance holes when applying seal coat, slurry seal,
fog seal, etc.
ii. Use check dams ditches or berms to divert runoff around excavations.
iii. Never wash excess materials from exposed aggregate concrete or similar treatments
into a street or storm drain. Collect and recycle or dispose to dirt.
iv. Cover stockpiles (asphalt, sand etc.) and other materials with plastic sheets and berms.
v. Catch drips from paver with drip pans or absorbent material (cloth, rags, etc.) placed
under machine when not in use.
vi. Clean up all spills and leaks using “dry” methods (with absorbent materials and/or
rags), or dig up and remove contaminated soil.
vii. Collect and recycle excess abrasive gravel or sand.
viii. Avoid over application by water trucks for dust control.
7.23 INSURANCE
The Contractor shall maintain insurance in the amounts shown in Section 6.18 of the General
Conditions. Certificates of Insurance shall be submitted to the City with the following as
additionally insured:
SP-9
(a) The City of Azusa, its Council Members, officials, employees, designated agents or
volunteers.
7.24 MEASUREMENT & PAYMENT
The lump sum price, as submitted on the Proposal, shall include full compensation for furnishing
all labor, equipment, materials, bonds, insurance, supervision, planning, transportation, tools, and
appurtenances and for constructing and installing all of the work to complete each item in place
in accordance with the Plans, Specifications, and Addenda, and no other compensation will be
allowed thereafter. All items of work shall include the restoration of all existing conditions
within their scope of work. Payment for any and all incidental items of work and items of work
required by the Contract Documents, Plans, and Specifications that are not explicitly listed shall
be included in the prices for items shown on the Proposal. Compensation for changes in the work
or for extra work shall be as described in Section 5.13 of the General Conditions.
7.25 LABOR COMPLIANCE
The successful bidder (Contractor) and all tiers of subcontractor(s) under the bidder shall comply
with all applicable California Labor Code provisions and all of the following City requirements in
this section and Contract Documents. The Contractor is responsible for any California Labor Code
violations of itself and its subcontractors and shall ensure adherence by its subcontractors of all
California Labor Code provisions.
The Contractor and all tiers of subcontractors are required to:
(a) Submit a complete organization chart for the entire company, including all owners, officers,
personnel, employees, administrative staff, superintendents, foremen, laborers, tradespersons, and
apprentices. Each individual shall have their name and respective titles listed. The organization
chart shall be submitted with the bidders' bid package proposal and, if awarded the Contract, a
revised and updated organization chart shall be submitted to the City when material submittals are
submitted. At the City's request, an updated organization chart shall be submitted at any time
throughout the entire length of the Contract.
(b) Report and include each individual (laborer, tradesperson, apprentices or otherwise) working
on this project in any capacity on their respective payrolls. All owner-operators are required to be
reported and included by the contractor or subcontractor employing them.
(c) Provide and submit complete certified payroll records to the City for each month no later ten
(10) calendar days after the end of that month.
(d) File and submit all electronic certified payroll reports to the Department of Industrial Relations
(DIR) on a weekly basis.
(e) Provide and submit all labor records to the City within ten (10) calendar days of the City's
request for those records.
SP-10
(f) Require all employees, laborers, tradespersons, apprentices, and consultants to participate in
the City's Labor Compliance Site Interview Questionnaire at all times throughout the entire project
duration and during regular construction working hours. Each individual will be required to
provide their name, classification, minimum wage rate, actual rate of pay (straight time and
overtime), fringe benefits amounts, and all other questions in the interview questionnaire. A
sample of the interview questionnaire is included in this section below.
LABOR COMPLIANCE SITE INTERVIEW QUESTIONNAIRE
DISCLAIMER: This document containts confidential and personal information. Pursuant to California Civil Code Section 1798, this
document, in its entirety, shall remain confidential. Unauthorized disclosure of this document shall NOT be allowed.
PART A - PROJECT INFORMATION
Project Name:
Type:
j
Name of Interviewer:Title of Interviewer:
Project #:DIR Project ID #:
Contractor Name: Prime Subcontractor
If Subcontractor, name of Prime Contractor:
PART B INTERVIEW DATA
to
How is time reported? Yes No
Dates employed on this project:
Do you know your minimum wage rate?
Supervisor's Name:
Phone Number:
PART B - INTERVIEW DATA
Employee Name:Date of Interview:
Job Classifcation:
California Valid ID #:
Other
N/A
Other than Federal, State, or Social Security Tax Withholding, are other deductions being made to your check?
Yes No
How is time reported?
Are you required to return wages to your employer?
If f h ?
Yes No
If yes, what are they:
What is your actual rate of pay?Straight Overtime (OT)
What is your fringe benefit amount?
Yes No
How often are you paid?Weekly
Do you know your minimum wage rate?
Type of work being performed by the employee when interviewed:
Additional Comments:
PART C - FOR CITY USE ONLY
Type of work being performed for the day by the Contractor:
If yes, for what reason?
Additional comments:
If not, specify reason:
NoDoes information from interview match records? Yes
Is employee properly classified? NoYes
Type of work being performed by the employee when interviewed:
Are labor rates posted at the job site?Yes No
SP-11
7.26 COVID-19 (SARS-CoV-2) HEALTH AND SAFETY
Pursuant to the provisions of the executive orders and regulations issued by Governor Newsom,
Los Angeles County, and the City of Azusa, the successful bidder (Contractor) and all tiers of
subcontractor(s) under the bidder shall comply with all applicable health and safety measures
required by the State, County, and City. This includes, but is not limited to the following:
(a) Social Distancing.
(b) Zero-tolerance for working when ill.
(c) PPE, including face coverings.
(d) Frequent hand-washing.
(e) Disinfecting work areas.
(f) Construction requirements and postings.
END OF SPECIAL PROVISIONS
TS-1
TECHNICAL SPECIFICATIONS
STANTEC - 06152020 (FINAL) MOBILIZATION
W-354 – TRIANGLE FLOW CONTROL VALVE PAGE 01 50 00 - 1
SECTION 01 50 00 - MOBILIZATION
PART 1 - GENERAL
1.1 THE SUMMARY
A. CONTRACTOR shall mobilize as required for the proper performance and completion of
the WORK and in accordance with the Contract Documents.
B. Mobilization shall include at least the following items:
1. Moving onto the Site of CONTRACTOR's plant and equipment necessary for the
first month of operations.
2. Installing temporary construction power, wiring, and lighting facilities.
3. Establishing fire protection system.
4. Arranging for and erection of CONTRACTOR's WORK and storage yards.
5. Obtaining required permits.
6. Having OSHA required notices and establishing safety programs.
7. Having the CONTRACTOR's superintendent at the Site full time.
8. Submitting initial submittals.
1.2 PAYMENT FOR MOBILIZATION
A. The CONTRACTOR's attention is directed to the condition that 3 percent of the Contract
Price will be deducted from any money due the CONTRACTOR as progress payments
until mobilization items listed above have been completed. The aforementioned amount
will be retained by the OWNER as the agreed, estimated value of completing the
mobilization items listed. Any such retention of money for failure to complete such
mobilization items shall be in addition to the retention from any payments due to the
CONTRACTOR in accordance with Article 14 of the General Conditions.
B. As soon as practicable after receipt of the Notice to Proceed, the CONTRACTOR shall
submit a breakdown to the ENGINEER for approval, which shall show the estimated
value of each major component of mobilization. When approved by the ENGINEER, the
breakdown will be the basis for initial progress payments in which mobilization is
included.
PART 2 - PRODUCTS (NOT USED)
PART 3 - EXECUTION (NOT USED)
END OF SECTION
STANTEC - 06152020 (FINAL) PRESSURE PIPE TESTING
W-354 – TRIANGLE FLOW CONTROL VALVE AND DISINFECTION
PAGE 01 74 30 - 1
SECTION 01 74 30 - PRESSURE PIPE TESTING AND DISINFECTION
PART 1 - GENERAL
1.1 THE SUMMARY
A. The CONTRACTOR shall test and disinfect potable water pipelines and appurtenant
piping, in accordance with the Contract Documents.
B. In-field hydrostatic testing of pipelines is not required for this project. Any leaks observed
during startup shall be fixed by CONTRACTOR to the satisfaction of the OWNER at no
cost to the OWNER.
C. The CONTRACTOR shall be responsible for obtaining permits for discharging excess
testing and disinfection water and dechlorination of such water if required to satisfy
permit limits.
1.2 CONTRACTOR SUBMITTALS
A. Furnish submittals in accordance with General Conditions Section 2.04 - Shop
Drawings.
B. Furnish:
1. A testing plan and schedule, including method for water conveyance, control,
disposal, and disinfection shall be submitted in writing for approval.
2. Name of certified bacteriological testing laboratory.
3. Resume of experienced technician, if liquid chlorine is proposed.
PART 2 - PRODUCTS
2.1 MATERIAL REQUIREMENTS
A. All test equipment, chemicals for chlorination, temporary valves, bulkheads, and other
water control equipment, and choice of disinfectant shall be as determined by the
CONTRACTOR. No materials shall be used which would be injurious to the WORK for
future conveyance of potable water.
B. Chlorine for disinfection may be in the form of liquid chlorine, sodium hypochlorite
solution, or calcium hypochlorite granules or tablets.
1. Liquid chlorine shall be in accordance with the requirements of ANSI/AWWA B301 -
Liquid Chlorine, and shall be used only when each of the following conditions are
satisfied:
a. Appropriate gas flow chlorinators and ejectors are used.
b. An experienced technician directly supervises.
c. Appropriate safety practices are observed.
STANTEC - 06152020 (FINAL) PRESSURE PIPE TESTING
W-354 – TRIANGLE FLOW CONTROL VALVE AND DISINFECTION
PAGE 01 74 30 - 2
2. Sodium and calcium hypochlorite shall be in accordance with ANSI/AWWA B300 -
Hypochlorites.
C. Dechlorination agents may be sodium bisulfate, sodium sulfite, or sodium thiosulfate.
PART 3 - EXECUTION
3.1 GENERAL
A. Water for testing and disinfecting water pipelines will be furnished by the OWNER;
however, the CONTRACTOR shall convey the water from the OWNER-designated
source to the points of use.
B. All pressure pipelines shall be tested; those for potable water shall be disinfected. All
chlorinating and testing operations shall be performed in the presence of the
ENGINEER.
C. Disposal of flushing water and water containing chlorine shall be by methods acceptable
to the ENGINEER.
D. Disinfection operations shall be scheduled as late as possible during the Contract Time
to maximize the degree of sterility of the facilities at the time the WORK is accepted by
the OWNER. Bacteriological testing shall be performed by a certified testing laboratory
accepted by the OWNER. Results of the bacteriological testing shall be satisfactory with
the State Department of Health or other appropriate regulatory agency.
3.2 HYDROSTATIC TESTING OF PIPELINES – NOT USED
3.3 DISINFECTING PIPELINES
A. General: Potable water pipelines except those appurtenant to hydraulic structures shall
be disinfected in accordance with the requirements of ANSI/AWWA C651 - Disinfecting
Water Mains, using the Continuous-Feed Method as modified herein.
B. Chlorination: A chlorine-water mixture shall be uniformly introduced into the pipeline by
means of a solution-feed chlorinating device. The chlorine solution shall be introduced
at one end of the pipeline through a tap in such a manner that as the pipeline is filled
with water, the dosage applied to the water entering the pipe shall be approximately 50
mg/L. Care shall be taken to prevent the strong chlorine solution in the line being
disinfected from flowing back into the line supplying the water.
C. Retention Period: Chlorinated water shall be retained in the pipeline for at least 24
hours. After the chlorine-treated water has been retained for the required time, the free
chlorine residual at the pipeline extremities and at other representative points shall be at
least 25 mg/L. If testing does not demonstrate a residual of 25 mg/L or greater, the
disinfection procedure above shall be repeated.
D. Chlorinating Valves: During the process of chlorinating the pipelines, valves and other
appurtenances shall be operated from closed to full open to closed while the pipeline is
filled with the heavily-chlorinated water.
STANTEC - 06152020 (FINAL) PRESSURE PIPE TESTING
W-354 – TRIANGLE FLOW CONTROL VALVE AND DISINFECTION
PAGE 01 74 30 - 3
E. Sampling Ports: The CONTRACTOR shall provide sampling ports along the pipeline as
defined on AWWA C651. Taps may be made at manways and air valves to help
facilitate the spacing requirement.
F. Final Flushing: After the applicable retention period, the heavily chlorinated water shall
be flushed from the pipeline until chlorine measurements show that the concentration in
the water leaving the pipeline is no higher than that generally prevailing in the system or
is acceptable for domestic use. Any release of chlorinated water shall comply with
federal, state, and local regulation and the permits for the project. Chlorine in excessive
amounts shall be treated before discharge.
G. Bacteriological Testing: After final flushing and before the pipeline is placed in service, a
sample, or samples shall be collected from the end of the line, and shall be tested for
bacteriological quality in accordance with the requirements of the State Department of
Health or other appropriate regulatory agency. For this purpose the pipe shall be re-filled
with fresh potable water and left for a period of 24 hours before any sample is collected.
If testing does not demonstrate a free chlorine residual after the 24-hour period, the
disinfection procedure above shall be repeated. If the initial disinfection treatment fails
to produce satisfactory bacteriological test results, the disinfection procedure shall be
repeated until acceptable results are obtained.
3.4 CONNECTIONS TO EXISTING SYSTEM
A. Where connections are to be made to an existing potable water system, the interior
surfaces of all pipe and fittings used in making the connections shall be swabbed or
sprayed with a one percent hypochlorite solution before installation. Thorough flushing
shall be started as soon as the connection is completed and shall be continued until
discolored water is eliminated.
END OF SECTION
STANTEC - 06152020 (FINAL) PROJECT CLOSEOUT
W-354 – TRIANGLE FLOW CONTROL VALVE PAGE 01 77 00-1
SECTION 01 77 00 - PROJECT CLOSEOUT
PART 1 - GENERAL
1.1 FINAL CLEANUP
A. The CONTRACTOR shall promptly remove from the vicinity of the completed WORK, all
rubbish, unused materials, concrete forms, construction equipment, and temporary
structures and facilities used during construction. Final acceptance of the WORK by the
OWNER will be withheld until the CONTRACTOR has satisfactorily performed the final
cleanup of the Site.
1.2 CLOSEOUT TIMETABLE
A. The CONTRACTOR shall establish dates for equipment testing, acceptance periods,
and on-site instructional periods (as required under the Contract). Such dates shall be
established not less than one week prior to beginning any of the foregoing items, to
allow the OWNER, the ENGINEER, and their authorized representatives sufficient time
to schedule attendance at such activities.
1.3 TECHNICAL MANUAL SUBMITTAL
A. The CONTRACTOR's attention is directed to the condition that one percent of the
Contract Price will be retained from any monies due the CONTRACTOR as progress
payments, if at the 75 percent construction completion point, the approved Technical
Manual complying with General Conditions Section 2.04 – Shop Drawings has not been
submitted. The aforementioned amount will be retained by the OWNER as the agreed,
estimated value of the approved Technical Manual. Any such retention of money for
failure to submit the approved Technical Manual on or before the 75 percent
construction completion point shall be in addition to the retention of any payments due to
the CONTRACTOR.
1.4 FINAL SUBMITTALS
A. The CONTRACTOR, prior to requesting final payment, shall obtain and submit the
following items to the ENGINEER for transmittal to the OWNER:
1. Written guarantees, where required.
2. Technical Manuals and instructions.
3. New permanent cylinders and key blanks for all locks.
4. Maintenance stock items; spare parts; special tools.
5. Completed record drawings.
6. Bonds for roofing, maintenance, etc., as required.
7. Certificates of inspection and acceptance by local governing agencies having
jurisdiction.
8. Releases from all parties who are entitled to claims against the subject project,
property, or improvement pursuant to the provisions of law.
STANTEC - 06152020 (FINAL) PROJECT CLOSEOUT
W-354 – TRIANGLE FLOW CONTROL VALVE PAGE 01 77 00-2
1.5 MAINTENANCE AND GUARANTEE
A. The CONTRACTOR shall comply with the maintenance and guarantee requirements
contained in Section 4 of the General Conditions.
B. Replacement of earth fill or backfill, where it has settled below the required finish
elevations, shall be considered as a part of such required repair work, and any repair or
resurfacing constructed by the CONTRACTOR which becomes necessary by reason of
such settlement shall likewise be considered as a part of such required repair work
unless the CONTRACTOR shall have obtained a statement in writing from the affected
private owner or public agency releasing the OWNER from further responsibility in
connection with such repair or resurfacing.
C. The CONTRACTOR shall make all repairs and replacements promptly upon receipt of
written order from the OWNER. If the CONTRACTOR fails to make such repairs or
replacements promptly, the OWNER reserves the right to do the WORK and the
CONTRACTOR and its surety shall be liable to the OWNER for the cost thereof.
1.6 BOND
A. The CONTRACTOR shall provide a bond to guarantee performance of the provisions
contained in Paragraph "Maintenance and Guarantee" above, and Section 6 of the
General Conditions.
PART 2 - PRODUCTS (NOT USED)
PART 3 - EXECUTION (NOT USED)
END OF SECTION
STANTEC - 06152020 (FINAL) OWNER STAFF TRAINING
W-354 – TRIANGLE FLOW CONTROL VALVE PAGE 01 79 00-1
SECTION 01 79 00 - OWNER STAFF TRAINING
PART 1 - GENERAL
1.1 THE SUMMARY
STANTEC - 06152020 (FINAL) OWNER STAFF TRAINING
W-354 – TRIANGLE FLOW CONTROL VALVE PAGE 01 79 00-2
6. Training on the instrumentation and control systems within the startup system,
conducted by the CONTRACTOR’S I&C System Supplier.
7. Training on the SCADA control system within the startup system.
STANTEC - 06152020 (FINAL) OWNER STAFF TRAINING
W-354 – TRIANGLE FLOW CONTROL VALVE PAGE 01 79 00-3
responsibility of the instructor to confirm in advance that the class room will be
appropriate for the types of audio-visual equipment to be employed.
2.3 LOCATION
STANTEC - 06152020 (FINAL) OWNER STAFF TRAINING
W-354 – TRIANGLE FLOW CONTROL VALVE PAGE 01 79 00-4
5. Corrective Maintenance
a. Identify possible problems.
b. Demonstrate how to perform repairs. Point out special problems.
c. Open up equipment and demonstrate O & M procedures, where practical.
6. Parts
a. Demonstrate the use of previously provided parts list and order parts.
b. Check over spare parts on hand. Make recommendations regarding additional
parts that should be available.
7. Local Representatives
a. Identify local vendors where to order parts: name, address, telephone.
b. Service problems:
1) Identify contacts local contacts.
2) Identify emergency contacts.
8. Operation and Maintenance Manuals
a. Review any other material submitted.
b. Update material, as required.
PART 3 - EXECUTION
3.1 GENERAL
STANTEC - 06152020 (FINAL) OWNER STAFF TRAINING
W-354 – TRIANGLE FLOW CONTROL VALVE PAGE 01 79 00-5
STANTEC - 06152020 (FINAL) OWNER STAFF TRAINING
W-354 – TRIANGLE FLOW CONTROL VALVE PAGE 01 79 00-6
3.4 DOCUMENTATION OF TRAINING
STANTEC - 06152020 (FINAL) OWNER STAFF TRAINING
W-354 – TRIANGLE FLOW CONTROL VALVE PAGE 01 79 00-7
f. Location of primary element.
g. Location of instrument readout.
h. Discuss purpose, basic operation, calibration, maintenance, troubleshooting,
repair, and information interpretation.
i. Discuss, demonstrate, and perform standard operating procedures and round
checks.
j. Discuss and perform the preventative maintenance activities.
k. Discuss and perform start-up and shutdown procedures.
l. Perform the required equipment exercise procedures.
m. Perform routine disassembly and assembly of equipment if applicable.
3. Classroom equipment training for the maintenance and repair personnel will include:
a. Safety procedures.
b. Theory of operation.
c. Description and function of equipment.
d. Start-up and shutdown procedures.
e. Normal and major repair procedures.
f. Equipment inspection and troubleshooting procedures including the use of
applicable test instruments and the "pass" and "no pass" test instrument
readings.
g. Routine and long-term calibration procedures.
h. Preventative maintenance such as lubrication; normal maintenance such as
belt, seal, and bearing replacement; and up to major repairs such as
replacement of major equipment part(s) with the use of special tools, bridge
cranes, welding jigs, etc.
i. Hands-on equipment training for maintenance and repair personnel shall
include:
1) Locate and identify equipment components.
2) Review the equipment function and theory of operation.
3) Review normal repair procedures.
4) Perform start-up and shutdown procedures.
5) Review and perform the safety procedures.
STANTEC - 06152020 (FINAL) OWNER STAFF TRAINING
W-354 – TRIANGLE FLOW CONTROL VALVE PAGE 01 79 00-8
6) Perform OWNER-approved practice maintenance and repair job(s),
including mechanical and electrical adjustments and calibration and
troubleshooting equipment problems.
END OF SECTION
STANTEC - 06152020 (FINAL) DEMOLITION
W-354 - TRIANGLE FLOW CONTROL VALVE PAGE 02 41 19 - 1
SECTION 02 41 19 - DEMOLITION
PART 1 -- GENERAL
1.1 THE SUMMARY
A. The CONTRACTOR shall demolish and reconstruct existing civil, landscaping,
structural, architectural, mechanical, HVAC, electrical, and instrumentation facilities as
indicated, in accordance with the Contract Documents.
1.2 COORDINATION
A. The CONTRACTOR shall carefully coordinate the WORK in areas where existing
facilities are interconnected with new facilities and where existing facilities remain
operational. The WORK as indicated is not all-inclusive, and the CONTRACTOR shall
be responsible to perform the reconstruction indicated plus that which can be reasonably
inferred from the Contract Documents as necessary to complete the Project. The
Specifications and Drawings identify the major facilities that shall be demolished and
reconstructed, but auxiliary utilities such as water, air, chemicals, drainage, lubrication,
fluid power, electrical wiring, controls, and instrumentation are not necessarily shown.
B. The CONTRACTOR shall note that the Drawings used to indicate demolition and
reconstruction are based on record drawings of the existing facilities. These record
drawings have been reproduced to show existing conditions and to clarify the scope of
WORK as much as possible. Prior to Bidding, the CONTRACTOR shall conduct a
comprehensive survey at the Site to verify the correctness and exactness of the
Drawings, the scope of WORK, and the extent of auxiliary utilities.
C. While demolition and reconstruction are being performed, the CONTRACTOR shall
provide adequate access for the continued operation and maintenance of equipment and
treatment processes. The CONTRACTOR shall erect and maintain fences, warning
signs, barricades, and other devices around the reconstruction as required for the
protection of the CONTRACTOR's employees and the OWNER's personnel at the plant.
The CONTRACTOR shall remove such protection when reconstruction activities are
complete, or as WORK progresses, or when requested by the ENGINEER.
1.3 CONTRACTOR SUBMITTALS
A. Demolition and reconstruction activities and procedures, including operational
sequences, shall be submitted to the ENGINEER for approval. The procedures shall
provide for safe conduct of the WORK, careful removal and disposition of materials and
equipment, protection of existing facilities which are to remain undisturbed, coordination
with existing facilities to remain in service, and timely disconnection and reconnection of
utility services. The procedures shall include a detailed description and time schedule of
the methods and equipment to be used for each operation and the sequence of
operation. A storage plan for salvaged items shall be included.
1.4 DEMOLITION
A. Existing pavement, structures, equipment, piping, valves, ductwork, electrical gear,
instrumentation, utilities, and related appurtenances such as anchors, supports, and
hardware indicated or required to be demolished as part of the WORK shall be removed
and disposed of unless otherwise indicated. Removal of buried structures, utilities, and
STANTEC - 06152020 (FINAL) DEMOLITION
W-354 - TRIANGLE FLOW CONTROL VALVE PAGE 02 41 19 - 2
appurtenances includes the related excavation and backfill as required. Removed items
shall be disposed of offsite by the CONTRACTOR.
1.5 DISPOSAL
A. The CONTRACTOR shall be responsible for the offsite disposal of debris resulting from
reconstruction in compliance with local, state, and federal codes and requirements.
PART 2 -- PRODUCTS (NOT USED)
PART 3 -- EXECUTION
3.1 GENERAL
A. The CONTRACTOR shall coordinate demolition and reconstruction WORK with the
OWNER and ENGINEER. Unless otherwise indicated, the CONTRACTOR shall be
responsible for the sequence of activities. WORK shall be performed in accordance with
applicable safety rules and regulations.
B. The CONTRACTOR shall verify that any utilities connected to structures, equipment,
and facilities to be removed, relocated, salvaged, replaced, or abandoned are rendered
inoperable, replaced with new utilities, or adequately bypassed with temporary utilities
before proceeding with demolition and reconstruction.
C. The CONTRACTOR shall take precautions to avoid damage to adjacent facilities and to
limit the WORK activities to the extent indicated. If reconstruction beyond the scope
indicated is required, the CONTRACTOR shall obtain approval from the ENGINEER
prior to commencing.
3.2 PROTECTION OF EXISTING FACILITIES
A. Before beginning any reconstruction, the CONTRACTOR shall carefully survey the
existing facilities and examine the Specifications and Drawings to determine the extent
of reconstruction and coordination with the WORK. Existing facilities not subject to
reconstruction shall be protected and maintained in accordance with Section 01 50 10 -
Protection of Existing Facilities. Damaged existing facilities shall be repaired to the
previous condition or replaced.
B. Persons shall be afforded safe passages around areas of demolition.
C. Structural elements shall not be overloaded. The CONTRACTOR shall be responsible
for shoring, bracing, or adding new supports as may be required for adequate structural
support as a result of WORK performed under this Section. The CONTRACTOR shall
remove temporary protection when the WORK is complete or when so authorized by the
ENGINEER.
D. The CONTRACTOR shall carefully consider bearing loads and capacities before
placement of equipment and material on Site. In the event of any questions as to
whether an area to be loaded has adequate bearing capacity, the CONTRACTOR shall
consult with the ENGINEER prior to the placement of such equipment or material.
3.3 DEMOLITION
STANTEC - 06152020 (FINAL) DEMOLITION
W-354 - TRIANGLE FLOW CONTROL VALVE PAGE 02 41 19 - 3
A. The Contract Documents indicate existing facilities to be demolished. The
CONTRACTOR shall verify the scope of the WORK to remove the equipment indicated;
coordinate its shutdown, removal, replacement, or relocation; and submit an outage
plan. The removal of existing facilities for demolition shall include the following
requirements:
1. Equipment supports, including concrete pads, baseplates, mounting bolts, and
support hangers, shall be removed. Damage to the existing structure shall be
repaired as indicated.
2. Exposed piping including vents, drains, and valves shall be removed. Where
exposed piping penetrates existing floors and walls, the piping, including wall
thimbles, shall be removed to a minimum depth of 2-inches. Resultant openings in
the structure shall be repaired as indicated.
3. The area shall be thoroughly cleaned such that little or no evidence of the previous
equipment installation will remain.
4. When existing pipe is removed, the CONTRACTOR shall plug the resulting open
ends whether or not so indicated. Where removed piping is exposed, the remaining
piping shall be blind-flanged or fitted with a removable cap or plug.
5. When existing piping is removed from existing structures, the CONTRACTOR shall
fill resulting openings in the structures and repair any damage such that the finished
rehabilitated structure shall appear as a new homogeneous unit with little or no
indication of where the new and old materials join. The openings in water-bearing
structures shall be filled with non-shrink grout to be watertight and reinforced as
required or indicated. In locations where the surface of the grout will be exposed to
view, the grout shall be recessed approximately 1/2-inch and the recessed area
filled with cement mortar grout.
B. The CONTRACTOR shall perform a functional test of existing equipment that is
relocated and reinstalled to ensure the equipment functions in the manner documented
during the initial inspection. The CONTRACTOR shall inform the ENGINEER in writing
a minimum of 5 Days prior to the functional testing in order for the OWNER and
ENGINEER to witness the test. If, in the opinion of the ENGINEER, the relocated
equipment does not function in a satisfactory manner, the CONTRACTOR shall make
repairs and modifications necessary to restore the equipment to its original operating
condition at no additional cost to the OWNER.
3.4 OCCUPANCY AND POLLUTION CONTROL
A. Water sprinkling, temporary enclosures, chutes, and other suitable methods shall be
used to limit dust and dirt rising and scattering in the area. The CONTRACTOR shall
comply with government regulations pertaining to environmental protection.
B. Water shall not be used if it creates hazardous or objectionable conditions such as ice,
flooding or pollution.
STANTEC - 06152020 (FINAL) DEMOLITION
W-354 - TRIANGLE FLOW CONTROL VALVE PAGE 02 41 19 - 4
3.5 CLEANING
A. During and upon completion of WORK, the CONTRACTOR shall promptly remove tools
and equipment, surplus materials, rubbish, debris, and dust and shall leave areas
affected by WORK in a clean, approved condition.
B. Adjacent structures shall be cleaned of dust, dirt, and debris caused by reconstruction,
as requested by the ENGINEER or directed by governing authorities, and adjacent areas
shall be returned to condition existing prior to start of WORK.
C. The CONTRACTOR shall clean and sweep the street and road daily.
END OF SECTION
STANTEC – 06152020 (FINAL) CAST-IN-PLACE CONCRETE
W-354 – TRIANGLE FLOW CONTROL VALVE PAGE 03 31 50 - 1
SECTION 03 31 50 - CAST-IN-PLACE CONCRETE
PART 1 -- GENERAL
1.1 THE SUMMARY
A. The CONTRACTOR shall provide cast-in-place concrete, joints in concrete,
reinforcement steel and appurtenant work, formwork, bracing, shoring, supports, and
shall design and construct falsework, complete and in place, in accordance with the
Contract Documents.
1.2 CONTRACTOR SUBMITTALS
A. Furnish submittals in accordance with General Conditions Section 2.04 – Shop
Drawings.
B. Shop Drawings
1. Detailed drawings of the falsework proposed to be used. Such drawings shall be in
sufficient detail to indicate the general layout, sizes of members, anticipated
stresses, grade of materials to be used in the falsework, and typical soil conditions.
2. Shop bending diagrams, placing lists, and drawings of reinforcing steel prior to
fabrication.
3. Details of the concrete reinforcing steel and concrete inserts shall be submitted at
the earliest possible date after receipt by the CONTRACTOR of the Notice to
Proceed. Details of reinforcing steel for fabrication and erection shall conform to
ACI 315R – Guide to Presenting Reinforcing Steel Design Details and the
requirements herein. The shop bending diagrams shall show the actual lengths of
bars, to the nearest inch measured to the intersection of the extensions (tangents
for bars of circular cross section) of the outside surface. Include bar placement
diagrams which clearly indicate the dimensions of each bar splice.
4. Where mechanical couplers are required or permitted to be used to splice
reinforcing steel, submit manufacturer's literature which contains instructions and
recommendations for installation for each type of coupler used; certified test reports
which verify the load capacity of each type and size of coupler used; and Shop
Drawings that show the location of each coupler with details of how they are to be
installed in the formwork.
5. If reinforcement steel is spliced by welding at any location, submit mill test reports
that contain the information necessary for the determination of the carbon equivalent
per AWS D1.4 Structural Welding Code – Reinforcing Steel. The CONTRACTOR
shall submit a written welding procedure for each type of weld for each size of bar
which is to be spliced by welding; merely a statement that AWS procedures will be
followed is not acceptable. The CONTRACTOR shall submit certifications of
procedure qualifications for each welding procedure used and welder qualifications,
for each welding procedure, and for each welder performing the WORK. Such
qualifications shall be as specified in AWS D1.4.
6. Manufacturer's information demonstrating compliance with requirements of the
following:
STANTEC – 06152020 (FINAL) CAST-IN-PLACE CONCRETE
W-354 – TRIANGLE FLOW CONTROL VALVE PAGE 03 31 50 - 2
a. Bearing pads
b. Neoprene sponge
c. Preformed joint filler
d. Backing rod
e. Bond breaker
f. Slip dowels
g. PVC tubing
h. Form ties and related accessories
i. Form gaskets
j. Form release agent
k. List of form materials and locations of use
l. Mill tests for cement
m. Admixture certification. Chloride ion content shall be included.
n. Aggregate gradation test results and certification
o. Materials and methods for curing
7. Placement drawings showing the location and type of joints for each structure.
C. Mix Designs: Prior to beginning the WORK, submit preliminary concrete mix designs
which shall show the proportions and gradations of materials proposed for each class
and type of concrete. The mix designs shall be checked by an independent testing
laboratory acceptable to the ENGINEER. Costs related to such checking shall be the
CONTRACTOR's responsibility. When a water reducing admixture is to be used, the
CONTRACTOR shall furnish mix designs for concrete both with and without the
admixture.
D. Delivery Tickets: Where ready-mix concrete is used, the CONTRACTOR shall furnish
certified delivery tickets at the time of delivery of each load of concrete. Each ticket shall
show the state certified equipment used for measuring, and the total quantities, by weight,
of cement, sand, each class of aggregate, admixtures, the amounts of water in the
aggregate, added at the batching plant, and the amount allowed to be added at the Site for
the specific design mix. In addition, each certificate shall state the mix number, total yield
in cubic yards, and the time of day to the nearest minute, corresponding to the time when
the batch was dispatched, when it left the plant, when it arrived at the Site, when
unloading began, and when unloading was finished.
STANTEC – 06152020 (FINAL) CAST-IN-PLACE CONCRETE
W-354 – TRIANGLE FLOW CONTROL VALVE PAGE 03 31 50 - 3
1.3 QUALITY ASSURANCE
A. Testing of Reinforcing Steel
1. If requested by the ENGINEER, the CONTRACTOR shall furnish samples from
each heat of reinforcing steel in a quantity adequate for testing. Costs of initial tests
will be paid by the OWNER. Costs of additional tests, if material fails initial tests,
shall be the CONTRACTOR's responsibility.
2. If requested by the ENGINEER, the CONTRACTOR shall furnish samples of each
type of welded splice used in the WORK in a quantity and of dimensions adequate for
testing. At the discretion of the ENGINEER, radiographic testing of direct butt welded
splices will be performed. The CONTRACTOR shall provide assistance necessary to
facilitate testing. The CONTRACTOR shall repair any weld that fails to meet the
requirements of AWS D1.4. The costs of testing will be paid by the OWNER; but the
costs of tests that fail to meet requirements shall be the CONTRACTOR's
responsibility.
B. Testing of Materials
1. Tests on component materials and for compressive strength of concrete will be
performed as indicated herein. Tests for determining slump will be in accordance
with the requirements of ASTM C 143 - Standard Test Method for Slump of Hydraulic
Cement Concrete.
2. Testing for aggregate shall include sand equivalence, reactivity, organic impurities,
abrasion resistance, and soundness in accordance with ASTM C 33 - Concrete
Aggregates.
3. The cost of laboratory tests on cement, aggregates, and concrete, will be paid by
the OWNER. However, the CONTRACTOR shall pay the cost of any additional
tests and investigations on WORK that does not meet the Specifications. The
laboratory will meet or exceed the requirements of ASTM C 1077 - Standard
Practice for Laboratories Testing Concrete and Concrete Aggregates for Use in
Construction and Criteria for Laboratory Evaluation.
4. Concrete for testing shall be furnished by the CONTRACTOR at no cost to the
OWNER, and the CONTRACTOR shall assist the ENGINEER in obtaining samples
and disposal and cleanup of excess material.
C. Field Compression Tests
1. Compression test specimens shall be taken during construction from the first
placement of each class of concrete herein and at intervals thereafter as selected by
the ENGINEER to insure continued compliance with these Specifications. Each set
of test specimens will be a minimum of 4 cylinders.
2. Compression test specimens for concrete will be made in accordance with Section
9.2 of ASTM C 31 - Standard Practice for Making and Curing Concrete Test
Specimens in the Field. Specimens will be 6-inches diameter by 12-inches high
cylinders.
3. Compression tests will be performed in accordance with ASTM C 39 - Standard
Test Method for Compressive Strength of Cylindrical Concrete Specimens. One
STANTEC – 06152020 (FINAL) CAST-IN-PLACE CONCRETE
W-354 – TRIANGLE FLOW CONTROL VALVE PAGE 03 31 50 - 4
test cylinder will be tested at 7 Days and 2 at 28 Days. The remaining cylinder will
be held to verify test results, if needed.
D. Evaluation and Acceptance of Concrete
1. Evaluation and acceptance of the compressive strength of concrete will be
according to the requirements of ACI 318 - Building Code Requirements for
Structural Concrete, ACI 301 – Specifications for Structural Concrete, and as
indicated herein.
2. If any concrete fails to meet these requirements, immediate corrective action shall
be taken to increase the compressive strength for subsequent batches of the type of
concrete affected.
3. Concrete that fails to meet the ACI requirements and these Specifications is subject
to removal and replacement as part of the WORK.
E. Construction Tolerances: The CONTRACTOR shall set and maintain concrete forms
and perform finishing operations so that the concrete is within the tolerances herein.
Surface defects and irregularities are defined as finishes and are to be distinguished
from tolerances. Tolerance is the permissible variation from lines, grades, or dimensions
indicated. Where tolerances are not indicated, permissible deviations will be in
accordance with ACI 117 - Standard Tolerance for Concrete Construction and Materials.
1. The variation from required lines or grades shall not exceed 1/4-inch in 10-feet and
there shall be no offsets or visible waviness in the finished surface.
PART 2 -- PRODUCTS
2.1 FORM AND FALSEWORK MATERIALS
A. Except as otherwise expressly accepted by the ENGINEER, lumber for use as forms,
shoring, or bracing shall be new material.
B. Materials for concrete forms, formwork, and falsework shall conform to the following
requirements:
1. Lumber shall be Douglas Fir or Southern Yellow Pine, construction grade or better,
in conformance with U.S. Product Standard PS 20 - American Softwood Lumber
Standard.
2. Plywood for concrete formwork shall be new, waterproof, synthetic resin bonded,
exterior type Douglas Fir or Southern Yellow Pine plywood manufactured especially
for concrete formwork and shall conform to the requirements of PS 1 - Construction
and Industrial Plywood for Concrete Forms, Class I, and shall be edge sealed.
3. Form materials shall be metal, wood, plywood, or other material that will not
adversely affect the concrete and will facilitate placement of concrete to the shape,
form, line, and grade required. Metal forms shall be an approved type that will
accomplish such results. Wood forms for surfaces to be painted shall be Medium
Density Overlaid plywood, MDO Ext. Grade.
STANTEC – 06152020 (FINAL) CAST-IN-PLACE CONCRETE
W-354 – TRIANGLE FLOW CONTROL VALVE PAGE 03 31 50 - 5
C. Unless otherwise indicated, exterior corners in concrete members shall be provided with
3/4-inch chamfers or be tooled to a 1/2-inch radius. Re-entrant corners in concrete
members shall not have fillets unless otherwise indicated.
D. Forms and falsework to support the roof and floor slabs shall be designed for the total
dead load, plus a live load of 50 psf (minimum). The minimum design load for combined
dead and live loads shall be 100 psf.
2.2 FORM TIES
A. Form ties shall be provided with a plastic cone or other suitable means for forming a
conical hole to insure that the form tie may be broken off back of the face of the
concrete. The maximum diameter of removable cones for rod ties or other removable
form-tie fasteners having a circular cross-section shall not exceed 1-1/2 inches; and
such fasteners shall be such as to leave holes of regular shape for reaming. Form ties
shall be Wrench Head Snap Ties by MeadowBurke, Snap Ties by Dayton/Richmond,
or equal.
B. Removable taper ties may be used when approved by the ENGINEER. Taper ties shall
be Taper Ties by MeadowBurke, Taper Ties by Dayton/Richmond, or equal.
2.3 REINFORCEMENT STEEL
A. General: Reinforcement steel for cast-in-place reinforced concrete construction shall
conform to the following requirements:
1. Bar reinforcement shall conform to the requirements of ASTM A 615 - Deformed and
Plain Billet-Steel Bars for Concrete Reinforcement, for Grade 60 Billet Steel
Reinforcement, unless otherwise indicated.
2. Welded wire fabric reinforcement shall conform to the requirements of ASTM A 185
- Steel Welded Wire Fabric, Plain, for Concrete Reinforcement, and the details
indicated. Welded wire fabric with longitudinal wire of W4 size wire and smaller
shall be either furnished in flat sheets or in rolls with a core diameter of not less than
10-inches. Welded wire fabric with longitudinal wires larger than W4 size shall be
furnished in flat sheets only.
3. Spiral reinforcement shall be cold-drawn steel wire conforming to the requirements
of ASTM A 82 - Steel Wire, Plain, for Concrete Reinforcement.
B. Accessories
1. Accessories shall include necessary chairs, slab bolsters, concrete blocks, tie wires,
dips, supports, spacers, and other devices to position reinforcement during concrete
placement. Bar supports shall meet the requirements of the CRSI Manual of
Standard Practice including special requirements for supporting epoxy coated
reinforcing bars. Wire bar supports shall be CRSI Class 1 for maximum protection
with a 1/8-inch minimum thickness of plastic coating which extends at least 1/2-inch
from the concrete surface. Plastic shall be gray in color.
2. Concrete blocks (dobies) used to support and position reinforcement steel shall
have the same or higher compressive strength than required for the concrete in
which they are located. Where concrete blocks are used on concrete surfaces
exposed to view, the color and texture of the concrete blocks shall match that
STANTEC – 06152020 (FINAL) CAST-IN-PLACE CONCRETE
W-354 – TRIANGLE FLOW CONTROL VALVE PAGE 03 31 50 - 6
required for the finished surface. Wire ties shall be embedded in concrete block bar
supports.
C. Epoxy coating for reinforcing and accessories, where indicated, shall conform to ASTM
A 775 - Epoxy Coated Reinforcing Steel Bars.
2.4 CONCRETE MATERIALS
A. Materials shall be delivered, stored, and handled so as to prevent damage by water or
breakage. Only one brand of cement shall be used. Cement reclaimed from cleaning
bags or leaking containers shall not be used. Cement shall be used in the sequence of
receipt of shipments.
B. Materials for the WORK shall comply with the requirements of ACI 301, as applicable.
C. Storage of materials shall conform to the requirements of ACI 301.
D. Materials for concrete shall conform to the following requirements:
1. Cement shall be standard brand portland cement conforming to ASTM C 150 -
Portland Cement for Type II or Type V.
2. Water shall be potable, clean, and free from objectionable quantities of silty organic
matter, alkali, salts, and other impurities. The water shall be considered potable, for
the purposes of this Section only, if it meets the requirements of the local
governmental agencies. Agricultural water with high total dissolved solids (over
1000 mg/l TDS) shall not be used.
3. Aggregates shall be obtained from pits acceptable to the ENGINEER, shall be non-
reactive, and shall conform to ASTM C 33. Maximum size of coarse aggregate shall
be as indicated. Lightweight sand for fine aggregate will not be permitted.
4. Ready-mix concrete shall conform to the requirements of ASTM C 94 - Ready-Mixed
Concrete.
5. Air-entraining agent meeting the requirements of ASTM C 260 – Air Entraining
Admixtures for Concrete shall be used. Concrete floors to receive a dry-shake floor
hardener shall have an air content not to exceed 3 percent. The OWNER reserves
the right, at any time, to sample and test the air-entraining agent. The air-entraining
agent shall be added to the batch in a portion of the mixing water. The solution shall
be batched by means of a mechanical batcher capable of accurate measurement.
Air content shall be tested at the point of placement. Air entraining agent shall be
Micro-Air by Master Builders, Daravair by W.R. Grace, Sika AEA-15 by Sika
Corporation, or equal.
6. Admixtures: Admixtures may be added at the CONTRACTOR's option to control
the set, affect water reduction, and increase workability. In either case, the addition
of an admixture shall be at the CONTRACTOR's expense. The use of an admixture
shall be subject to acceptance by the ENGINEER. Concrete containing an
admixture shall be first placed at a location determined by the ENGINEER. If the
use of an admixture is producing an inferior end result, the CONTRACTOR shall
discontinue use of the admixture. Admixtures shall conform to the requirements of
ASTM C 494 - Chemical Admixtures for Concrete. The required quantity of cement
shall be used in the mix regardless of whether or not an admixture is used.
STANTEC – 06152020 (FINAL) CAST-IN-PLACE CONCRETE
W-354 – TRIANGLE FLOW CONTROL VALVE PAGE 03 31 50 - 7
Admixtures shall contain no free chloride ions, shall be non-toxic after 30 Days, and
shall be compatible with and made by the same manufacturer as the air entraining
admixture.
a. Concrete shall not contain more than one water-reducing admixture. Concrete
containing an admixture shall be first placed at a location determined by the
ENGINEER.
b. Set controlling admixture may be either with or without water-reducing
properties. Where the air temperature at the time of placement is expected to
be consistently over 80 degrees F, a set retarding admixture such as
Plastocrete 161 MR by Sika Corporation, Pozzolith 300R by BASF,
Daratard by Grace Construction Products, or equal shall be used. Where
the air temperature at the time of placement is expected to be consistently
under 40 degrees, a set accelerating admixture such as Plastocrete 161FL by
Sika Corporation, MasterSet FP 20 by BASF, Polarset by Grace
Construction Products, or equal shall be used.
c. Normal range water reducer shall conform to ASTM C 494, Type A. It shall be
WRDA 79 by Grace Construction Products, Pozzolith 322-N by BASF,
Plastocrete 161 by Sika Corporation, or equal. The quantity of admixture
used and the method of mixing shall be in accordance with the manufacturer's
instructions and recommendations.
7. Calcium Chloride: Calcium chloride will not be permitted in concrete.
2.5 CURING MATERIALS
A. Materials for curing concrete shall conform to the following requirements and ASTM C
309 - Liquid Membrane-Forming Compounds for Curing Concrete:
1. Curing compounds shall be white-pigmented and resin-based. Sodium silicate
compounds shall not be allowed. Concrete curing compound shall be Kurez VOX
White Pigmented by Euclid Chemical Company, Cure R-2 by L&M Construction
Chemicals, 1200-White by W.R. Meadows, or equal. When curing compound
must be removed for finishes or grouting, curing compounds shall be Kurez DR
VOX by Euclid Chemical Company, Masterkure-100W by ChemRex MBT, L&M
Cure R by L&M Construction Chemicals, 1100-Clear by WR Meadows, or equal.
Curing compounds shall meet local VOC requirements.
2. Polyethylene sheet for use as concrete curing blanket shall be white and shall have
a nominal thickness of 6-mils. The loss of moisture when determined in accordance
with the requirements of ASTM C 156 - Standard Test Method for Water Retention
by Concrete Curing Materials, shall not exceed 0.055 grams per square centimeter
of surface.
3. Evaporation retardant shall be a material such as MasterKure ER 50 by
BASF/Master Builders, Eucobar by Euclid Chemical Company, E-CON by L&M
Construction Chemicals, Inc., or equal.
STANTEC – 06152020 (FINAL) CAST-IN-PLACE CONCRETE
W-354 – TRIANGLE FLOW CONTROL VALVE PAGE 03 31 50 - 8
2.6 MISCELLANEOUS MATERIALS
A. Dampproofing agent shall be an asphalt emulsion such as Hydrocide 600 by ChemRex
Sonneborn, Emulsified Asphalt by Euclid Chemical Company, Sealmastic by W. R.
Meadows Inc., or equal.
B. Epoxy adhesives shall be the following products:
1. For bonding freshly-mixed, plastic concrete to hardened concrete, Sikadur 32 Hi-
Mod Epoxy Adhesive by Sika Corporation, MasterEmaco ADH 326 by
BASF/Master Builders; BurkEpoxy MV by Burke by Edoco, or equal.
2. For bonding hardened concrete or masonry to steel, Sikadur 31 Hi-Mod Gel by
Sika Corporation, BurkEpoxy NS by Burke by Edoco, Concresive Paste (LPL)
by Chem Rex MBT; or equal.
2.7 CONCRETE DESIGN REQUIREMENTS
A. General
1. Concrete shall be composed of cement, admixtures, aggregates, and water of the
qualities indicated. In general, the mix shall be designed to produce a concrete
capable of being deposited so as to obtain maximum density and minimum
shrinkage, and where deposited in forms, to have good consolidation properties and
maximum smoothness of surface. The proportions shall be changed whenever
necessary or desirable to meet the required results at no additional cost to the
OWNER. Mix changes shall be subject to review by the ENGINEER.
2. The CONTRACTOR is cautioned that the limiting parameters below are NOT a mix
design. Admixtures may be required to achieve workability required by the
CONTRACTOR's construction methods and aggregates. The CONTRACTOR is
responsible for providing concrete with the required workability.
B. Water-Cement Ratio and Compressive Strength: The minimum compressive strength
and cement content of concrete shall be not less than the following tabulation.
Type of Work Class of
Concrete Min
28-Day
Compressive
Strength, psi
Max Size
Aggregate
in
Cement
Content
Per cu yd,
lbs
Max W/C
Ratio (by
weight)
Structural
concrete
4,000 1 564 to 600 0.45
Sitework
concrete
3,000 1 470 (min) 0.50
Lean concrete 2,000 1 376 (min) 0.60
STANTEC – 06152020 (FINAL) CAST-IN-PLACE CONCRETE
W-354 – TRIANGLE FLOW CONTROL VALVE PAGE 03 31 50 - 9
2.8 CONSISTENCY
A. Consistency of the concrete in successive batches shall be determined by slump tests in
accordance with ASTM C 143. The slumps shall be as follows:
Part of Work Slump (in
All concrete unless indicated otherwise 3-inches plus or minus 1-inch
Ductbank and pipe encasement 5-inches plus or minus 1-inch
2.9 MEASUREMENT OF CEMENT AND AGGREGATE
A. The amount of cement and of each separate size of aggregate entering into each batch
of concrete shall be determined by direct weighing equipment furnished by the
CONTRACTOR and acceptable to the ENGINEER; provided that, where batches are so
proportioned as to contain an integral number of conventional sacks of cement and the
cement is delivered at the mixer in the original unbroken sacks, the weight of the cement
contained in each sack may be taken without weighing as 94 pounds.
2.10 MEASUREMENT OF WATER
A. The quantity of water entering the mixer shall be measured by a suitable water meter or
other measuring device of a type acceptable to the ENGINEER and capable of
measuring the water in variable amounts within a tolerance of one percent.
2.11 READY-MIXED CONCRETE
A. At the CONTRACTOR'S option, ready-mixed concrete may be used if it meets the
requirements as to materials, batching, mixing, transporting, placing, the supplementary
requirements as required herein, and is in accordance with ASTM C 94.
B. Ready-mixed concrete shall be delivered to the WORK, and discharge shall be
completed within one hour after the addition of the cement to the aggregates or before
the drum has been revolved 250 revolutions, whichever comes first. In hot weather,
under conditions contributing to quick stiffening of the concrete, or when the temperature
of the concrete is 85 degrees F or above, the time between the introduction of the
cement to the aggregates and discharge shall not exceed 45 minutes.
C. Truck mixers shall be equipped with electrically-actuated counters by which the number
of revolutions of the drum or blades may be readily verified. The counter shall be of the
resettable, recording type, and shall be mounted in the driver's cab. The counter shall
be actuated at the time of starting the mixer at mixing speed.
D. Each batch of concrete shall be mixed in a truck mixer for not less than 70 revolutions of
the drum or blades at the rate of rotation designated by the manufacturer of equipment.
Additional mixing, if any, shall be at the speed designated by the manufacturer of the
equipment as agitating speed. Materials including mixing water shall be in the mixer
drum before actuating the revolution counter for determining the number of revolutions of
mixing.
STANTEC – 06152020 (FINAL) CAST-IN-PLACE CONCRETE
W-354 – TRIANGLE FLOW CONTROL VALVE PAGE 03 31 50 - 10
E. Each batch of ready-mixed concrete delivered to the WORK shall be accompanied by a
delivery ticket furnished to the ENGINEER in accordance with the requirements above.
F. The use of non-agitating equipment for transporting ready-mixed concrete will not be
permitted. Combination truck and trailer equipment for transporting ready-mixed
concrete will not be permitted. The quality and quantity of materials used in ready-mixed
concrete and in batch aggregates shall be subject to continuous inspection at the
batching plant by the ENGINEER.
PART 3 -- EXECUTION
3.1 GENERAL FORMWORK REQUIREMENTS
A. Forms to confine the concrete and shape it to the required lines shall be used wherever
necessary. The CONTRACTOR shall assume full responsibility for the adequate design
of forms, and any forms that are unsafe or inadequate in any respect shall promptly be
removed from the WORK and replaced. A sufficient number of forms of each kind shall
be available to permit the required rate of progress to be maintained. The design and
inspection of concrete forms, falsework, and shoring shall comply with applicable local,
state and federal regulations. Design, construction, maintenance, preparation, and
removal of forms shall be in accordance with ACI 347R - Guide to Formwork for
Concrete and the requirements herein.
B. Forms shall be true in every respect to the required shape and size, shall conform to the
established alignment and grade, and shall be of sufficient strength and rigidity to
maintain their position and shape under the loads and operations incident to placing and
vibrating the concrete.
3.2 CONSTRUCTION
A. Vertical Surfaces: Vertical surfaces of concrete members shall be formed, except where
placement of the concrete against the ground is indicated. Not less than 1-inch of
concrete shall be added to the indicated thickness of a concrete member where concrete
is permitted to be placed against trimmed ground in lieu of forms. Permission to do this
on other concrete members will be granted only for members of comparatively limited
height and where the character of the ground is such that it can be trimmed to the
required lines and will stand securely without caving or sloughing until the concrete has
been placed.
B. Construction Joints: Concrete construction joints will not be permitted at locations other
than those indicated, except as may be acceptable to the ENGINEER. When a second
lift is placed on hardened concrete, special precautions shall be taken in the way of the
number, location, and tightening of ties at the top of the old lift and bottom of the new to
prevent any unsatisfactory affect whatsoever on the concrete. Pipe stubs and anchor
bolts shall be set in the forms where required.
C. Form Ties
1. Embedded Ties: Wire ties for holding forms will not be permitted. No form-tying
device or part thereof, other than metal, shall be left embedded in the concrete.
Ties shall not be removed in such manner as to leave a hole extending through the
interior of the concrete members. The use of snap-ties which cause spalling of the
concrete upon form stripping or tie removal will not be permitted. If steel panel
forms are used, rubber grommets shall be provided where the ties pass through the
STANTEC – 06152020 (FINAL) CAST-IN-PLACE CONCRETE
W-354 – TRIANGLE FLOW CONTROL VALVE PAGE 03 31 50 - 11
form in order to prevent loss of cement paste. Where metal rods extending through
the concrete are used to support or to strengthen forms, the rods shall remain
embedded and shall terminate not less than 1-inch back from the formed face or
faces of the concrete.
2. Removable Ties: Where taper ties are approved for use, after the taper tie is
removed, the hole shall be thoroughly cleaned and roughened for bond. A precast
neoprene or polyurethane tapered plug shall be located at the wall centerline. The
hole shall be completely filled with non-shrink or regular cement grout. Exposed
faces of walls shall have at least the outer 2-inches of the exposed face filled with a
cement grout which shall match the color and texture of the surrounding wall
surface.
3.3 REUSE OF FORMS
A. Forms may be reused only if in good condition and only if acceptable to the ENGINEER.
Light sanding between uses will be required wherever necessary to obtain uniform
surface texture on exposed concrete surfaces. Exposed concrete surfaces are defined
as surfaces which are permanently exposed to view.
3.4 REMOVAL OF FORMS
A. Careful procedures for the removal of forms shall be strictly followed, and this WORK
shall be done with care so as to avoid injury to the concrete. No heavy loading on green
concrete will be permitted. Members which must support their own weight shall not have
their forms removed until they have attained at least 75 percent of the 28-Day strength of
the concrete. Forms for vertical walls and columns shall remain in place at least 48
hours after the concrete has been placed. Forms for parts of the WORK not specifically
mentioned herein shall remain in place for periods of time as recommended in ACI 347.
3.5 GENERAL REINFORCEMENT REQUIREMENTS
A. Reinforcement steel, welded wire fabric, couplers, and other appurtenances shall be
fabricated, and placed in accordance with the requirements of the Building Code and the
supplementary requirements indicated herein.
3.6 FABRICATION
A. General
1. Reinforcement steel shall be accurately formed to the dimensions and shapes
indicated, and the fabricating details shall be prepared in accordance with ACI 315R
and ACI 318, except as modified by the Drawings.
2. The CONTRACTOR shall fabricate reinforcement bars for structures in accordance
with bending diagrams, placing lists, and placing drawings. Said drawings,
diagrams, and lists shall be prepared by the CONTRACTOR.
3. Unless otherwise indicated, dowels shall match the size and spacing of the spliced
bar.
B. Bending or Straightening: Reinforcement shall not be straightened or rebent in a
manner that will injure the material. Bars shall be bent or straight as indicated. Do not
use bends different from the bends indicated. Bars shall be bent cold unless otherwise
STANTEC – 06152020 (FINAL) CAST-IN-PLACE CONCRETE
W-354 – TRIANGLE FLOW CONTROL VALVE PAGE 03 31 50 - 12
permitted by the ENGINEER. No bars partially embedded in concrete shall be field-bent
except as indicated or specifically permitted by the ENGINEER.
3.7 PLACING
A. Reinforcement steel shall be accurately positioned as indicated and shall be supported
and wired together to prevent displacement, using annealed iron wire ties or suitable
clips at intersections. Reinforcement steel shall be supported by concrete, plastic or
metal supports, spacers or metal hangers that are strong and rigid enough to prevent
any displacement of the reinforcement steel. Where concrete is to be placed on the
ground, supporting concrete blocks (or dobies) shall be used in sufficient numbers to
support the bars without settlement, but in no case shall such support be continuous.
Concrete blocks used to support reinforcement steel shall be tied to the steel with wire
ties which are embedded in the blocks. For concrete over formwork, the
CONTRACTOR shall provide concrete, metal, plastic, or other acceptable bar chairs and
spacers.
B. The portions of accessories in contact with the formwork shall be made of concrete,
plastic, or steel coated with a 1/8-inch minimum thickness of plastic which extends at
least 1/2-inch from the concrete surface. Plastic shall be gray in color.
C. Tie wires shall be bent away from the forms in order to provide the required concrete
coverage.
D. Bars additional to those indicated which may be found necessary or desirable by the
CONTRACTOR for the purpose of securing reinforcement in position shall be provided
by the CONTRACTOR as part of the WORK.
E. Unless otherwise indicated, reinforcement placing tolerances shall be within the limits
specified in ACI 318 except where in conflict with the requirements of the Building Code.
F. The minimum spacing requirements of ACI 318 shall be followed for reinforcing steel.
G. Welded wire fabric reinforcement placed over horizontal forms shall be supported on
slab bolsters having gray, plastic-coated standard type legs. Slab bolsters shall be
spaced not more than 30-inches on centers, shall extend continuously across the entire
width of the reinforcing mat, and shall support the reinforcing mat in the plane indicated.
H. Welded wire fabric placed over the ground shall be supported on wired concrete blocks
(dobies) spaced not more than 3-feet on centers in any direction. The construction
practice of placing welded wire fabric on the ground and hooking into place in the freshly
placed concrete shall not be used.
3.8 SPLICING
A. General: Reinforcement bar splices shall only be used at locations indicated. When it is
necessary to splice reinforcement at points other than where indicated, the character of
the splice shall be reviewed and accepted by the ENGINEER.
B. Splices of Reinforcement
1. The length of lap for reinforcement bars, unless otherwise indicated, shall be in
accordance with ACI 318 for a Class B splice.
STANTEC – 06152020 (FINAL) CAST-IN-PLACE CONCRETE
W-354 – TRIANGLE FLOW CONTROL VALVE PAGE 03 31 50 - 13
2. Welded splices shall be performed in accordance with AWS D1.4.
3. Laps of welded wire fabric shall be in accordance with the ACI 318. Adjoining
sheets shall be securely tied together with No. 14 tie wire, one tie for each 2 running
feet. Wires shall be staggered and tied in such a manner that they cannot slip.
3.9 CLEANING AND PROTECTION
A. Reinforcement steel shall always be protected from conditions conductive to corrosion
until concrete is placed around it.
B. The surfaces of reinforcement steel and other metalwork to be in contact with concrete
shall be thoroughly cleaned of dirt, grease, loose scale and rust, grout, mortar, and other
foreign substances immediately before the concrete is placed. Where there is delay in
depositing concrete, reinforcing shall be reinspected and, if necessary recleaned.
3.10 PROPORTIONING AND MIXING
A. Proportioning: Proportioning of the concrete mix shall conform to the requirements of
ACI 301.
B. Mixing: Mixing of concrete shall conform to the requirements of ACI 301.
C. Slump: Slumps shall be as indicated herein.
D. Retempering: Retempering of concrete or mortar which has partially hardened shall not
be permitted.
3.11 PREPARATION OF SURFACES FOR CONCRETING
A. General: Earth surfaces shall be thoroughly wetted by sprinkling prior to the placing of
any concrete, and these surfaces shall be kept moist by frequent sprinkling up to the
time of placing concrete thereon. The surface shall be free from standing water, mud,
and debris at the time of placing concrete.
B. Joints in Concrete: Concrete surfaces upon or against which concrete is to be placed,
where the placement of the concrete has been stopped or interrupted so that, as
determined by the ENGINEER, the new concrete cannot be incorporated integrally with
that previously placed, are defined as construction joints. The surfaces of horizontal
joints shall be given a compacted, roughened surface for good bonding. Except where
the Drawings call for joint surfaces to be coated, the joint surfaces shall be cleaned of
laitance, loose or defective concrete, and foreign material, and be roughened to a
minimum 1/4-inch amplitude. Such cleaning and roughening shall be accomplished by
hydroblasting. Pools of water shall be removed from the surface of construction joints
before the new concrete is placed.
C. Placing Interruptions: When placing of concrete is to be interrupted long enough for the
concrete to take a set, the working face shall be given a shape by the use of forms or
other means, that will secure proper union with subsequent WORK; provided that
construction joints shall be made only where acceptable to the ENGINEER.
D. Embedded Items
STANTEC – 06152020 (FINAL) CAST-IN-PLACE CONCRETE
W-354 – TRIANGLE FLOW CONTROL VALVE PAGE 03 31 50 - 14
1. No concrete shall be placed until formwork, installation of parts to be embedded,
reinforcement steel, and preparation of surfaces involved in the placing have been
completed and accepted by the ENGINEER at least 4 hours before placement of
concrete. Surfaces of forms and embedded items that have become encrusted with
dried grout from previous usage shall be cleaned before the surrounding or adjacent
concrete is placed.
2. Reinforcement, anchor bolts, sleeves, inserts, and similar items shall be set and
secured in the forms at locations indicated or by Shop Drawings and shall be
acceptable to the ENGINEER before any concrete is placed. Accuracy of
placement is the responsibility of the CONTRACTOR.
E. Casting New Concrete Against Old: Where concrete is to be cast against old concrete
(defined as any concrete which is greater than 60 Days of age), the surface of the old
concrete shall be thoroughly cleaned and roughened by hydroblasting (exposing
aggregate) prior to the application of an epoxy bonding agent. Application shall be
according to the bonding agent manufacturer's instructions and recommendations.
F. No concrete shall be placed in any structure until water entering the space to be filled
with concrete has been properly cut off or has been diverted by pipes, or other means,
and carried out of the forms, clear of the WORK. No concrete shall be deposited
underwater nor shall the CONTRACTOR allow still water to rise on any concrete until the
concrete has attained its initial set. Water shall not be permitted to flow over the surface
of any concrete in such manner and at such velocity as will injure the surface finish of
the concrete. Pumping or other necessary dewatering operations for removing ground
water, if required, shall be subject to the review of the ENGINEER.
G. Corrosion Protection: Pipe, conduit, dowels, and other ferrous items required to be
embedded in concrete construction shall be so positioned and supported prior to
placement of concrete that there will be a minimum of 2-inches clearance between said
items and any part of the concrete reinforcement. Securing such items in position by
wiring or welding them to the reinforcement will not be permitted.
H. Openings for pipes, inserts for pipe hangers and brackets, and anchors shall, where
practicable, be provided for during the placing of concrete.
I. Anchor bolts shall be accurately set and shall be maintained in position by templates
while being embedded in concrete.
3.12 HANDLING, TRANSPORTING, AND PLACING
A. General: Placing of concrete shall conform to the applicable requirements of ACI 301
and the requirements of this Section. No aluminum materials shall be used in conveying
any concrete.
B. Non-Conforming WORK or Materials: Concrete which during or before placing is found
not to conform to the requirements indicated herein shall be rejected and immediately
removed from the WORK. Concrete which is not placed in accordance with these
Specifications or which is of inferior quality shall be removed and replaced.
C. Unauthorized Placement: No concrete shall be placed except in the presence of a duly
authorized representative of the ENGINEER. The CONTRACTOR shall notify the
ENGINEER in writing at least 24 hours in advance of placement of any concrete.
STANTEC – 06152020 (FINAL) CAST-IN-PLACE CONCRETE
W-354 – TRIANGLE FLOW CONTROL VALVE PAGE 03 31 50 - 15
D. Placement in Wall and Column Forms
1. Concrete shall not be dropped through reinforcement steel or into any deep form nor
shall concrete be placed in any form in such a manner as to leave accumulation of
mortar on the form surfaces above the placed concrete. In such cases, some
means such as the use of hoppers and, if necessary, vertical ducts of canvas,
rubber, or metal shall be used for placing concrete in the forms in a manner that it
may reach the place of final deposit without separation. In no case shall the free fall
of concrete exceed 4-feet in walls and 8-feet in columns below the ends of ducts,
chutes, or buggies. Concrete shall be uniformly distributed during the process of
depositing and in no case after depositing shall any portion be displaced in the
forms more than 6-feet in horizontal direction. Concrete in wall forms shall be
deposited in uniform horizontal layers not deeper than 2-feet; and care shall be
taken to avoid inclined layers or inclined construction joints except where such are
required for sloping members. Each layer shall be placed while the previous layer is
still soft. The rate of placing concrete in wall forms shall not exceed 5-feet of vertical
rise per hour. Sufficient illumination shall be provided in the interior of forms so that
the concrete at the places of deposit is visible from the deck or runway.
2. The surface of the concrete shall be level whenever a run of concrete is stopped.
To insure a level, straight joint on the exposed surface of walls, a wood strip at least
3/4-inch thick shall be tacked to the forms on these surfaces. The concrete shall be
carried about 1/2-inch above the underside of the strip. About one hour after the
concrete is placed, the strip shall be removed and any irregularities in the edge
formed by the strip shall be leveled with a trowel, and laitance shall be removed.
E. Conveyor Belts and Chutes: Ends of chutes, hopper gates, and other points of concrete
discharge throughout the CONTRACTOR'S conveying, hoisting, and placing system
shall be so designed and arranged that concrete passing from them will not fall
separated into whatever receptacle immediately receives it. Conveyor belts, if used,
shall be of a type acceptable to the ENGINEER. Chutes longer than 50-feet will not be
permitted. Minimum slopes of chutes shall be such that concrete of the required
consistency will readily flow in them. If a conveyor belt is used, it shall be wiped clean
by a device operated in such a manner that none of the mortar adhering to the belt will
be wasted. Conveyor belts and chutes shall be covered.
F. Temperature of Concrete: The temperature of concrete when it is being placed shall be
not more than 90 degrees F nor less than 40 degrees F in moderate weather, and not
less than 50 degrees F in weather during which the mean daily temperature drops below
40 degrees F. Concrete ingredients shall not be heated to a temperature higher than
that necessary to keep the temperature of the mixed concrete, as placed, from falling
below the required minimum temperature. If concrete is placed when the weather is
such that the temperature of the concrete would exceed 90 degrees F, the
CONTRACTOR shall employ effective means, such as precooling of aggregates and
mixing water, using ice, or placing at night, as necessary to maintain the temperature of
the concrete, as it is placed, below 90 degrees F. The CONTRACTOR shall be entitled
to no additional compensation on account of the foregoing requirements.
G. Cold Weather Placement
1. Placement of concrete shall conform to ACI - 306.1 - Cold Weather Concreting, and
the following.
STANTEC – 06152020 (FINAL) CAST-IN-PLACE CONCRETE
W-354 – TRIANGLE FLOW CONTROL VALVE PAGE 03 31 50 - 16
2. Earth foundations shall be free from frost or ice when concrete is placed upon or
against them.
3. Maintain the concrete temperature above 50 degrees F for at least 72-hours after
placement.
3.13 PUMPING OF CONCRETE
A. General: If the pumped concrete does not produce satisfactory end results, the
CONTRACTOR shall discontinue the pumping operation and proceed with the placing of
concrete using conventional methods.
B. Pumping Equipment
1. The pumping equipment shall have 2 cylinders and be designed to operate with one
cylinder only in case the other one is not functioning. In lieu of this requirement, the
CONTRACTOR may have a standby pump on the Site during pumping.
2. The minimum diameter of the hose conduits shall be in accordance with ACI 304.2R
- Placing Concrete by Pumping Methods.
3. Pumping equipment and hose conduits that are not functioning properly, shall be
replaced.
4. Aluminum conduits for conveying the concrete shall not be permitted.
3.14 TAMPING AND VIBRATING
A. As concrete is placed in the forms or in excavations, it shall be thoroughly settled and
compacted, throughout the entire depth of the layer which is being consolidated, into a
dense, homogeneous mass, filling all corners and angles, thoroughly embedding the
reinforcement, eliminating rock pockets, and bringing only a slight excess of water to the
exposed surface of concrete. Vibrators shall be high speed power vibrators (8000 to
12,000 rpm) of an immersion type in sufficient number and with at least one standby unit
as required.
B. Concrete in walls shall be internally vibrated and at the same time rammed, stirred, or
worked with suitable appliances, tamping bars, shovels, or forked tools until it completely
fills the forms or excavations and closes snugly against all surfaces. Subsequent layers
of concrete shall not be placed until the layers previously placed have been worked
thoroughly. Vibrators shall be provided in sufficient numbers, with standby units as
required, to accomplish the required results within 15 minutes after concrete of the
prescribed consistency is placed in the forms. The vibrating head shall not contact the
surfaces of the forms. Care shall be taken not to vibrate concrete excessively or to work
it in any manner that causes segregation of its constituents.
3.15 FINISHING CONCRETE SURFACES
A. General: Surfaces shall be free from fins, bulges, ridges, offsets, honeycombing, or
roughness of any kind, and shall present a finished, smooth, continuous hard surface.
Allowable deviations from plumb or level and from the alignment, profiles, and
dimensions indicated are defined as tolerances and are indicated above. These
tolerances are to be distinguished from irregularities in finish as described herein.
Aluminum finishing tools shall not be used.
STANTEC – 06152020 (FINAL) CAST-IN-PLACE CONCRETE
W-354 – TRIANGLE FLOW CONTROL VALVE PAGE 03 31 50 - 17
B. Formed Surfaces: No treatment is required after form removal except for curing, repair
of defective concrete, and treatment of surface defects.
C. Unformed Surfaces: After proper and adequate vibration and tamping, unformed top
surfaces of slabs, floors, walls, and curbs shall be brought to a uniform surface with
suitable tools. Whenever the air temperature exceeds 85 degrees F or the wind speed
exceeds 25 mph at the time of placement, the concrete shall be treated as follows.
Immediately after the concrete has been screeded, it shall be treated with a liquid
evaporation retardant. The retardant shall be used again after each WORK operation as
necessary to prevent drying shrinkage cracks. The classes of finish for unformed
concrete surfaces are designated and defined as follows:
1. Finish U1 - Sufficient leveling and screeding to produce an even, uniform surface
with surface irregularities not to exceed 3/8-inch. No further special finish is
required.
2. Finish U2 - After sufficient stiffening of the screeded concrete, surfaces shall be float
finished with wood or metal floats or with a finishing machine using float blades.
Excessive floating of surfaces while the concrete is plastic and dusting of dry
cement and sand on the concrete surface to absorb excess moisture will not be
permitted. Floating shall be the minimum necessary to produce a surface that is
free from screed marks and is uniform in texture. Surface irregularities shall not
exceed 1/4-inch. Joints and edges shall be tooled where indicated or as determined
by the ENGINEER.
3. Finish U3 - After the Finish U2 surface has hardened sufficiently to prevent excess
of fine material from being drawn to the surface, steel troweling shall be performed
with firm pressure such as will flatten the sandy texture of the floated surface and
produce a dense, uniform surface free from blemishes, ripples, and trowel marks.
The finish shall be smooth and free of irregularities.
4. Finish U4 - Trowel the Finish U3 surface to remove local depressions or high points.
In addition, the surface shall be given a light broom finish with brooming
perpendicular to drainage unless otherwise indicated. The resulting surface shall be
rough enough to provide a nonskid finish.
D. Unformed surfaces shall be finished according to the following schedule:
UNFORMED SURFACE FINISH SCHEDULE
Area Finish
Grade slabs and foundations to be covered with concrete or fill
material
U1
Floors to be covered with grouted tile or topping grout U2
Slabs to be covered with built-up roofing U2
Interior slabs and floors to receive architectural finish U3
Slabs U4
STANTEC – 06152020 (FINAL) CAST-IN-PLACE CONCRETE
W-354 – TRIANGLE FLOW CONTROL VALVE PAGE 03 31 50 - 18
Top surface of walls U3
3.16 CURING AND DAMPPROOFING
A. General: Concrete shall be cured for not less than 7 Days after placing, in accordance
with the methods indicated below for the different parts of the WORK.
Surface to be Cured or Dampproofed Method
Unstripped forms 1
Construction joints between footings and walls, and between
floor slab and columns
2
Encasement and ductbank concrete and thrust blocks 3
Concrete surfaces not specifically provided for elsewhere in this
Paragraph
4
Buried slabs and backfilled walls 5
B. Method 1: Wooden forms shall be wetted immediately after concrete has been placed
and shall be kept wet with water until removal. If steel forms are used, the exposed
concrete surfaces shall be kept continuously wet until the forms are removed. If forms
are removed within 7 Days of placing the concrete, curing shall be continued in
accordance with Method 4 below.
C. Method 2: The surface shall be covered with burlap mats which shall be kept wet with
water for the duration of the curing period, until the concrete in the walls has been
placed. No curing compound shall be applied to surfaces cured under Method 2.
D. Method 3: The surface shall be covered with moist earth not less than 4 hours nor more
than 24 hours after the concrete is placed. Earthwork operations that may damage the
concrete shall not begin until at least 7 Days after placement of concrete.
E. Method 4: The surface shall be sprayed with a liquid curing compound.
1. It shall be applied in accordance with the manufacturer's printed instructions at a
maximum coverage rate of 200 square feet per gallon and in such a manner as to
cover the surface with a uniform film that will seal thoroughly.
2. Where the curing compound method is used, care shall be exercised to avoid
damage to the seal during the 7 Day curing period. If the seal is damaged or broken
before the expiration of the curing period, the break shall be repaired immediately by
the application of additional curing compound over the damaged portion.
3. Wherever curing compound has been applied by mistake to surfaces against which
concrete subsequently is to be placed and to which it is to adhere, compound shall
be entirely removed by wet sandblasting just prior to the placing of new concrete.
STANTEC – 06152020 (FINAL) CAST-IN-PLACE CONCRETE
W-354 – TRIANGLE FLOW CONTROL VALVE PAGE 03 31 50 - 19
4. Curing compound shall be applied as soon as the concrete has hardened enough to
prevent marring on unformed surfaces, and within 2 hours after removal of forms.
Repairs required to be made to formed surfaces shall be made within the said 2
hour period; provided, however, that any such repairs which cannot be made within
the said 2 hour period shall be delayed until after the curing compound has been
applied. When repairs are to be made to an area on which curing compound has
been applied, the area involved shall first be wet-sandblasted to remove the curing
compound.
5. During the curing period, no traffic of any nature and no depositing of any materials,
temporary or otherwise, shall be permitted on surfaces coated with curing
compound. Foot traffic and the depositing of materials may be allowed after 3 Days
if the surface is covered with 5/8-inch plywood placed over polyethylene sheets.
F. Method 5: This method applies to both buried slabs and walls to be backfilled.
1. The concrete shall be kept continuously wet by the application of water for a
minimum period of at least 7 Days beginning immediately after the concrete has
reached final set or forms have been removed.
2. Until the concrete surface is covered with the curing medium, the entire surface
shall be kept damp by applying water through nozzles that atomize the flow so that
the surface is not marred or washed.
3. Heavy curing mats shall be used as a curing medium to retain the moisture during
the curing period. The curing medium shall be weighted or otherwise held
substantially in contact with the concrete surface to prevent being dislodged by wind
or any other causes. Edges shall be continuously held in place.
4. The curing blankets and concrete shall be kept continuously wet by the use of
sprinklers or other means both during and after normal working hours.
5. Immediately after the application of water has terminated at the end of the curing
period, the curing medium shall be removed, any dry spots shall be rewetted, and
curing compound shall be immediately applied in accordance with Method 4 above.
6. The CONTRACTOR shall dispose of excess water from the curing operation to
avoid damage to the WORK.
7. Dampproofing: The exterior surfaces of buried roof slabs and backfilled walls shall
be dampproofed as follows.
a. Immediately after completion of curing, the surface shall be sprayed with a
dampproofing agent consisting of an asphalt emulsion. Application shall be in
2 coats. The first coat shall be diluted to one-half strength by the addition of
water and shall be sprayed on so as to provide a maximum coverage rate of
100 square feet per gallon of dilute solution. The second coat shall consist of
an application of the undiluted material, and shall be sprayed on so as to
provide a maximum coverage rate of 100 square feet per gallon.
Dampproofing material shall be as indicated above.
b. As soon as the material has taken an initial set, the entire area thus coated
shall be coated with whitewash. Any formula for mixing the whitewash may be
used if it produces a uniformly coated white surface and remains until placing
STANTEC – 06152020 (FINAL) CAST-IN-PLACE CONCRETE
W-354 – TRIANGLE FLOW CONTROL VALVE PAGE 03 31 50 - 20
of the backfill. If the whitewash fails to remain on the surface until the backfill
is placed, the CONTRACTOR shall apply additional whitewash
G. The CONTRACTOR may submit alternate methods of curing which maintain the
concrete in a continuously wet condition for acceptance by the ENGINEER.
3.17 PROTECTION
A. The CONTRACTOR shall protect concrete against injury until final acceptance.
B. Fresh concrete shall be protected from damage due to rain, hail, sleet, or snow. The
CONTRACTOR shall provide such protection while the concrete is still plastic and
whenever precipitation is imminent or occurring.
3.18 CURING IN COLD WEATHER
A. Water curing of concrete may be reduced to 6 Days during periods when the mean daily
temperature in the vicinity of the Site is less than 40 degrees F; provided that, during the
prescribed period of water curing, when temperatures are such that concrete surfaces
may freeze, water curing shall be temporarily discontinued.
B. Concrete cured by an application of curing compound will require no additional
protection from freezing if the protection at 50 degrees F for 72 hours is obtained by
means of approved insulation in contact with the forms or concrete surfaces; otherwise,
the concrete shall be protected against freezing temperatures for 72 hours immediately
following 72 hours protection at 50 degrees F. Concrete cured by water shall be
protected against freezing temperatures for 72 hours immediately following the 72 hours
of protection at 50 degrees F.
C. Discontinuance of protection against freezing temperatures shall be such that the drop in
temperature of any portion of the concrete will be gradual and will not exceed 40
degrees F in 24 hours. In the spring, when the mean daily temperature rises above 40
degrees F for more than 3 Days, 72 hour protection at a temperature not lower than 50
degrees F may be discontinued for as long as the mean daily temperature remains
above 40 degrees F; provided, that the concrete shall be protected against freezing
temperatures for not less than 48 hours after placement.
D. Where artificial heat is employed, special care shall be taken to prevent the concrete
from drying. Use of unvented heaters will be permitted only when unformed surfaces of
concrete adjacent to the heaters are protected for the first 24 hours from an excessive
carbon dioxide atmosphere by application of curing compound; provided, that the use of
curing compound for such surfaces is otherwise permitted by these Specifications.
3.19 TREATMENT OF SURFACE DEFECTS
A. As soon as forms are removed, exposed concrete surfaces shall be carefully examined
and any irregularities shall be immediately rubbed or ground in a satisfactory manner in
order to secure a smooth, uniform, and continuous surface. Plastering or coating of
surfaces to be smoothed will not be permitted. No repairs shall be made until after
inspection by the ENGINEER. In no case will extensive patching of honeycombed
concrete be permitted. Concrete containing minor voids, holes, honeycombing, or
similar depression defects shall be repaired as indicated below. Concrete containing
extensive voids, holes, honeycombing, or similar depression defects, shall be completely
removed and replaced. Repairs and replacements shall be performed promptly.
STANTEC – 06152020 (FINAL) CAST-IN-PLACE CONCRETE
W-354 – TRIANGLE FLOW CONTROL VALVE PAGE 03 31 50 - 21
B. Defective surfaces to be repaired shall be cut back from trueline a minimum depth of
1/2-inch over the entire area. Feathered edges will not be permitted. Where chipping or
cutting tools are not required in order to deepen the area properly, the surface shall be
prepared for bonding by the removal of laitance or soft material, plus not less than 1/32-
inch depth of the surface film from hard portions by means of an efficient sandblast.
After cutting and sandblasting, the surface shall be wetted sufficiently in advance of
shooting with shotcrete or with cement mortar so that while the repair material is being
applied, the surfaces underneath will remain moist but not so wet as to overcome the
suction upon which a good bond depends. The material used for repair shall consist of a
mixture of one sack of cement to 3 cubic feet of sand. For exposed walls, the cement
shall contain such a proportion of Atlas white portland cement as is required to make the
color of the patch match the color of the surrounding concrete.
C. Holes left by tie-rod cones shall be reamed with suitable toothed reamers so as to leave
the surfaces of the holes clean and rough. These holes then shall be repaired in an
approved manner with dry-packed cement grout. Holes left by form-tying devices having
a rectangular cross-section, and other imperfections having a depth greater than their
least surface dimension, shall not be reamed but shall be repaired in an approved
manner with dry-packed cement grout.
D. Repairs shall be built up and shaped in such a manner that the completed WORK will
conform to the requirements of this Section as applicable, using approved methods which
will not disturb the bond, cause sagging, or cause horizontal fractures. Surfaces of repairs
shall receive the same kind and amount of curing treatment as required for the concrete in
the repaired section.
3.20 CARE AND REPAIR OF CONCRETE
A. The CONTRACTOR shall protect concrete against injury or damage from excessive
heat, lack of moisture, overstress, or any other cause until final acceptance. Particular
care shall be taken to prevent the drying of concrete and to avoid roughening or
otherwise damaging the surface. Any concrete found to be damaged, or which may
have been originally defective, which becomes defective at any time prior to the final
acceptance of the completed WORK, which departs from the established line or grade,
or which, for any other reason, does not conform to the requirements of the Contract
Documents, shall be satisfactorily repaired or removed and replaced with acceptable
concrete.
END OF SECTION
STANTEC - 06152020 (FINAL) MISCELLANEOUS METALWORK
W-354 – TRIANGLE FLOW CONTROL VALVE PAGE 05 50 00 - 1
SECTION 05 50 00 – MISCELLANEOUS METALWORK
PART 1 -- GENERAL
1.1 THE SUMMARY
A. Provide miscellaneous metalwork and appurtenances, complete and in place, as indicated
in accordance with the Contract Documents.
1.2 REFERENCE SPECIFICATIONS, CODES, AND STANDARDS
A. Federal Specifications
MIL-G-18015 A (3) (Ships) Aluminum Planks. (6063-T6)
MIL-PRF-907F Antiseize Thread Compound, High Temperature
B. Codes
OSHA 1927.10 Fixed Ladders
C. Commercial Standards
AA-M32C22A41 Aluminum Assn.
AASHTO HS-20 Truck Loading
AISC Manual of Steel Construction
AISI Design of Light Gauge, Cold-Formed Steel Structural Members
ASTM A 36 Carbon Structural Steel
ASTM A 48 Gray Iron Castings
ASTM A 53 Pipe, Steel, Black and Hot-Dipped, Zinc-Coated, Welded and
Seamless
ASTM A 123 Zinc (Hot-Dip Galvanized) Coatings on Iron and Steel Products
ASTM A 153 Zinc Coating (Hot-Dip) on Iron and Steel Hardware
ASTM A 193 Alloy Steel and Stainless Steel Bolting Materials for High
Temperature Service
ASTM A 194 Carbon and Alloy Steel Nuts for Bolts for High Pressure and High
Temperature Service
ASTM A 307 Carbon Steel Bolts and Studs, 60,000 psi Tensile Strength
ASTM A 325 Structural Bolts, Steel, Heat Treated, 120/105 ksi Minimum Tensile
Strength
STANTEC - 06152020 (FINAL) MISCELLANEOUS METALWORK
W-354 – TRIANGLE FLOW CONTROL VALVE PAGE 05 50 00 - 2
ASTM A 500 Cold-Formed Welded and Seamless Carbon Steel Structural Tubing
in Rounds and Shapes
ASTM A 992 Steel for Structural Shapes for Use in Building Framing
ASTM F 1554 Standard Specification for Anchor Bolts, Steel, 36, 55 and 105-ksi
Yield Strength
ANSI/AWS D1.1 Structural Welding Code - Steel
ANSI/AWS D1.2 Structural Welding Code - Aluminum
ANSI/AWS QC1 Qualification and Certification of Welding Inspectors
1.3 CONTRACTOR SUBMITTALS
A. Furnish submittals in accordance with the requirements of General Conditions Section
2.04 – Shop Drawings.
B. Shop Drawings
1. Shop Drawings shall conform to AISC recommendations and specifications, and shall
show holes, and the like, as may be required for other parts of the WORK.
2. Shop Drawings shall include complete details of members and connections, anchor
bolt layouts, schedules for fabrication procedures, and diagrams for the sequence of
erection.
C. Grating
1. Submit layout drawings for grating, showing the direction of span, type and depth of
grating, size and shape of grating panels, seat angle details, and details of grating
hold down fasteners.
2. Submit load and deflection tables for each style and depth of grating used.
1.4 QUALITY ASSURANCE
A. Weld procedures and welder qualifications shall be available in the CONTRACTOR's field
office for review.
B. Welding Special Inspection shall be performed by the OWNER in accordance with the
enforceable Building Code.
PART 2 -- PRODUCTS
2.1 GENERAL REQUIREMENTS
A. Steel
Wide Flange Shapes ASTM A 992
Shapes, Plates, Bars ASTM A 36
STANTEC - 06152020 (FINAL) MISCELLANEOUS METALWORK
W-354 – TRIANGLE FLOW CONTROL VALVE PAGE 05 50 00 - 3
Pipe, Pipe Columns, Bollards ASTM A 53, Type E or S, Grade B standard
weight unless indicated otherwise
HSS ASTM A 500 Grade B
B. Corrosion Protection
1. Unless otherwise indicated, fabricated steel metalwork which will be used in a
corrosive environment and/or will be submerged in water or wastewater shall be
coated in accordance with the requirements indicated on the Drawings, and shall not
be galvanized prior to coating.
2. Other miscellaneous steel metalwork shall be hot-dip galvanized after fabrication.
C. Stainless Steel
1. Unless otherwise indicated, stainless steel metalwork and bolts shall be fabricated
from Type 316 stainless steel.
D. Aluminum
1. Unless otherwise indicated, aluminum metalwork shall be fabricated from Alloy 6061-
T6.
2. Aluminum in contact with concrete, masonry, wood, porous materials, or dissimilar
metals shall have contact surfaces coated in accordance with the requirements
indicated on the Drawings.
E. Cast Iron
1. Unless otherwise indicated, iron castings shall conform to the requirements of ASTM
A 48, Class 50B, or better.
2.2 LADDERS
A. Materials
1. Ladders which may be partially or wholly submerged or which are located inside a
hydraulic structure shall be fabricated entirely of Type 316 stainless steel.
2. Other ladders shall be fabricated from carbon steel, hot-dip galvanized after
fabrication.
B. Fixed Step-Through Ladders shall be equipped with grab bar extensions meeting OSHA
requirements.
1. Approved products include Model 504 Access Ladder by O’Keefe’s, or equal. Grab
bars by CAI Safety Systems may be added to other existing or new ladders.
C. Fall Prevention System (Ladder Safety System)
STANTEC - 06152020 (FINAL) MISCELLANEOUS METALWORK
W-354 – TRIANGLE FLOW CONTROL VALVE PAGE 05 50 00 - 4
1. The fall prevention system at ladders shall include top and bottom brackets, ladder
rung clamps, a steel cable that runs the height of the ladder, sleeves and full body
harness (one per ladder), dismount section, and other components as necessary for
a complete system.
2. All requirements of OSHA 1910.29 must be met.
3. The system shall be stainless steel unless noted otherwise. When steel ladders are
specified, the ladder safety system is permitted to be galvanized steel.
4. Approved products include Lad-Saf by DBI Sala, or equal.
D. Pop-Up Extension
1. Every ladder that does not extend above the access level shall be equipped with a
pop-up ladder extension.
2. The pop-up ladder extension device shall be manufactured of the same material and
finish as the ladder, and shall be provided with a telescoping tubular section that locks
automatically when fully extended.
3. Upward and downward movement shall be controlled by stainless steel spring
balancing mechanisms.
4. The units shall be completely assembled with fasteners for securing to the ladder
rungs in accordance with the manufacturer’s instructions.
2.3 BOLTS AND ANCHORS
A. Standard Service (Non-Corrosive Application)
1. Bolts, anchor rods, anchor bolts, washers, and nuts shall be fabricated from steel as
indicated.
2. Threads on galvanized bolts, rods and nuts shall be formed with suitable taps and
dies such that they retain their normal clearance after hot-dip galvanizing.
3. Except as otherwise indicated, steel for bolt material, anchor rods, anchor bolts, and
cap screws shall be in accordance with the following requirements:
a. Structural Connections: ASTM A 307, Grade A or B, hot-dip galvanized
b. Headed Anchor Rods and Anchor Bolts: ASTM F1554, Grade 36, hot-dip or
mechanically galvanized with Grade A matching nuts
c. High-Strength Bolts, where indicated: ASTM A 325
d. Pipe and Equipment Flange Bolts: ASTM A 193, Grade B-7
B. Corrosive Service
1. Bolts, anchor rods, anchor bolts, nuts, and washers in the locations listed below shall
be fabricated from stainless steel as indicated.
STANTEC - 06152020 (FINAL) MISCELLANEOUS METALWORK
W-354 – TRIANGLE FLOW CONTROL VALVE PAGE 05 50 00 - 5
a. buried locations
b. submerged locations
c. locations subject to seasonal or occasional flooding
d. inside hydraulic structures below the top of the structure
e. inside buried vaults, manholes, and structures that do not drain through a gravity
sewer or to a sump with a pump
f. chemical handling areas
g. inside trenches, containment walls, and curbed areas
h. locations indicated or designated by the ENGINEER to be provided with stainless
steel bolts
C. Unless otherwise indicated, stainless steel bolts, nuts, anchor rods, and washers shall be
fabricated from Type 316 stainless steel, Class 2, conforming to ASTM A 193 for bolts and
to ASTM A 194 for nuts.
D. Coating
1. Threads on stainless steel bolts and rods shall be protected with an antiseize lubricant
suitable for submerged stainless steel bolts, meeting government specification MIL-
A-907E.
2. Buried bolts in poorly drained soil shall be coated the same as the buried pipe.
3. Antiseize lubricant shall be classified as acceptable for potable water use by the NSF.
4. Antiseize lubricant shall be "PURE WHITE" by Anti-Seize Technology, Franklin
Park, IL, 60131, AS-470 by Dixon Ticonderoga Company, Lakehurst, NJ, 08733,
or equal.
E. Bolt Requirements
1. The bolt and nut material shall be free-cutting steel.
2. The nuts shall be capable of developing the full strength of the bolts.
3. Threads shall be Coarse Thread Series conforming to the requirements of the
American Standard for Screw Threads.
4. Bolts and cap screws shall have hexagon heads and nuts shall be Heavy Hexagon
Series.
5. Bolts and nuts shall be installed with washers fabricated from material matching the
base material of bolts, except that hardened washers for high-strength bolts shall
conform to the requirements of the AISC Specification.
6. Lock washers fabricated from material matching the bolts shall be installed where
indicated.
STANTEC - 06152020 (FINAL) MISCELLANEOUS METALWORK
W-354 – TRIANGLE FLOW CONTROL VALVE PAGE 05 50 00 - 6
7. The length of each bolt shall be such that the bolt extends at least 1/8 inch beyond
the outside face of the nut before tightening, except for anchor bolts which shall be
flush with the face of the nut before tightening.
PART 3 -- EXECUTION
3.1 FABRICATION AND INSTALLATION REQUIREMENTS
A. Fabrication and Erection: Except as otherwise indicated, the fabrication and erection of
structural steel shall conform to the requirements of the American Institute of Steel
Construction "Manual of Steel Construction."
B. Unless otherwise indicated, provide a 1/2-inch drain line to the nearest floor drain for floor
hatches.
C. Powder-Driven Pins
1. Powder-driven pins shall be installed by a craftsperson certified by the manufacturer
as being qualified to install the manufacturer's pins.
2. Pins shall be driven in one initial movement by an instantaneous force that has been
carefully selected to attain the required penetration.
3. Driven pins shall conform to the following requirements where "D" is equal to the pin
shank diameter:
Material
Penetrated
by Pin
Material
Minimum
Thickness
Pin Shank
Penetration in
Supporting
Material
Minimum Space
From Pin's CL
to Edge of
Penetrated
Material
Minimum
Pin Spacing
Concrete 16D 6D minimum 14D 20D
Steel 1/4-inch Steel thickness 4D 7D
3.2 WELDING
A. Method
1. Welding shall be performed by the metal-arc method or gas-shielded arc method as
described in the American Welding Society "Welding Handbook" as supplemented by
other pertinent standards of the AWS.
2. The qualification of the welders shall be in accordance with the AWS Standards.
B. Quality
1. In assembly and during welding, the component parts shall be adequately clamped,
supported, and restrained in order to minimize distortion and for control of dimensions.
2. Weld reinforcement shall be as indicated by the AWS Code.
STANTEC - 06152020 (FINAL) MISCELLANEOUS METALWORK
W-354 – TRIANGLE FLOW CONTROL VALVE PAGE 05 50 00 - 7
3. Upon completion of welding, remove weld splatter, flux, slag, and burrs left by
attachments.
4. Welds shall be repaired in order to produce a workmanlike appearance, with uniform
weld contours and dimensions.
5. Sharp corners of material that is to be painted or coated shall be ground to a minimum
of 1/32 inch on the flat.
3.3 GALVANIZING
A. Structural steel plates shapes, bars, and fabricated assemblies required to be galvanized
shall, after the steel has been thoroughly cleaned of rust and scale, be galvanized in
accordance with the requirements of ASTM A 123.
B. Any galvanized part that becomes warped during the galvanizing operation shall be
straightened.
C. Bolts, anchor rods, anchor bolts, nuts, and similar threaded fasteners, after being properly
cleaned, shall be galvanized in accordance with the requirements of ASTM A 153.
D. Field Repairs
1. Field repairs to damaged galvanizing shall be performed by preparing the surface and
applying a coating.
2. Surface preparation shall consist of removing oil, grease, soil, and soluble material
by cleaning with water and detergent (SSPC SP1) followed by brush-off blast cleaning
(SSPC SP7) over an area extending at least 4 inches into the undamaged area.
3. The coating shall be applied to at least 3 mils dry film thickness, and shall be Zinc-
Clad XI by Sherwin-Williams, Galvax by Alvin Products, Galvite by ZRC
Worldwide, or equal.
END OF SECTION
STANTEC – 06152020 (FINAL) ELECTRICAL WORK, GENERAL
W-354 - TRIANGLE FLOW CONTROL VALVE PAGE 26 00 00 -1
SECTION 26 00 00 – ELECTRICAL WORK, GENERAL
PART 1 -- GENERAL
1.1 THE REQUIREMENT
A. Provide the electrical WORK, complete and operable, as indicated in accordance with
the Contract Documents.
B. The provisions of this Section shall apply to all Sections in Division 26, except as
otherwise indicated.
C. The WORK of this Section is required for operation of electrically-driven equipment
provided under Specifications in other Divisions.
D. The CONTRACTOR'S attention is directed to the requirement for proper coordination of
the WORK of this Section with the WORK of equipment Specifications and the WORK of
instrumentation Sections.
E. Concrete, excavation, backfill, and steel reinforcement required for encasement,
installation, or construction of the WORK of the various Sections of Division 16 is
included as a part of the WORK under the respective Sections, including duct banks,
manholes, handholes, equipment housekeeping pads, and light pole bases.
F. Equipment supports and foundations shall be in conformance with the requirements of
Section 46 01 00 – Equipment General Provisions.
1.2 REFERENCE STANDARDS
NEC (NFPA 70) National Electrical Code
NETA International Electrical Testing Association
NEMA 250 Enclosure for Electrical Equipment (1000 Volts
Maximum)
Title 8, Subchapter 5,
California Administrative Code Electrical Safety Orders
A. Electrical equipment shall be listed by and shall bear the label of Underwriters'
Laboratories, Inc. (UL) or an independent testing laboratory acceptable to the local code
enforcement agency having jurisdiction.
B. Installation of electrical equipment and materials shall comply with OSHA Safety and
Health Standards (29 CFR 1910 and 29 CFR 1926, as applicable), state building
standards, and applicable local codes and regulations.
C. Where the requirements of the specifications conflict with UL, NEMA, NFPA, or other
applicable standards, the more stringent requirements shall govern.
STANTEC – 06152020 (FINAL) ELECTRICAL WORK, GENERAL
W-354 - TRIANGLE FLOW CONTROL VALVE PAGE 26 00 00 -2
1.3 SIGNAGE AND MARKINGS
A. Identification
1. Provide danger, caution, and warning signs and equipment identification markings in
accordance with applicable federal, state, OSHA, and NEC requirements.
B. Local Disconnect Switches
1. Legibly mark each local disconnect switch for motors and equipment in order to
indicate its purpose, unless the purpose is indicated by the location and arrangement.
C. Warning Signs
1. 600 Volts Nominal, or Less
a. Mark entrances to rooms and other guarded locations that contain live parts
with conspicuous signs prohibiting unqualified persons from entering.
2. Greater than 600 Volts
a. Buildings, rooms, or enclosures containing exposed live parts or exposed
conductors operating at greater than 600 volts nominal shall be lockable.
b. Provide permanent and conspicuous warning signs reading as follows:
DANGER – HIGH VOLTAGE – KEEP OUT.
3. Mark indoor electrical installations that are open to unqualified persons and contain
metal-enclosed switchgear, unit substations, transformers, and other similar
associated equipment over 600 volts nominal, with appropriate caution signs.
4. Outside Branch Circuits and Feeders over 600 Volts
a. Post warning signs in plain view where unauthorized persons might come in
contact with live parts: WARNING – HIGH VOLTAGE – KEEP OUT.
D. Isolating Switches
1. Provide isolating switches not interlocked with an approved circuit-interrupting device
with a sign warning against opening them under load.
1.4 PUBLIC UTILITIES REQUIREMENTS – NOT USED
1.5 PERMITS AND INSPECTION
A. Obtain permits and pay inspection fees according to the General Conditions.
1.6 CONTRACTOR SUBMITTALS
A. General
1. Furnish submittals in accordance with the requirements of General Conditions
Section 2.04 – Shop Drawings.
STANTEC – 06152020 (FINAL) ELECTRICAL WORK, GENERAL
W-354 - TRIANGLE FLOW CONTROL VALVE PAGE 26 00 00 -3
2. Custom-prepare Shop Drawings.
3. Drawings or data indicating "optional" or "as required" equipment will not be
accepted.
4. Cross out options not proposed or delete from the Shop Drawings.
B. Shop Drawings: Include the following:
1. Complete material lists stating manufacturer and brand name of each item or class of
material.
2. Shop Drawings for grounding WORK not specifically indicated
3. Front, side, rear elevations, and top views with dimensional data
4. Location of conduit entrances and access plates
5. Component data
6. Connection diagrams, terminal numbers, internal wiring diagrams, conductor size,
and cable numbers
7. Method of anchoring, seismic requirements, weight
8. Types of materials and finish
9. Nameplates
10. Temperature limitations, as applicable
11. Voltage requirement, phase, and current, as applicable
12. Front and rear access requirements
13. Test reports
14. Grounding requirements
C. Catalog Cuts
1. Submit catalog cuts or photocopies of applicable pages of bulletins or brochures for
mass produced, non-custom manufactured material.
2. Stamp the catalog data sheets in order to indicate the Project name, applicable
Specifications Section and Paragraph, model number, and options.
D. Materials and Equipment Schedules
1. Within 30 Days of the commencement date in the Notice to Proceed, deliver to the
ENGINEER a complete list of materials, equipment, apparatus, and fixtures that are
proposed for use.
STANTEC – 06152020 (FINAL) ELECTRICAL WORK, GENERAL
W-354 - TRIANGLE FLOW CONTROL VALVE PAGE 26 00 00 -4
2. Include in the list the type, size, name of manufacturers, catalog number, and such
other information as required to identify the item.
E. Technical Manuals
1. Submit complete information in accordance with the requirements of Section
013300 – Contractor Submittals.
2. As-Built Drawings
a. Prepare as-built drawings, showing invert and top elevations and routing of duct
banks and concealed below-grade electrical installations.
b. Furnish the drawings to the ENGINEER in accordance with the requirements of
Section 013300 – Contractor Submittals.
1.7 AREA DESIGNATIONS
A. General
1. Designations for raceway system enclosures shall comply with the requirements of
Section 260533 – Electrical Raceway Systems.
2. Designations for electrical WORK specifically indicated in other Sections shall comply
with the requirements of those Sections unless indicated otherwise.
3. Designations for other electrical WORK not included in the above Paragraphs shall be
as follows:
AREA
NEMA ENCLOSURE CLASSIFICATION
1 3R 4X 7/9 12 Notes
Outdoors X All outdoor areas are considered
corrosive, wet locations.
Outdoors
inside
containment
area
X All outdoor areas are considered
corrosive, wet locations.
Indoors X
4. Designations for electrical WORK not included in the above Paragraphs shall be
NEMA 4X.
5. Installations in hazardous locations shall conform strictly to the requirements of the
indicated Class, Group, and Division.
B. Material Requirements
1. Provide sealing fittings areas as required by Code.
STANTEC – 06152020 (FINAL) ELECTRICAL WORK, GENERAL
W-354 - TRIANGLE FLOW CONTROL VALVE PAGE 26 00 00 -5
2. Construct NEMA 4X enclosures of Type 304 or 316 stainless steel, except in alum,
sodium hypochlorite, chlorine, etc. areas where non-metallic enclosures shall be
provided. Where possible, penetrations shall be made in such a manner to maintain
the NEMA 4X rating. If this is not possible, the penetrations shall be made in such a
manner to minimize entry of foreign materials into the enclosure, subject to approval
by the ENGINEER.
3. Do not coat NEMA 4X enclosures.
4. Construct NEMA 7 enclosures of cast aluminum where used with aluminum conduit,
and of cast iron when used with galvanized steel conduit. In hazardous areas,
enclosures shall be cast aluminum NEMA 7 and shall be UL listed for use in
hazardous or classified locations.
5. Do not coat NEMA 7 and 9 enclosures.
6. Construct NEMA 1, 3R, and 12 enclosures of steel, and prime and coat with ANSI 61
light grey paint and white interior.
1.8 TESTS
A. The CONTRACTOR shall be responsible for factory and field tests indicated in Division
16, as required by the ENGINEER, and as required by other authorities having
jurisdiction.
B. Furnish necessary testing equipment.
C. Pay the costs of the tests, including replacement parts and labor, due to damage
resulting from damaged equipment or from testing and correction of a faulty installation.
D. Reporting
1. Where test reporting is indicated, submit proof-of-design test reports for mass-
produced equipment with the Shop Drawings.
2. Submit factory performance test reports for custom-manufactured equipment for
approval prior to shipment.
3. Submit field test reports for review prior to Substantial Completion.
E. Remove and replace equipment or material that fails a test, or, if the ENGINEER
approves, repair and retested for compliance.
F. Corrections to equipment or materials with a factory warranty shall be as recommended
by the manufacturer and shall be performed in a manner that does not void the warranty.
1.9 DEMOLITION AND RELATED WORK
A. General
1. Perform electrical demolition WORK as indicated. Reference Specification Section
02 41 19 in addition to the drawings.
STANTEC – 06152020 (FINAL) ELECTRICAL WORK, GENERAL
W-354 - TRIANGLE FLOW CONTROL VALVE PAGE 26 00 00 -6
2. The CONTRACTOR is cautioned that demolition WORK may also be indicated on
non-electrical Drawings.
3. Coordinate with all trades regarding electrical de-energization, disconnection, and
removal, and the overall sequence of construction.
B. Electrical Requirements for Removed Equipment
1. Remove dedicated wiring and exposed conduits back to the source.
2. Abandon in place wiring that shares conduits with other equipment wiring.
3. Encased Conduits
a. Abandon in place wiring routed through encased conduits.
b. Cut encased conduits flush to the floor and grout flush with the floor.
4. Remove remote-mounted starters, disconnect switches, circuit breakers, sensors, and
transmitters.
C. Where new lighting and receptacles are installed, remove old lighting, receptacles,
switches, wiring, and conduits.
D. Junction Boxes
1. Wiring and conduits indicated to be extended shall be terminated in a new junction
box with terminal strips.
2. Provide a junction box with a NEMA rating in accordance with the area in which it is
located, and sized as required.
3. Properly identify wires and terminals before disconnection.
E. Removed materials and equipment not indicated to be returned to the OWNER shall,
upon removal, become the CONTRACTOR'S property and shall be disposed of off- Site.
F. Remove and relocate material and equipment indicated to be relocated or reused, and
reinstall with care in order to prevent damage.
G. Place materials indicated to be returned to the OWNER in boxes, with the contents
clearly marked, and store at a location determined by the ENGINEER.
H. Identification
1. Where motor control centers and panelboards are indicated to have components,
assemblies, or circuits removed and reconnected, provide the affected MCC
compartments with new engraved nameplates worded as indicated and matching
the existing, or modify the panelboard schedule to indicate the revised circuits.
2. Pencil or magic marker markings directly on the MCC or panelboard breaker will not
be accepted.
STANTEC – 06152020 (FINAL) ELECTRICAL WORK, GENERAL
W-354 - TRIANGLE FLOW CONTROL VALVE PAGE 26 00 00 -7
1.10 CONSTRUCTION SEQUENCING
A. General
1. Because the continuance of plant operation during the project is critical, the
CONTRACTOR shall carefully examine the WORK to be provided in, on, or
adjacent to existing equipment.
2. Schedule the WORK, subject to OWNER's approval, to minimize required shutdown
time.
3. Submit a written sequencing request, including the sequence and duration of
activities to be performed during plant shutdown.
4. Switching, safety tagging, and the like, as required for plant shutdown or to isolate
existing equipment, shall be performed by the CONTRACTOR.
5. In no case shall the CONTRACTOR begin any WORK in, on, or adjacent to existing
equipment without written authorization from the ENGINEER.
B. Modifications
1. Perform modifications or alterations to existing electrical facilities as required to
successfully install and integrate the proposed electrical equipment as indicated.
2. Perform modifications to existing equipment, panels, and cabinets in a professional
manner.
3. Repair coatings to match existing.
4. The costs for modifications to existing electrical facilities that are required for a
complete and operating system shall be included as part of the WORK.
C. Existing Utilities
1. Exercise extreme caution when digging trenches to not damage existing
underground utilities.
2. The cost of repairs of damages caused during construction shall be included as a
part of the WORK.
D. Field Verifications
1. Visit the Site before submitting a Bid to become better acquainted with the WORK of
this Contract.
2. The lack of knowledge will not be accepted as justification for extra compensation to
perform the WORK.
3. The CONTRACTOR shall be responsible for identifying available existing circuit
breakers in lighting panels for the intended use as required.
4. The CONTRACTOR shall be responsible for field verifying the available space in
substation switchboards to integrate new power circuit breakers.
STANTEC – 06152020 (FINAL) ELECTRICAL WORK, GENERAL
W-354 - TRIANGLE FLOW CONTROL VALVE PAGE 26 00 00 -8
5. The cost for the above verifications shall be included as part of the WORK.
E. Installation of Temporary Equipment
1. To facilitate the continuous operation of existing equipment, provide the temporary
equipment as indicated.
2. Submit installation and connection details for review and acceptance by the
ENGINEER.
3. Costs associated with these temporary installations shall be included as part of the
WORK.
4. Temporary wiring and equipment shall remain the property of the CONTRACTOR
unless indicated otherwise.
PART 2 -- PRODUCTS
2.1 GENERAL
A. Provide equipment and materials that are new and are the products of experienced and
reputable manufacturers in the industry.
B. Provide equipment and materials listed by UL and bearing the UL label, where UL
requirements apply.
C. Provide similar items in the WORK as products of the same manufacturer.
D. Provide equipment and materials of industrial grade standard of construction.
E. Where a NEMA enclosure type is indicated in a non-hazardous location, use that type of
enclosure despite the fact that certain modifications such as cutouts for control devices
may negate the NEMA rating.
F. On devices indicated to display dates, display the year as 4 digits.
G. Temperature Ratings of Equipment Terminations
1. Provide terminations and lugs rated for use with 75-degree C conductors.
2. Wire sizes in the Contract Documents are based on NEC ampacity tables using the
75-degree C ratings.
2.2 MOUNTING HARDWARE
A. Miscellaneous Hardware
1. Provide nuts, bolts, and washers constructed of stainless steel.
2. Provide threaded rods for trapeze supports constructed from continuous threaded
galvanized steel, 3/8-inch diameter minimum.
STANTEC – 06152020 (FINAL) ELECTRICAL WORK, GENERAL
W-354 - TRIANGLE FLOW CONTROL VALVE PAGE 26 00 00 -9
3. Struts
a. Construct struts for mounting of conduits and equipment of stainless steel.
b. Where contact with concrete or dissimilar metals may cause galvanic corrosion,
use suitable non-metallic insulators in order to prevent such corrosion.
c. Strut Manufacturer, or Equal: Unistrut; B-Line
4. End Caps
a. Provide plastic protective end caps for all exposed strut ends.
b. End Caps Manufacturer, or Equal: Unistrut, Model P2860
5. Anchors
a. Provide stainless steel expansion anchors for attaching equipment to concrete
walls, floors, and ceilings.
b. Wood plugs will not be accepted.
c. Anchor Manufacturer, or Equal: "Power-Bolt" or "Power-Stud" as
manufactured by Power Fasteners, Inc.; similar by Star.
2.3 ELECTRICAL IDENTIFICATION
A. Nameplates
1. Fabricate nameplates from white-letter, black-face laminated plastic engraving
stock, such as Formica Type ES-1 or equal.
2. Securely fasten each nameplate, using fasteners constructed of brass, cadmium-
plated steel, or stainless steel, and screwed into inserts or tapped holes as required.
3. Provide engraved characters of the block style, with no characters smaller than 1/8
inch top to bottom.
B. Conductor and Equipment Identification
1. Provide imprinted plastic-coated cloth marking devices, such as manufactured by
Brady, Thomas & Betts, or equal.
2. Alternatively, provide heat-shrunk plastic tubing, imprinted split-sleeve markers
cemented in place.
PART 3 -- EXECUTION
3.1 GENERAL
A. Incidentals
1. Provide materials and incidentals required for a complete and operable system,
even if not required explicitly by the Contract Documents.
STANTEC – 06152020 (FINAL) ELECTRICAL WORK, GENERAL
W-354 - TRIANGLE FLOW CONTROL VALVE PAGE 26 00 00 -10
2. Typical incidentals are terminal lugs not furnished with vendor-supplied equipment,
compression connectors for cables, splices, junction and terminal boxes, and control
wiring required by vendor-furnished equipment to connect with other equipment
indicated in the Contract Documents.
B. Field Control of Location and Arrangement
1. The Drawings diagrammatically indicate the desired location and arrangement of
outlets, conduit runs, equipment, and other items.
2. Exact locations shall be determined by the CONTRACTOR in the field, based on the
physical size and arrangement of equipment, finished elevations, and other
obstructions.
3. Follow the locations on the Drawings, however, as closely as possible.
4. Conduits
a. Where conduit development drawings or "home runs" are indicated, route the
conduits in accordance with those requirements.
b. Provide exposed or encased routings as indicated, except conceal conduit in
finished areas unless indicated otherwise.
c. Size conduits encased in a slab for conduit OD not to exceed 1/3 of the slab
thickness, and lay out and space as to not impede concrete flow.
5. Placement
a. Install conduit and equipment in such a manner as to avoid obstructions, to
preserve headroom, and to keep openings and passageways clear.
b. Locate luminaires, switches, convenience outlets, and similar items within
finished rooms as indicated.
c. Where exact locations are not indicated, such locations will be determined by the
ENGINEER.
d. If equipment is installed without instruction and must be moved, the cost of
moving shall be included as part of the WORK.
e. Slightly adjust luminaire locations in order to avoid obstructions and to minimize
shadows.
6. Circuits
a. Wherever conduits and wiring for lighting and receptacles are not indicated, it
shall be the CONTRACTOR'S responsibility to provide lighting and receptacle-
related conduits and wiring as required, based on the actual installed fixture
layout and the circuit designations as indicated.
b. Provide No. 12 AWG minimum wiring, and 3/4-inch minimum conduits (exposed)
and one-inch minimum conduits (encased).
STANTEC – 06152020 (FINAL) ELECTRICAL WORK, GENERAL
W-354 - TRIANGLE FLOW CONTROL VALVE PAGE 26 00 00 -11
c. Where circuits are combined in the same raceway, derate conductor ampacities
in accordance with NEC requirements.
C. Workmanship
1. Install materials and equipment in strict accordance with the printed
recommendations of the manufacturer, and using workers skilled in the WORK.
2. Coordinate installation in the field with other trades in order to avoid interferences.
D. Protection of Equipment and Materials
1. Fully protect materials and equipment against damage from any cause.
2. Cover materials and equipment, both in storage and during construction, in such a
manner that no finished surfaces will be damaged, marred, or splattered with water,
foam, plaster, or paint.
3. Keep moving parts clean and dry.
4. Replace or refinish damaged materials or equipment, including faceplates of panels
and switchboard sections, as part of the WORK.
E. Provide starters shall be in accordance with the requirements of Section 260515 – Local
Control Stations and Miscellaneous Electrical Devices.
3.2 CORE DRILLING
A. Perform core drilling as required for the installation of raceways through concrete walls
and floors.
B. Base the locations of floor penetrations, as may be required, on field conditions.
C. Verify exact core drilling locations based on equipment actually furnished as well as
exact field placement.
D. To the extent possible, identify the existence and locations of encased raceways and
other piping in existing walls and floors with the OWNER prior to any core drilling
activities.
E. Repair damage to encased conduits, wiring, and piping as part of the WORK.
3.3 CONCRETE HOUSEKEEPING PADS
A. Provide concrete housekeeping pads for indoor floor-standing electrical equipment.
B. Extend housekeeping pads for equipment, including future units, above the surrounding
finished floor or grade to match the existing pads, unless otherwise indicated.
3.4 EQUIPMENT ANCHORING
A. Floor-supported, wall, or ceiling-hung equipment and conductors shall be anchored in
place by methods that will meet seismic requirements in the area where the Project is
located.
STANTEC – 06152020 (FINAL) ELECTRICAL WORK, GENERAL
W-354 - TRIANGLE FLOW CONTROL VALVE PAGE 26 00 00 -12
B. Provide wall-mounted panels that weigh more than 200 pounds or that are within 18
inches of the floor with fabricated steel support pedestals.
C. If the supported equipment is a panel or cabinet enclosed within removable side plates,
match supported equipment in physical appearance and dimensions.
D. Manufacturer's Recommendations
1. Anchoring methods and leveling criteria in the printed recommendations of the
equipment manufacturers are a part of the WORK of this Contract.
2. Submit such recommendations as Shop Drawings as indicated.
3.5 EQUIPMENT IDENTIFICATION
A. Provide nameplates for panelboards, control and instrumentation panels, starters,
switches, and pushbutton stations.
B. In addition to nameplates, equip control devices with standard collar-type legend plates.
C. Identify control devices within enclosures as indicated and similar to the subparagraph
above.
D. Provide suitable inscribed finish plates for toggle switches that control loads out of sight
of switches and for multi-switch locations of more than 2 switches.
E. Use equipment names and tag numbers, where indicated, on nameplates.
F. Provide typewritten circuit directories for panelboards, that accurately reflect the outlets
connected to each circuit.
G. Terminal Blocks
1. Label termination points on terminal blocks by identifiers on the blocks.
2. Provide identifiers that have been preprinted by the terminal manufacturer or
custom-printed.
3. Hand-lettered markers will not be accepted.
H. Tag distribution equipment, stand-alone disconnects, starters, and VFDs with
appropriate arc-flash labels.
3.6 CLEANING
A. Before final acceptance, thoroughly clean the electrical WORK of cement, plaster, and
other materials.
B. Remove temporary tags, markers, stickers, and the like.
C. Remove oil and grease spots with a non-flammable cleaning solvent, by carefully wiping
and scraping cracks and corners.
D. Apply touch-up paint to scratches on panels and cabinets.
STANTEC – 06152020 (FINAL) ELECTRICAL WORK, GENERAL
W-354 - TRIANGLE FLOW CONTROL VALVE PAGE 26 00 00 -13
E. Vacuum-clean electrical cabinets and enclosures.
F. Clean luminaires inside and out.
G. Dispose cleaning debris and refuse off-Site.
END OF SECTION
STANTEC – 06152020 (FINAL) INDUSTRIAL CONTROL PANELS
W-354 - TRIANGLE FLOW CONTROL VALVE PAGE 26 05 15 - 1
SECTION 26 05 15 – INDUSTRIAL CONTROL PANELS
PART 1 -- GENERAL
1.1 THE SUMMARY
A. The CONTRACTOR shall provide complete industrial control panels and/or local control
stations as indicated herein or in other Sections of the Specifications. The stations shall
be designed to provide the sequence of operation in the Specications and Drawings.
B. This section also specifies miscellaneous electrical devices used throughout this project.
These devices are not limited to use within industrial control panels or local control
stations.
1.2 REFERENCE SPECIFICATIONS, CODES, AND STANDARDS
A. Industrial control panels and/or local control stations shall comply with THE SUMMARYs
of NEC (including Article 409), NEMA, and UL.
1.3 CONTRACTOR SUBMITTALS
A. Furnish Shop Drawings in accordance with General Conditions Section 2.04 – Shop
Drawings and 26 00 00 – Electrical Work, General.
1. Ladder diagrams and written descriptions explaining ladder diagram operation and
system operation.
2. Include catalog cuts of control equipment including enclosures, overcurrent devices,
relays, pilot devices, terminations, and wire troughs.
PART 2 -- PRODUCTS
2.1 GENERAL
A. The CONTRACTOR shall provide the equipment, panels and stations to satisfy the
functional requirements in the relevant mechanical equipment and Instrumentation and
Control specifications and the Electrical Elementary Schematics. Each panel and station
shall be fabricated with UL labeled components. Equipment not specifically indicated as
being WORK of other Sections shall be provided under this Section. All equipment,
panels and stations shall be wired under this Section.
B. The controls shall be 120 V maximum. Where the electrical power supply is 240 V,
single phase or 480 V, 3 phase, the station shall be provided with a fused control power
transformer. Control conductors shall be provided in accordance with Section 26 05 19
– Wire and Cabling.
C. Each panel and/or station shall be provided with identified terminal strips for the
connection of external conductors. The CONTRACTOR shall provide sufficient terminal
blocks to connect 25 percent additional conductors for future use. Termination points
shall be identified in accordance with Shop Drawings. The panels and/or stations shall
be the source of power for all 120 VAC solenoid valves interconnected with the panels
and/or stations. Equipment associated with the panels and/or stations shall be ready for
service after connection of conductors to equipment, controls, panels and/or stations.
STANTEC – 06152020 (FINAL) INDUSTRIAL CONTROL PANELS
W-354 - TRIANGLE FLOW CONTROL VALVE PAGE 26 05 15 - 2
D. Wiring to door-mounted devices shall be extra flexible and anchored to doors using wire
anchors cemented in place. Exposed terminals of door-mounted devices shall be
guarded to prevent accidental personnel contact with energized terminals.
E. Enclosures shall be NEMA rated in accordance with Section 26 00 00.
1. Enclosures shall be freestanding, pedestal-mounted, or equipment skid-mounted, as
indicated. Internal control components shall be mounted on a removable mounting
pan. Mounting pan shall be finished white.
2. Outdoor mounted enclosures shall be provided with thermostatically-controlled
heaters. Heaters shall be operated at ½ rated voltage (240 volt heaters shall be
sized and operated at 120 volts).
3. Provide screened weep holes for draining condensation.
F. Disconnect Switches
1. Heavy duty, fusible, single throw switches shall be rated not less than 65 KA at 480
VAC.
2. Horsepower rated
3. UL listed
4. Padlockable in "Off" position and door interlock
5. Enclosure per area classification in Section 26 00 00 – Electrical Work, General.
6. 480 V, 3-phase, 3-pole (6-pole when used with 2-speed motor).
7. Auxiliary control contact as applicable and where indicated.
8. As manufactured by G.E., Eaton Electrical, Square D, or equal.
G. Identification of panel-mounted devices, conductors, and electrical components shall be
in accordance with Section 26 00 00 – Electrical Work, General.
H. Panel-mounted devices shall be mounted a minimum of 3-feet above finished floor
elevation, but not higher than 6’-6” above finished floor, unless noted otherwise.
2.2 PANEL/STATION COMPONENTS
A. Pushbuttons, selector switches, and pilot lights shall be the heavy-duty, oil-tight type,
sized to 30-mm. Miniature style devices are not acceptable. Devices shall be as
manufactured by General Electric, Eaton Electrical, Square D, or equal.
1. Lens colors shall be red for "run," "open," or "on"; green for "stopped," "closed," or
"off"; and amber for alarm.
2. Pilot lights shall be full voltage, push-to-test, LED cluster type.
3. Provide hazardous location type pilot devices in classified locations.
STANTEC – 06152020 (FINAL) INDUSTRIAL CONTROL PANELS
W-354 - TRIANGLE FLOW CONTROL VALVE PAGE 26 05 15 - 3
B. Where more contacts are shown or required for any type of relay coil, (control relay, time
delay relay, latching relay, etc.), switch, or field device, the CONTRACTOR shall furnish,
install and connect auxiliary relay(s) at no additional cost to the OWNER. Where
interposing relays are required between devices but are not shown on the Contract
Drawings, the CONTRACTOR shall furnish, install and connect interposing relay(s) at no
additional cost to the OWNER.
C. Relays shall be 3 PDT with 10 amp contacts, indicating light, plug-in type utilizing
rectangular blades and provided with sockets for screw-type termination and hold-down
clips. Where more than 3 contacts are shown or required for a relay coil additional
relay(s) shall be furnished installed and connected at no additional cost to the OWNER.
Miniature or compact relays are not acceptable. Relays shall be as manufactured by
Square D 8501 Type KU, Eaton Electric Type D5, Allen-Bradley Bulletin 700 Type
HB, Potter Brumfield, or equal.
D. Latching relays shall be 2PDT with 10 amp contacts, indicating light, plug-in type utilizing
rectangular blades and provided with sockets for screw-type termination and hold-down
clips. Where more than 2 contacts are shown or required for a relay coil additional
relay(s) or auxiliary relay(s) shall be furnished installed and connected at no additional
cost to the OWNER. Relays shall be as manufactured by Square D Class 8501 Type
KL, Eaton Electric Type MR, Allen-Bradley Bulletin 700 Type HJ, Potter &
Brumfield, or equal.
E. Time delay relays shall be electronic, combination on delay, off delay, interval, and one-
shot (selectable) with adjustable timing ranges plug-in type utilizing rectangular blades
and provided with sockets for screw-type termination and hold-down clips. Time delay
relays shall at least 2PDT with 10 amp contacts. Where more than 2 contacts are
shown or required for a relay coil additional relay(s) or auxiliary relay(s) shall be
furnished installed and connected at no additional cost to the OWNER. Time delay
relays shall be Square D Class 9050 Type JCK, Potter & Brumfield, or equal.
F. Alternator relays shall be 2PDT with 2 amp minimum contacts, with screw-type
termination and hold-down clips (if applicable). Where more than 2 contacts are shown
or required for a relay coil additional relay(s) or auxiliary relay(s) shall be furnished
installed and connected at no additional cost to the OWNER. Miniature or compact
relays are not acceptable. Relays shall be as manufactured by Square D Class 8501
Type SKE, SSAC model ARP, or equal.
G. Elapsed time meters shall be electro-mechanical non-resettable type, read to a
maximum of 99999.9 hours. Input power shall be 120VAC, 60 hertz. Character height
shall be 0.12 inches minimum. Devices relying on battery power will not be accepted.
Elapsed time meters shall be as manufactured by G.E., Eaton Electric, or equal.
H. Magnetic starters shall be:
1. NEMA rated, Size 1 minimum. IEC or dual NEMA/IEC rated type are not
acceptable.
2. FVNR type unless indicated otherwise.
3. Combination starters with magnetic only instantaneous trip circuit breakers such as
Eaton Electrical HMCP, General Electric Mag-Break, or equal. Breakers shall be
rated 65 KA minimum.
STANTEC – 06152020 (FINAL) INDUSTRIAL CONTROL PANELS
W-354 - TRIANGLE FLOW CONTROL VALVE PAGE 26 05 15 - 4
4. Control transformers shall be provided with primary and secondary fuses, 120 V
maximum control voltage. VA rating of transformer shall be based on devices on
the control schematic.
I. Terminal blocks for control wiring shall be of the DIN rail mounting type rated at a
minimum of 600 volt AC and minimum width of 6mm suitable for No. 10 AWG stranded
wire minimum. Terminals shall be the solderless box lug type with pressure plates in
actual contact with the wire to minimize wire breakage. Each terminal shall have a light
colored strip for marking the terminal number or circuit designation. Double high
terminal blocks are not acceptable. All external connections to and from stations shall
terminate on terminal blocks except approved analog signal and communications cables.
Circuit isolating switches and fuse terminals shall include non-conducting pullers which
can be removed with finger alone, no tools required. Terminals shall be Square D
Class 9080 Type M, Eaton Electric Type C383, Allen-Bradley Bulletin 1492 Type H
and U, or equal. Provide 25 percent spare terminals in each station.
J. Digital panel meters shall have 4-20 mA input and shall display the signal in process
units, for water levels and gate positions units shall be feet to 1/100th foot with
adjustable span and offset. 0-100% as a displayed signal shall only be acceptable to
indicate speed. Digital panel meters shall have at a minimum the number of digits
shown on the Contract Drawings, or as required by the Specifications or Control
Strategies. LED displays shall have a minimum of 0.56” character height and selectable
decimal point. Digital panel meters that require external power shall be suitable for 10-
30 VDC, or 120VAC. Contact outputs if required shall be rated at a minimum of 5 amps
at the voltage shown in the drawings. Digital panel meters shall be Red Lion Controls
model DP5P (4 1/2 [99,999] digit), model IMP (4 1/2 [99,999] digit), or model
CUB4LP (3 1/2 [1,999] digit), or equal.
K. Direct current power supplies shall have a precision regulated voltage of 24 volts
nominal. Power supplies shall have an excess rated capacity of 40 percent. Power
supplies shall receive 120 VAC nominal input voltage, input fuse or circuit breaker and
be enclosed on all sides with screw terminals for all user connections. Open power
supplies or ones using soldered terminals shall not be accepted. Power supplies shall
be of the redundant dual type or shall be two power supplies wired in parallel, fully fused
and protected from feeding power into the other power supply. Power supply shall have
a relay output for signaling the failure of one of the power supplies. Power supplies shall
be Moore Industries model SMP with SSM, or equal.
2.3 FACTORY TESTING
A. Each panel/station shall be factory assembled and tested for sequence of operation prior
to delivery.
2.4 SPARE PARTS
A. Provide a minimum of 10 percent spare lamps (minimum 2) and one spare lens for each
color pilot lamp in each panel.
STANTEC – 06152020 (FINAL) INDUSTRIAL CONTROL PANELS
W-354 - TRIANGLE FLOW CONTROL VALVE PAGE 26 05 15 - 5
PART 3 -- EXECUTION
3.1 INSTALLATION
A. Panels/stations shall be installed in accordance with in Section 26 00 00 – Electrical
Work, General and in accordance with the manufacturer's recommendations.
B. Panels/stations shall be protected at the site from loss, damage, and the effects of
weather. Panels/stations shall be stored in an indoor, dry location. Heating shall be
provided in areas subject to corrosion and humidity.
C. Panels/station interiors and exteriors shall be cleaned, and coatings shall be touched up
to match original finish upon completion of the WORK.
D. Conduit, conductors, and terminations shall be installed in accordance with Section 26
00 00 – Electrical Work, General.
E. Terminals and fuses for each conductor and ground of a power feed or power cable shall
be mounted consecutively next to each other. The horizontal and vertical arrangement
of the positive/hot, negative/neutral and ground terminals shall be consistent in all
stations. Mounting all positive/hot, negative/neutral or ground terminals next to each
other for the convenience of jumpering shall not be acceptable.
F. Spare terminals shall be mounted throughout the entirety of the terminal blocks within
each station. Terminals shall be interspersed to allow for convenient field modifications
in the future. At least one spare terminal shall be mounted below the fuses and
terminals for each a twisted shielded pair or triad cable to allow for simple changes
between loop-powered and self-powered instruments. Mounting all spare terminals next
to each other in one location in the station shall not be acceptable.
3.2 FIELD TESTING
A. Each panel/station shall be tested again for functional operation in the field after the
connection of external conductors and prior to equipment startup.
END OF SECTION
THIS PAGE LEFT BLANK INTENTIONALLY
STANTEC – 06152020 (FINAL) WIRE AND CABLING
W-354 - TRIANGLE FLOW CONTROL VALVE PAGE 26 05 19 - 1
SECTION 26 05 19 - WIRE AND CABLING
PART 1 -- GENERAL
1.1 THE SUMMARY
A. The CONTRACTOR shall provide wire and cable, complete and operable, in accordance
with the Contract Documents.
B. In the event that motors provided are larger horsepower than the motors indicated,
raceways, conductors, starters, overload elements, and branch circuit protectors shall be
revised as necessary to control and protect the increased motor horsepower in
accordance with Section 26 05 10 - Electric Motors. Revisions are part of the WORK of
this Section.
1.2 CONTRACTOR SUBMITTALS
A. The CONTRACTOR shall submit Shop Drawings in accordance with General Conditions
Section 2.04 – Shop Drawings and Section 26 00 00 - Electrical Work, General. Submit
test results in accordance with this section and 26 01 26 Electrical Tests.
PART 2 -- PRODUCTS
2.1 GENERAL
A. Conductors, include grounding conductors, shall be stranded copper. Aluminum
conductor wire and cable will not be permitted. Insulation shall bear the UL label, the
manufacturer's trademark, and identify the type, voltage, and conductor size.
Conductors except flexible cords and cables, fixture wires, and conductors that form an
integral part of equipment such as motors and controllers shall conform to the
requirements of Article 310 of the National Electric Code, latest edition, for current
carrying capacity. Flexible cords and cables shall conform to Article 400, and fixture
wires shall conform to Article 402. Wiring shall have wire markers at each end.
2.2 LOW VOLTAGE WIRE AND CABLE
A. Power and Lighting Wire
1. Wire rated for 600 volts in duct or conduit for power and lighting circuits shall be
Class B Type VW-1 XHHW or XHHW-2 cross-linked polyethylene conforming to UL-
44 - UL Standard for Thermoset-Insulated Wires and Cables. THHN/THWN wire
shall not be permitted to be used for any power or control wiring in this project,
except as specifically permitted within control panels per Section 40 95 13 - Control
Panels.
2. Conductors for feeders as defined in Article 100 of the NEC shall be sized to
prevent a voltage drop exceeding 3 percent at the farthest outlet of power, heating,
and lighting loads, or combinations of such loads, and where the maximum total
voltage drop on both feeders and branch circuits to the farthest connected load does
not exceed five percent.
3. Conductors for branch circuits as defined in Article 100 of the NEC shall be sized to
prevent voltage drop exceeding 3 percent at the farthest connected load or
combinations of such loads and where the maximum total voltage drop on both
STANTEC – 06152020 (FINAL) WIRE AND CABLING
W-354 - TRIANGLE FLOW CONTROL VALVE PAGE 26 05 19 - 2
feeders and branch circuits to the farthest connected load does not exceed five
percent.
4. Wiring for 600 volt class power and lighting shall be as manufactured by Okonite,
General Cable, Southwire, or equal.
B. Control Wire
1. Control wire in duct or conduit shall be the same type as power and lighting wire
indicated above.
2. Control wiring shall be No.14 AWG.
3. Control wires inside panels and cabinets shall be machine tool grade type MTW, UL
approved, rated for 90 degrees C at dry locations, and be as manufactured by
American, General Cable, or equal.
C. Instrumentation Cable
1. Instrumentation cable shall be rated at 600 volts.
2. Individual conductors shall be No. 16 AWG stranded, tinned copper. Insulation shall
be color coded PVC/nylon: black-white for 2 conductor cable and black-red-white
for 3 conductor cable.
3. Instrumentation cables shall be composed of the individual conductors, an
aluminum polyester foil shield, a No. 22 or larger AWG stranded tinned copper drain
wire, and a PVC outer jacket with a thickness of 0.047-inches.
4. Single pair, No. 16 AWG, twisted, shielded cable shall be Belden Part No. 3090A,
similar by General Cable, or equal.
5. Single triad, No. 16 AWG, twisted, shielded cable shall be Belden Part No. 3091A,
similar by General Cable, or equal.
2.3 CABLE SPLICES AND TERMINATIONS
A. Compression connectors shall be Burndy Hi Lug, Thomas & Betts Sta-Kon, or equal.
Threaded connectors shall be split bolt type of high strength copper alloy. Pressure
type, twist-on connectors (wire nuts) will not be acceptable.
B. Pre-insulated fork tongue lugs shall be Thomas & Betts, Burndy, or equal.
C. General purpose insulating tape shall be Scotch No. 33, Plymouth Slip-knot, or equal.
High temperature tape shall be polyvinyl as manufactured by Plymouth, 3M, or equal.
D. Labels for coding 600 volt wiring shall be computer printable or pre-printed, self-
laminating, self-sticking, as manufactured by W.H. Brady, 3M, or equal.
PART 3 -- EXECUTION
3.1 GENERAL
A. The CONTRACTOR shall provide, terminate and test all power, control, and
instrumentation conductors.
STANTEC – 06152020 (FINAL) WIRE AND CABLING
W-354 - TRIANGLE FLOW CONTROL VALVE PAGE 26 05 19 - 3
B. The CONTRACTOR shall, as a minimum, provide the number of control wires listed in
the conduit schedule or on the Contract Drawings. Excess wires shall be treated as
spares.
3.2 INSTALLATION
A. Conductors shall not be pulled into raceway until raceway has been cleared of moisture
and debris.
B. Pulling tensions on raceway cables shall be within the limits recommended by the cable
manufacturer. Wire pulling lubricant, where needed, shall be UL approved.
C. Instrumentation wire shall not be run in the same raceway with power and control wiring
except where specifically indicated.
D. Wire in panels, cabinets, and wireways shall be neatly grouped using nylon tie straps,
and shall be fanned out to terminals.
E. Single conductor cable in cable trays shall be No. 1/0 or larger and shall be of a type
listed and marked for use in cable trays. Tray cable smaller than 1/0 shall be multi-
conductor, with outer jacket.
3.3 SPLICES AND TERMINATIONS
A. General
1. Wire taps and splices shall be properly taped and insulated according to their
respective classes.
2. In general, there shall be no cable splices. If splices are necessary, the cables shall
be spliced using submersible cable splices, suitable for continuous submergence.
Splices in underground manholes and pullboxes may be made only with the
approval of the ENGINEER.
3. Stranded conductors shall be terminated directly on equipment box lugs making
sure that conductor strands are confined within lug. Use forked-tongue lugs where
equipment box lugs have not been provided.
4. Excess control and instrumentation wires shall be long enough to terminate at any
terminal block in the enclosure, be properly taped, be identified with origin, and be
neatly coiled.
B. Control Wire and Cable
1. Control conductors shall be spliced or terminated only at the locations indicated and
only on terminal strips or terminal lugs of vendor furnished equipment.
2. In motor control centers, and control panels, control wire and spare wire shall be
terminated to terminal strips.
3. The CONTRACTOR shall provide as a minimum the number of control wires listed
in the conduit schedule or as indicated in the Contract Documents. Excess wires
shall be treated as spares.
C. Instrumentation Wire and Cable
STANTEC – 06152020 (FINAL) WIRE AND CABLING
W-354 - TRIANGLE FLOW CONTROL VALVE PAGE 26 05 19 - 4
1. Shielded instrumentation cables shall be grounded at one end only, preferably the
receiving end on a 4 - 20 mA system.
2. Two and 3 conductor shielded cables installed in conduit runs which exceed
available standard cable lengths may be spliced in pullboxes with the prior approval
of the ENGINEER. Such cable runs shall have only one splice per conductor.
D. Power Wire and Cable
1. 120/208-volt, 120/240-volt, and 480/277-volt branch circuit conductors may be
spliced in suitable fittings at locations determined by the CONTRACTOR. Cables
rated above 2,000 volts shall be spliced or terminated only at equipment terminals
indicated.
2. Splices to motor leads in motor terminal boxes shall be wrapped with mastic
material to form a mold and then shall be taped with a minimum of 2 layers of
varnished cambric tape over-taped with a minimum of 2 layers of high temperature
tape.
3. Shielded power cable shall be terminated with pre-assembled stress cones in a
manner approved by the cable and terminal manufacturer. The CONTRACTOR
shall submit the proposed termination procedure as a Shop Drawing.
4. VFD shielded power cables shall have the shield grounded at all locations where it
is exposed.
3.4 CABLE IDENTIFICATION
A. General: Wire and cable shall be identified for proper control of circuits and equipment
and to reduce maintenance effort. Identification shall be installed at every termination
point.
B. Identification Numbers: The CONTRACTOR shall assign to each control and
instrumentation wire and cable a unique identification number. Numbers shall be
assigned to conductors having common terminals and shall be shown on "as built"
drawings. Identification numbers shall appear within 3-inches of conductor terminals.
"Control Conductor" shall be defined as any conductor used for alarm, annunciator, or
signal purposes.
1. Multiconductor cable shall be assigned a number which shall be attached to the
cable at intermediate pull boxes and at stub-up locations beneath free-standing
equipment. It is expected that the cable number shall form a part of the individual
wire number. Individual control conductors and instrumentation cable shall be
identified at pull points as described above. The instrumentation cable numbers
shall incorporate the loop numbers assigned in the Contract Documents.
2. 120/208-volt system feeder cables and branch circuit conductors shall be color
coded as follows: Phase A - black, Phase B - red, Phase C - blue, and Neutral -
white. The 120/240-volt system conductors shall be color coded as follows: Line 1 -
Black, Line 2 - Red, and Neutral - White. The 480/277-volt system conductors shall
be color coded as follows: Phase A - Brown, Phase B - Orange, Phase C - Yellow,
and Neutral - Gray. Color coding tape shall be used where colored insulation is not
available. Branch circuit switch shall be yellow. Insulated ground wire shall be
green, and neutral shall be gray. Color coding and phasing shall be consistent
throughout the Site, but bars at panelboards, switchboards, and motor control
STANTEC – 06152020 (FINAL) WIRE AND CABLING
W-354 - TRIANGLE FLOW CONTROL VALVE PAGE 26 05 19 - 5
centers shall be connected Phase A-B-C, top to bottom, or left to right, facing
connecting lugs. Any phase changes necessary for proper rotation shall be made at
the driven equipment and not in the local disconnect.
3. General purpose AC control cable shall be red. General purpose DC control cable
shall be blue.
4. Spare cable shall be terminated on terminal screws and shall be identified with a
unique number as well as with destination.
5. Terminal strips shall be identified by computer printable, cloth, self-sticking marker
strips attached under the terminal strip.
3.5 TESTING
A. Cable Assembly and Testing: Cable assembly and testing shall comply with
applicable requirements of ICEA Publication No. S-95-658/NEMA WC70 - Ethylene-
Propylene-Rubber Insulated Wire and Cable for the Transmission and Distribution of
Electrical Energy. Factory test results shall be submitted in accordance with Section 01
33 00 - Contractor Submittals, prior to shipment of cable. The following field tests (in
addition to the tests specified in Section 26 01 26 - Electrical Tests) shall be the
minimum requirements:
1. Insulation resistance testing, using a DC megohmeter, shall be performed on cables
operating at more than 2,000 volts to ground. Time-resistance readings shall be
taken and recorded at intervals of 30 seconds and one minute. Time-resistance
voltage levels shall be per the cable manufacturer's recommendations.
2. Power cable rated at 600 volts shall be tested for insulation resistance between
phases and from each phase to a ground using a megohmeter.
3. Field testing shall be done after cable is installed in the raceways.
4. Cables failing the tests shall be replaced with a new cable or be repaired. Repair
methods shall be as recommended by the cable manufacturer and shall be
performed by persons certified by the industry.
B. Continuity Test: Control and instrumentation cable shall be tested for continuity,
polarity, undesirable ground, and origination. Such tests shall be performed after
installation and prior to placing cable in service.
- END OF SECTION -
THIS PAGE LEFT BLANK INTENTIONALLY
STANTEC – 06152020 (FINAL) GROUNDING
W-354 - TRIANGLE FLOW CONTROL VALVE PAGE 26 05 26 - 1
SECTION 26 05 26 – GROUNDING
PART 1 -- GENERAL
1.1 THE REQUIREMENT
A. Provide the electrical grounding system, complete and operable, as indicated in
accordance with the Contract Documents.
B. The requirements of Section 26 00 00 – Electrical Work, General apply to this Section.
C. Single Manufacturer
1. Like products shall be the end product of one manufacturer in order to achieve
standardization of appearance, operation, maintenance, spare parts, and
manufacturer's services.
1.2 CONTRACTOR SUBMITTALS
A. Furnish submittals in accordance with the requirements of General Conditions Section
2.04 – Shop Drawings and Section 26 00 00 – Electrical Work, General.
B. Shop Drawings
1. Submit manufacturer's product information for connections, clamps, and grounding
system components, showing compliance with the requirements of this Section.
PART 2 -- PRODUCTS
2.1 GENERAL
A. Components of the grounding electrode system shall be manufactured in accordance
with UL 467 - Standard for Safety Grounding and Bonding Equipment, and shall conform
to the applicable requirements of National Electrical Code Article 250 and local codes.
2.2 GROUNDING SYSTEM
A. Conductors shall be No. 1/0 unless indicated otherwise.
B. Exposed Connectors
1. Exposed grounding connectors shall be of the compression type (connector-to-
cable), constructed of high-copper alloy, and manufactured specifically for the
particular grounding application.
2. The connectors shall be FCI-Burndy, O.Z. Gedney, or equal.
C. Use grounding clamps to bond each separately-derived system to the grounding
electrode conductors.
D. Equipment Grounding Circuit Conductors
1. The conductors shall be the same type and insulation as the load circuit conductors.
STANTEC – 06152020 (FINAL) GROUNDING
W-354 - TRIANGLE FLOW CONTROL VALVE PAGE 26 05 26 - 2
2. The minimum size shall be as outlined in Table 250.122 of the National Electrical
Code, unless indicated otherwise.
3. Metallic conduit systems shall have an equipment grounding wires as well as being
equipment grounding conductors themselves.
E. Grounding Materials Manufacturer, or Equal
1. Copperweld
2. Thermoweld
3. FCI-Burndy
PART 3 -- EXECUTION
3.1 GROUNDING
A. Provide a separate grounding conductor, securely grounded in each raceway
independent of raceway material.
B. Provide a separate grounding conductor for each motor and connect at motor box.
C. Do not use bolts for securing the motor box to the frame or the cover for grounding
connectors.
D. Sizes shall be as indicated on the Conduit Schedule and in accordance with NEC Article
250.
E. Route the conductors inside the raceway.
F. Provide a grounding-type bushing for secondary feeder conduits that originate from the
secondary section of each MCC section, switchboard, or panelboard.
G. Individually bond the raceway to the ground bus in the secondary section.
H. Provide a green insulated wire as grounding jumper from the ground screw to a box
grounding screw, and, for grounding type devices, to the equipment grounding
conductor.
I. Provide a separate grounding conductor in each individual raceway for parallel feeders.
J. Interconnect the secondary switchgear MCC or panelboard neutral bus to the ground
bus in the secondary switchgear compartment only at the service entrance point or after
a transformer.
K. Measure ground impedance in accordance with IEEE STD 81 after installation but
before connecting the electrode to the remaining grounding system.
L. Low Voltage Grounded System (600V or less)
1. A low-voltage grounded system is defined as a system where the local power supply
is a transformer, with the transformer secondary grounded.
STANTEC – 06152020 (FINAL) GROUNDING
W-354 - TRIANGLE FLOW CONTROL VALVE PAGE 26 05 26 - 3
2. Grounding system connections for a premises-wired system supplied by a grounded
AC service shall be provided with a grounding electrode connector connected to the
grounded service conductor at each service, in accordance with the NEC.
3. The grounded circuit conductor shall not be used for grounding non-current-carrying
parts of equipment, raceways, and other enclosures except where specifically listed
and permitted by the NEC.
M. Shield Grounding
1. Shielded instrumentation cable shall have its shield grounded at one end only
unless the Shop Drawings indicate that the shield will be grounded at both ends.
2. The grounding point shall be at the control panel or at the receiving end of the signal
carried by the cable.
3. The termination of the shield drain wire shall be on its own terminal screw.
4. Jumper together the terminal screws, using manufactured terminal block jumpers or
a No. 14 green insulated conductor.
5. Connect the ground bus via a green No. 12 conductor to the main ground bus for
the panel.
- END OF SECTION -
THIS PAGE LEFT BLANK INTENTIONALLY
STANTEC – 06152020 (FINAL) ELECTRICAL RACEWAY SYSTEMS
W-354 - TRIANGLE FLOW CONTROL VALVE PAGE 26 05 33 - 1
SECTION 26 05 33 - ELECTRICAL RACEWAY SYSTEMS
PART 1 -- GENERAL
1.1 THE SUMMARY
A. Provide electrical raceway systems, complete and in place, as indicated in accordance
with the Contract Documents.
B. In the event that individual equipment loads provided are larger than indicated in the
Contract Documents, revise raceways, conductors, starters, overload elements, and
branch circuit protectors as necessary in order to control and protect the increased
connected load in conformance to NEC requirements as part of the WORK.
1.2 CONTRACTOR SUBMITTALS
A. Furnish submittals in accordance with General Conditions Section 2.04 – Dhop
Drawings and Section 26 00 00 – Electrical Work, General.
B. Shop Drawings
1. Submit complete catalog cuts of raceways, fittings, boxes, supports, and mounting
hardware, marked where applicable to show proposed materials and finishes.
PART 2 -- PRODUCTS
2.1 GENERAL
A. Pull and junction boxes, fittings, and other indicated enclosures that are dedicated to the
raceway system shall comply with THE SUMMARYs of this Section.
2.2 CONDUIT
A. Rigid Galvanized Steel (RGS) Conduit
1. Provide rigid steel conduit manufactured from mild steel, hot-dip galvanized inside
and out.
2. Provide rigid steel conduit manufactured in accordance with NEMA C80.1 –
Electrical Rigid Steel Conduit, and UL-6 – Electrical Rigid Metal Conduit - Steel.
3. Manufacturer, or Equal
a. Allied Tube & Conduit
b. Triangle
c. Wheatland Tube
B. Rigid Non-Metallic Conduit
1. Provide rigid non-metallic conduit manufactured from Schedule 40 PVC, as
indicated, and sunlight-resistant.
STANTEC – 06152020 (FINAL) ELECTRICAL RACEWAY SYSTEMS
W-354 - TRIANGLE FLOW CONTROL VALVE PAGE 26 05 33 - 2
2. Provide rigid non-metallic conduit manufactured in accordance with NEMA TC-2 -
Electrical Plastic Tubing and Conduit, and UL-651 - Standard for Rigid Non-metallic
Conduit.
3. Manufacturer, or Equal
a. Carlon
b. Cantex
C. Rigid PVC-Coated Galvanized Steel (RPGS) Conduit
1. The conduit shall meet THE SUMMARYs for RGS conduit as indicated above.
2. Bond a PVC coating to the outer surface of the galvanized conduit.
3. Ensure that the bond between the coating and the conduit surface is greater than
the tensile strength of the coating.
4. Provide the inside surfaces and threads of the conduit with a 2-mil urethane coating.
5. Provide a PVC coating thickness not less than 40 mils.
6. The PVC-coated RGS shall be manufactured in accordance with the following
standards:
a. UL-6
b. ANSI C80.1
c. NEMA RN1 - PVC Externally Coated Galvanized Rigid Steel Conduit and
Intermediate Metal Conduit
7. Manufacturer, or Equal
a. Robroy Industries, Perma-Cote
b. Robroy Industries, Plasti-Bond RedH2OT
c. Robroy Industries, Korkap
d. Thomas & Betts, Ocal Blue
D. Liquid-Tight Flexible Conduit
1. Provide liquid-tight flexible conduit constructed of a flexible galvanized metal core
with a sunlight-resistant thermoplastic outer jacket.
2. Provide liquid-tight flexible conduit manufactured in accordance with THE
SUMMARYs of UL-360 - Steel Conduits, Liquid-Tight Flexible.
3. Manufacturer, or Equal
a. Anaconda, Sealtite
STANTEC – 06152020 (FINAL) ELECTRICAL RACEWAY SYSTEMS
W-354 - TRIANGLE FLOW CONTROL VALVE PAGE 26 05 33 - 3
b. Electriflex, Liquatite
2.3 FITTINGS AND BOXES
A. General
1. For use with metallic conduit, provide cast and malleable iron fittings of the threaded
type with five full threads.
2. Fittings and Boxes
a. Provide fittings and boxes with neoprene gaskets and non-magnetic stainless
steel screws.
b. Attach covers by means of holes tapped into the body of the fitting.
c. Covers for fittings attached by means of clips or clamps will not be accepted.
3. Provide boxes larger than standard cast or malleable types manufactured of Type
304 or Type 316 stainless steel, NEMA 4X.
4. Terminations
a. In outdoor areas, terminate conduit in rain-tight hubs as manufactured by
Myers, O.Z. Gedney, Appleton, or equal.
b. In other than outdoor areas, provide sealed locknuts and bushings.
5. Hazardous Locations
a. In hazardous locations, provide conduit, fittings, and boxes suitable for the
indicated Class and Division.
b. Provide conduits terminated in NEMA 7 boxes with a male bushing, Adalet
Type PEM, or equal, inside the box.
B. Cast Aluminum Fittings and Boxes
1. Provide cast aluminum boxes and fittings with less than 0.40 percent copper
content, and use with aluminum conduit.
2. Manufacturer, or Equal
a. O.Z. Gedney
b. Appleton
c. Crouse-Hinds
C. Malleable Iron Fittings and Boxes
1. For use with galvanized steel conduit, provide fittings and boxes constructed of
malleable iron or gray-iron alloy with zinc plating.
STANTEC – 06152020 (FINAL) ELECTRICAL RACEWAY SYSTEMS
W-354 - TRIANGLE FLOW CONTROL VALVE PAGE 26 05 33 - 4
2. Manufacturer, or Equal
a. O.Z. Gedney
b. Crouse-Hinds
c. Appleton
D. PVC Fittings and Boxes
1. For use with rigid non-metallic conduit, provide fittings manufactured of solvent-
welded PVC.
2. Provide boxes manufactured of PVC or fiberglass reinforced polyester (FRP).
3. Manufacturer, or Equal
a. Carlon
b. Crouse-Hinds
c. Hoffman
4. Provide welding solvent as required for the installation of non-metallic conduit and
fittings.
E. PVC-Coated Fittings
1. For use with PVC-coated RGS, provide PVC-coated coated that are the products of
the same manufacturer as the conduit.
2. Provide male and female threads and internal surfaces with a 2-mil urethane
coating.
F. Stainless Steel Boxes
1. Provide stainless steel boxes with PVC-coated RGS conduit and where indicated.
2. Provide NEMA 4X stainless steel boxes, constructed of Type 304 or 316 stainless
steel.
3. Provide stainless steel of a minimum of 14-gauge thickness, with a brushed finish.
4. Door Hinges
a. Provide doors with full-length stainless steel piano hinges.
b. Non-hinged boxes will not be accepted.
5. Manufacturer, or Equal
a. Hoffman
b. Rohn
STANTEC – 06152020 (FINAL) ELECTRICAL RACEWAY SYSTEMS
W-354 - TRIANGLE FLOW CONTROL VALVE PAGE 26 05 33 - 5
c. Hammond
G. Sheet Steel Boxes
1. Sheet steel boxes shall be galvanized steel outlet and switch boxes.
2. Manufacturer, or Equal
a. Raco
b. Steel City
c. Appleton Electric
2.4 WIREWAY
A. General
1. Provide wireway of the lay-in type and NEMA-rated for the area in which it is to be
installed in accordance with THE SUMMARYs of Section 26 00 00 – Electrical
Work, General.
2. Separate power, control, signal and communications cables by grounded metallic
dividers in wireways or run in separate wireways.
B. Fittings and Covers
1. Provide fittings and sections with non-magnetic stainless steel screws.
2. Attach covers by hinges and clamps to the bodies.
3. Covers attached by means of clips or screws will not be accepted.
4. Provide covers and bodies constructed of aluminum or minimum 14-gauge steel.
C. Grounding
1. Ground the steel and aluminum wireway bodies.
2. Provide steel dividers with steel wireways or aluminum dividers with aluminum
wireways, and ground by means of an individual grounding conductor.
3. Non-metallic dividers will not be accepted.
D. Terminations
1. In outdoor areas, terminate conduit in rain-tight hubs as manufactured by Myers,
O.Z. Gedney, or equal.
PART 3 -- EXECUTION
3.1 GENERAL
A. Run wiring in raceway unless indicated otherwise.
STANTEC – 06152020 (FINAL) ELECTRICAL RACEWAY SYSTEMS
W-354 - TRIANGLE FLOW CONTROL VALVE PAGE 26 05 33 - 6
B. Install raceways between equipment as indicated.
C. Provide raceway systems that are electrically and mechanically complete before
conductors are installed.
D. Bends and Offsets
1. Provide bends and offsets that are smooth and symmetrical, and accomplished with
tools designed for this purpose.
2. Provide factory elbows wherever possible.
E. Combined Raceways shall not be allowed.
1. In general, combine only raceways containing the same type (control, signal, and
the like) and voltage of conductors/cables, or dedicated conduits from one source to
one device/equipment, in accordance with the NEC.
2. Permission from the ENGINEER shall not relieve the CONTRACTOR of
responsibility to meet national, state and local requirements.
3. Do not combine wiring for redundant systems into single raceways.
F. Routing
1. Where raceway routings are indicated, follow those routings to the extent possible.
2. Where raceways are indicated but routing is not indicated, such as home runs or on
conduit developments and schedules, raceway routing shall be the
CONTRACTOR's choice and provided in strict accordance with the NEC as well as
customary installation practice.
3. Provide the raceway encased, exposed, concealed, or under-floor as indicated,
except conceal conduit in finished areas unless specifically indicated otherwise.
4. Adjust routings in order to avoid obstructions.
G. Coordination
1. Coordinate between trades prior to installing the raceways.
2. The lack of such coordination shall not be justification for extra compensation, and
any costs for removal and re-installation to resolve conflicts shall be part of the
Contract Price.
3. Support wireways in accordance with the manufacturer's recommendations for the
seismic requirements indicated in Section 26 00 00 – Electrical Work, General.
H. Provide cable tray anchoring that meets or exceeds the manufacturer's
recommendations for the seismic zone indicated in Section 26 00 00 – Electrical Work,
General.
STANTEC – 06152020 (FINAL) ELECTRICAL RACEWAY SYSTEMS
W-354 - TRIANGLE FLOW CONTROL VALVE PAGE 26 05 33 - 7
I. Install exposed raceways parallel or perpendicular to structural beams.
J. Expansion Fittings
1. Install expansion fittings with external bonding jumpers wherever exposed raceways
cross building expansion joints.
2. Install expansion/deflection fittings where conduit movement is expected in more
than one dimension, and where conduits transition out of structures in locations
where differential settlement may occur.
3. Encased Expansion Fittings
a. Install encased expansion fittings wherever encased conduits cross building
expansion joints.
b. Deflection type fittings shall not be required for encased conduits crossing an
expansion joint within a single structure.
4. Provide expansion and expansion/deflection fittings constructed of the same
material as the raceway to which they are installed.
K. Install expansion fittings with bonding jumpers wherever raceways cross building
expansion joints.
L. Install exposed raceways at least 1/2 inch from walls or ceilings except that at locations
above finished grade where damp conditions do not prevail, install exposed raceways at
least 1/4 inch from the face of walls or ceilings by the use of clamp backs or struts.
M. Wherever contact with concrete or dissimilar metals can produce galvanic corrosion of
equipment, provide a means of suitable insulation in order to prevent such corrosion.
3.2 CONDUIT
A. Provide exposed conduit manufactured of rigid aluminum or galvanized steel, except as
follows and unless indicated otherwise:
1. In areas with chlorine or hydrofluosilicic acid, provide Schedule 80 PVC conduit.
2. In areas containing lime or ferric chloride, provide Schedule 80 PVC conduit.
3. In Class I, Div I or Div II hazardous locations, provide rigid aluminum conduit.
4. For conduit containing only grounding system bonding conductors, provide
Schedule 80 PVC conduit.
B. Power conduit encased in concrete shall be constructed of Schedule 40 PVC.
C. Analog control or instrumentation conduit shall be RGS.
D. Concrete Encasement
1. Where PVC or RGS conduit is stubbed up from a concrete encasement, provide a
PVC-coated RGS elbow.
STANTEC – 06152020 (FINAL) ELECTRICAL RACEWAY SYSTEMS
W-354 - TRIANGLE FLOW CONTROL VALVE PAGE 26 05 33 - 8
2. The conduit shall emerge from the concrete in a direction perpendicular to the
surface whenever possible.
3. Do not encase conduit in the bottom floor slab below grade.
E. Size
1. Provide exposed conduit of 3/4-inch minimum trade size.
2. Provide encased conduit of one-inch minimum trade size.
F. Install supports at distances required by the NEC.
G. Concrete cover for conduit and fittings shall not be less than 1-1/2 inches for concrete
exposed to earth or weather, or less than 3/4 inch for concrete not exposed to weather
or in contact with the ground.
H. Penetrations
1. Provide conduit passing through walls or floors with plastic sleeves.
2. Perform core drilling in accordance with THE SUMMARYs of Section 26 00 00 –
Electrical Work, General.
3. Conduits passing through a slab, wall, or beam shall not significantly impair the
strength of the construction.
I. Conduits embedded within a slab, wall, or beam (other than those merely passing
through) shall meet the following requirements:
1. Conduits with their fittings embedded within a column shall not displace greater than
4 percent of the gross area of cross section;
2. Conduits shall not be larger in outside dimension than 1/3 the overall thickness of
the slab, wall, or beam in which it is embedded; and,
3. Conduits shall not be spaced closer than 3 outside diameters on centers.
J. Place the conduit such that cutting, bending, or displacing reinforcement from its proper
location will not be required.
K. Coat threads with a conductive lubricant before assembly.
L. Joints
1. Provide joints that are tight, thoroughly grounded, secure, and free of obstructions in
the pipe.
2. Adequately ream the conduit in order to prevent damage to the wires and cables
inside.
3. Use strap-wrenches and vises to install the conduit, in order to prevent wrench
marks on the conduit.
STANTEC – 06152020 (FINAL) ELECTRICAL RACEWAY SYSTEMS
W-354 - TRIANGLE FLOW CONTROL VALVE PAGE 26 05 33 - 9
4. Replace conduit with wrench marks.
M. Slope
1. Wherever possible, slope the conduit runs to drain at one or both ends of the run.
2. Wherever conduit enters a substructure below grade, slope the conduit in order to
drain water away from the structure.
3. Take extreme care in order to avoid pockets or depressions in the conduit.
N. Installation of rigid steel conduit though a core-drilled hole in an exterior wall below-
grade shall utilize a sealing device as manufactured by Link Seal, or equal.
O. Connections
1. Make connections to lay-in-type grid lighting fixtures by using flexible metal conduit
not exceeding 4 feet in length.
2. Make connections to motors and other equipment subject to vibration by using
liquid-tight flexible conduit not exceeding 3 feet in length.
3. Provide equipment subject to vibration that is normally provided with wiring leads
with a cast junction box for the make-up of connections.
P. Provide conduit seal fittings at the following locations:
1. in hazardous classified locations, in strict accordance with the NEC; and,
2. in chlorine, ammonia, sulfur dioxide, and hydrofluosilicic acid areas in order to
prevent passage of gases to other areas.
Q. Provide conduit, fittings, and boxes required in hazardous classified areas that are
suitably rated for the area, and provide in strict accordance with NEC requirements.
R. Empty Conduits
1. Tag empty conduits at both ends to indicate the final destination.
2. Where it is not possible to tag the conduit, identify the destination by means of a
durable marking on an adjacent surface.
3. Install a pull-cord in each empty conduit in floors, panels, manholes, equipment, and
the like.
4. Install a removable plug on empty conduits that terminate below grade, in vaults,
manholes, handholes, and junction or pullboxes.
S. Identification of Conduits
1. Identify conduits at ends and at pulling points.
2. Identification shall be the unique conduit number assigned in the Contract
Documents.
STANTEC – 06152020 (FINAL) ELECTRICAL RACEWAY SYSTEMS
W-354 - TRIANGLE FLOW CONTROL VALVE PAGE 26 05 33 - 10
3. Other than 120 VAC panelboard circuits, if a conduit has not been assigned a
unique number in the Contract Documents, assign a unique number following the
numbering scheme used in the Contract Documents.
4. Assign a unique number to 120 VAC panelboard circuits, similar to the cable
numbering scheme used in the Contract Documents.
5. Provide conduit identification by a stamped or engraved non-corroding metal tag
attached to the conduit bushing.
6. Provide an engraved phenolic nameplate in accordance with THE SUMMARYs of
Section 26 00 00 – Electrical Work, General, or a computer printed self-adhesive
label attached to the equipment or enclosure inside which the conduit terminates.
7. Markings with a pen or paint will not be accepted.
T. Identification of Pullboxes and Junction Boxes
1. Identify pullboxes and junction boxes.
2. Identification shall be the unique conduit number assigned in the Contract
Documents, or if not assigned a unique number the CONTRACTOR shall assign
one following the numbering scheme used in the Contract Documents.
3. Provide box identification by a stamped or engraved non-corroding metal tag or an
engraved phenolic nameplate, in accordance with THE SUMMARYs of Section 26
00 00 – Electrical Work, General, and attached to the box or enclosure.
4. Markings with a pen or paint will not be accepted.
U. Provide conduit for data cables in accordance with the equipment manufacturer’s
recommendations, especially regarding separation from low- and medium-voltage power
raceways.
- END OF SECTION –
STANTEC - 06152020 (FINAL) PIPING, GENERAL
W-354 – TRIANGLE FLOW CONTROL VALVE PAGE 40 05 00 - 1
SECTION 40 05 00 - PIPING, GENERAL
PART 1 -- GENERAL
1.1 THE SUMMARY
A. The CONTRACTOR shall provide piping systems indicated, complete and operable, in
accordance with the Contract Documents.
B. The provisions of this Section shall apply to piping in Divisions 33 and 40, and on the
Drawings and as indicated in the Piping Schedule.
C. The Drawings define the general layout, configuration, routing, method of support, pipe
size, and pipe type. The Drawings are not pipe construction or fabrication drawings. The
CONTRACTOR shall prepare pipe spooling and fabrication drawings and shall submit
them to the ENGINEER for review.
D. Where pipe layout details are not indicated on the Drawings, it is the CONTRACTOR'S
responsibility to develop the details necessary to design and construct piping systems to
accommodate the specific equipment provided, and to provide spacers, adapters, and
connectors for a complete and functional system.
1.2 DEFINITIONS
A. Pipe, piping, pipe work, pipe system, piping system, or similar words, singular or plural
shall mean and include, any type of pipes, tubes, fittings, valves, piping specialties,
appurtenances, supports, restraints, anchors, coatings and linings and items related to
piping.
B. Submerged piping, underwater piping or similar words, shall include any piping located
two feet above water surface in basins or tanks
C. Potable water or similar words, shall mean and include any type of potable water or
process water that be deemed potable after treatment processes.
D. Corrosive service shall mean and include in locations listed below:
a. Buried locations
b. Submerged locations or submerged piping.
c. Inside buried vaults, manholes, and structures that do not drain through a
gravity sewer or to a sump with a pump.
d. Chemical handling areas
e. Inside trenches, containment walls, and curbed areas
f. Locations indicated or designated in the contract documents.
1.3 CONTRACTOR SUBMITTALS
A. Furnish submittals in accordance with General Conditions Section 2.04 – Shop
Drawings.
STANTEC - 06152020 (FINAL) PIPING, GENERAL
W-354 – TRIANGLE FLOW CONTROL VALVE PAGE 40 05 00 - 2
B. Shop Drawings: Shop Drawings shall contain the following information:
1. Drawings: Layout drawings including necessary dimensions, details, pipe joints,
fittings, specials, bolts and nuts, gaskets, valves, appurtenances, anchors, guides,
and material lists. Pipe spooling and fabrication drawings shall indicate spacers,
adapters, connectors, fittings, and pipe supports to accommodate the equipment
and valves in a complete and functional system.
2. Welding Qualifications and Procedures
3. Pipe Supports: Submit pipe support fabrication drawings including calculations.
4. Grooved joint couplings and fittings shall be shown on drawings and product
submittals, and shall be specifically identified with the applicable style or series
designation, and restraint system if applicable.
5. Thermoplastic Pipe Joints: Submit solvent cement manufacturer's catalog indicating
that the recommended product is suitable for each fluid service application.
6. Gasket Material: Submit gasket manufacturer's catalog indicating that the
recommended product is suitable for each fluid service application.
7. Seals and Seating Materials: Submit elastomer material and manufacturer's catalog
indicating that the recommended product is suitable for each fluid service
application.
8. Modular Seals for Pipe: Manufacturer's catalog sheet showing materials and
installation procedures.
9. Expansion Joints: Submit detailed calculations and manufacturer's Shop Drawings
of proposed expansion joints, piping layouts, and anchors and guides, including
information on materials, temperature, and pressure ratings
10. Flexible Connectors: Submit pressure and thermal expansion calculations
C. Samples
1. Performing and paying for sampling and testing as necessary for certifications are
the CONTRACTOR'S responsibility.
D. Certifications
1. Necessary certificates, test reports, and affidavits of compliance shall be obtained
by the CONTRACTOR.
2. A certification from the pipe fabricator that each pipe will be manufactured subject to
the fabricator’s or a recognized Quality Control Program. An outline of the program
shall be submitted to the ENGINEER for review prior to the manufacture of any pipe.
1.4 MATERIAL DELIVERY, STORAGE, AND PROTECTION
A. Piping materials, fittings, valves, and accessories shall be delivered in a clean and
undamaged condition and stored off the ground for protection against oxidation caused
by ground contact.
STANTEC - 06152020 (FINAL) PIPING, GENERAL
W-354 – TRIANGLE FLOW CONTROL VALVE PAGE 40 05 00 - 3
B. Defective or damaged materials shall be replaced with new materials.
PART 2 -- PRODUCTS
2.1 GENERAL
A. Extent of Work
1. Pipes, fittings, and appurtenances shall be provided in accordance with the
requirements of the applicable Sections of Divisions 33 and 40 and as indicated.
2. Materials in contact with potable water or process water that be deemed potable
after treatment processes shall be listed as compliant with NSF Standard 61.
B. Piping Supports
1. Pipes shall be adequately supported, restrained, and anchored as indicated.
C. Lining
1. Application, thickness, and curing of pipe lining shall be as indicated on Drawings.
D. Coating
1. Application, thickness, and curing of coating on buried pipe shall be as indicated on
Drawings.
E. Pressure Rating
1. Piping systems shall be designed for the pressure as defined in respective pipe
sections, or as indicated on the Piping Schedule, whichever is greater.
F. Inspection
1. Pipe shall be subject to inspection at the place of manufacture.
2. During the manufacture, the ENGINEER shall be given access to areas where
manufacturing is in progress and shall be permitted to make inspections necessary
to confirm compliance with requirements.
G. Tests
1. Except where otherwise indicated, materials used in the manufacture of the pipe
shall be tested in accordance with the applicable specifications and standards.
2. The CONTRACTOR shall be responsible for performing material tests.
2.2 PIPE FLANGES
A. General
1. Flanges shall be provided with flat faces and shall be attached with bolt holes
straddling the vertical axis of the pipe unless otherwise indicated.
STANTEC - 06152020 (FINAL) PIPING, GENERAL
W-354 – TRIANGLE FLOW CONTROL VALVE PAGE 40 05 00 - 4
2. Flange faces shall be perpendicular to the axis of the adjoining pipe.
3. Flanges for miscellaneous small diameter pipes shall be in accordance with the
standards indicated for those pipes.
B. Pressure Ratings
1. 150 psig or less: Flanges shall conform to either AWWA C207 - Steel Pipe Flanges
for Waterworks Service--Sizes 4 In. Through 144 In., Class D, or ASME B16.5 -
Pipe Flanges and Flanged Fittings, Class 150.
2. 150 psig to 275 psig: Flanges shall conform to either AWWA C207 Class E or Class
F, or ASME B16.5, Class 150.
3. 275 psig to 700 psig: Flanges shall conform to ASME B16.5, Class 300.
C. Blind Flanges
1. Provide blind flanges in accordance with AWWA C207, or as indicated for
miscellaneous small pipes.
2. Blind flanges for pipe diameters 12 inches and greater shall be provided with lifting
eyes in the form of welded or threaded eye bolts.
D. Flange Coating
1. Machined faces of metal blind flanges and pipe flanges shall be coated with a
temporary rust-inhibitive coating to protect the metal until the installation is
completed.
E. Flange Fasteners
1. Unless otherwise shown on the drawings, or indicated in the applicable Sections of
Divisions 33 and 40, Bolts and nuts shall conform to the following requirements;
a. Threads shall be in accordance with ANSI/ASME B1.1, Class 2, UNC for bolt
diameters 1” and smaller and UN8 for bolt diameters greater than 1”.
b. Bolts shall have heavy hexagon heads and heavy hexagon nuts. Length of
studs shall provide a projection of not less than 0.25 inch and no more than 0.5
inch through the nut when it is drawn tight.
c. Thread studs on flange connections are not permitted except where space
restrictions preclude the use of standard bolts and where approved by the
ENGINEER.
d. Through bolt holes shall be drilled in accordance with the applicable flange
standard.
e. All bolts fastening metallic flanges shall be provided with plain washers installed
under the nut. Washer materials shall be of the same material as the bolt. If the
through bolt holes are drilled larger than the applicable standard by 1/8 inch in
diameter or more, bolts shall be also installed with a plain washer under the bolt
head as well.
STANTEC - 06152020 (FINAL) PIPING, GENERAL
W-354 – TRIANGLE FLOW CONTROL VALVE PAGE 40 05 00 - 5
f. All bolts fastening non-metallic flanges shall be provided with plain washers
installed under both the bolt head and nut.
g. Washer materials shall be of the same material as the bolt.
h. Anti-seize compound shall be used on carbon steel fasteners, and shall be
Husk-ITT, Husky 2000; or equal.
i. Anti-galling compound used for stainless steel fasteners in LOX, nitrogen
injection, oxygen, ozone process/off-gas/vent and ozone contactor
maintenance air service shall be DuPont “Krytox”; or equal.
j. Anti-galling compound used for stainless steel fasteners for other services shall
be certified for potable water use and shall be Husk-ITT, Lube O’seal; Hercules,
Real-Tuff; La Co, Slic-Tite; or equal.
2. Fastener Material Group Numbering System
a. Flange fasteners shall conform to the following material standards and shall be
categorized within the Fastener Material Schedule Groups as indicated:
1) Material Group C1 (Carbon steel): ASTM A307 Grade B bolts, ASTM
A563 Grade B nuts with ASTM F436 washers
2) Material Group C2 (Carbon steel): ASTM A193 Grade B7 bolts, ASTM
A194 Grade 2H nuts with ASTM F436 washers
3) Material Group S1 (316 SS): ASTM A193, Grade B8M bolts, ASTM A194
Grade 8M nuts with Type 316 SS plain washers.
4) Material Group S2 (304 SS): ASTM A193, Grade B8 bolts, ASTM A194
Grade 8F nuts with Type 304 SS plain washers.
5) Material Group S3 (Hastelloy C-276): ASTM F468 N10276 bolts ASTM
F467 N10276 nuts with type Hastelloy plain washers.
3. Fastener Material Group Numbers used in Non-Corrosive Service Applications
a. AWWA C115 ductile iron flanges - Material Group C1
b. AWWA C207 steel flanges - Material Group C2
c. ASME B31 group piping flanges – Material Group C2
d. Non-metallic pipe flanges - Material Group S1
e. Stainless steel pipe flanges and all others not listed above - Material Group S1
f. Where mating flanges are of different flange material standards and the
specified Fastener Material Groups are in conflict, then fasteners of the higher
grade shall be utilized unless otherwise indicated. For the purpose of this
requirement, the Material Groups in order of decreasing grade shall be S1, C2,
C1. Provide insulating flange sets for dissimilar metal flanged piping to
electrically isolate the dissimilar piping.
STANTEC - 06152020 (FINAL) PIPING, GENERAL
W-354 – TRIANGLE FLOW CONTROL VALVE PAGE 40 05 00 - 6
g. Where gaskets of Teflon or Viton-A are required, fasteners of Material Group
C2 shall be utilized for all C1 flange standards.
4. Fastener Material Group Numbers used in Corrosive Service Applications
a. All Flange fasteners shall be of Material Group S1 unless S2 and S3 are
otherwise indicated on the drawings.
F. Insulating Flanges
1. Insulated flanges shall be provided with bolt holes 1/4-inch diameter greater than
the bolt diameter.
G. Insulating Flange Sets
1. In order to prevent corrosion, insulating flange sets shall be furnished on all piping
connections where two dissimilar metals are to be connected. Each insulating flange
set shall consist of an insulating gasket, insulating sleeves and washers, and a steel
washer.
2. For bolt diameters 1-1/2 inches or smaller, insulating sleeves and washers shall be
one piece and shall be made of acetyl resin.
3. For bolt diameters larger than 1-1/2 inches, insulating sleeves and washers shall be
2-piece and shall be made of polyethylene or phenolic material.
4. Insulating flange sets materials used for fluids other than general water and
wastewater shall be made of materials compatible with the fluid services.
5. Insulating gaskets shall be full-face.
H. Insulating Flange Manufacturer, or Equal
1. JM Red Devil, Type E
2. Fluid Sealing Products, Inc.
3. Enpro Industries, Inc. (GPT)
I. Flange Gaskets
1. Gaskets for flanged joints used in general water and wastewater service shall be full
faced type in accordance with AWWA C207, suitable for temperatures to 700
degrees F, a pH of one to 11, and pressures to 1000 psig.
2. Blind flanges shall be provided with gaskets covering the entire inside face of the
blind flange and shall be cemented to the blind flange.
3. Ring gaskets will not be accepted unless otherwise indicated.
4. Unless otherwise indicated, flange gaskets up to 150 psi shall be EPDM sheet
material, NSF 61 approved, Garlock, Style 98206-U (unbranded), or similar
products from John Crane, or equal.
STANTEC - 06152020 (FINAL) PIPING, GENERAL
W-354 – TRIANGLE FLOW CONTROL VALVE PAGE 40 05 00 - 7
5. Unless otherwise indicated, flange gaskets up to 500 psi shall be aramid fiber with
rubber binder material, NSF 61 approved, Garlock, Style 3760-U (unbranded), or
similar products from John Crane, or equal.
6. Gaskets for flanged joints used in water with chloramines shall be Teflon material,
NSF 61 approved, Garlock, Gylon Style 3505, or similar products from John
Crane, or equal.
7. Gaskets for flanged joints used in water with ozone shall be Teflon material, NSF 61
approved, Garlock, Gylon, Style 3504, or similar products from John Crane, or
equal.
8. Gaskets for flanged joints used in cryogenic oxygen (LOX and GOX) service shall
be Teflon material, Garlock Gylon, Style 3502 and 3503 or similar products from
John Crane, or equal.
9. Gaskets for flanged joints in PVC and CPVC piping used in general water and
wastewater service shall be NSF 61 approved, full-faced, 1/8-inch thick, and made
of fluoroelastomer having a durometer hardness of 50 to 70. Gaskets for pipe sizes
up to 24-inch and 150 psi shall be Garlock Style XP or similar products from John
Crane, or equal.
10. When the mating flange has a raised face, provide stainless steel flat ring gasket
filler between the PVC flange and gasket and the adjacent flange.
11. Gaskets for flanged joints used in chemicals, hot air, ozone gas, solvents,
hydrocarbons, steam, chlorine and other fluids shall be made of materials
compatible with the service, pressure, and temperature. Consult gasket
Manufacturer for recommended gasket material.
2.3 PIPE THREADS
A. Pipe threads shall be in conformance with ASME B1.20.1 - Pipe Threads, General
Purpose (inch), and be made up with Teflon tape unless otherwise indicated.
B. Unless otherwise indicated, use metal FNPT and plastic MNPT for threaded pipe
connections between metal and plastic pipes.
2.4 THREADED INSULATING CONNECTIONS
A. General
1. Threaded insulating bushings, unions, or couplings, as appropriate, shall be
furnished for joining threaded pipes of dissimilar metals and for piping systems
where corrosion control and cathodic protection are involved.
B. Materials
1. Threaded insulating connections shall be constructed of nylon, Teflon,
polycarbonate, polyethylene, or other non-conductive materials, and shall have
ratings and properties to suit the service and loading conditions.
STANTEC - 06152020 (FINAL) PIPING, GENERAL
W-354 – TRIANGLE FLOW CONTROL VALVE PAGE 40 05 00 - 8
2.5 MODULAR MECHANICAL SEALS FOR PIPING PENETRATIONS
A. Where indicated and where required in order to prevent flow of water or air, the
passages of piping through wall sleeves and cored openings shall be sealed with
modular interlocking link mechanical closures.
B. Individual links shall be constructed of EPDM rubber, be suitable for temperatures
between minus 40 and plus 250 degrees F, and be shaped to fill the annular space
between the outside of the pipe and the inside of the wall sleeve or cored opening.
C. Assemble the links using Type 316 stainless steel bolts and nuts to form a continuous
rubber belt around the pipe.
D. Pressure plates under each bolt and nut shall be fabricated of a corrosion-resistant
composite material.
E. After the seal assembly is positioned in the sleeve, tighten the bolts against the pressure
plates to expand the rubber links and form the watertight seal.
F. Sizing and installation of sleeves and assemblies shall be in accordance with the
manufacturer's recommendations.
G. Modular Mechanical Seals Manufacturer, or Equal
1. EnPro Industries Company (GPT), Link-Seal
2. Proco Products, Inc., Pen-Seal
2.6 AIR AND GAS TRAPS
A. Air and gas pipes shall slope to low points and shall be provided with drip legs, shut-off
valves, strainers, and traps.
B. Pipe the traps to the nearest drain.
C. Air and gas traps shall be not less than Class150 iron body float-type, with a copper or
stainless steel float.
D. Bracket, lever, and pins shall be constructed of stainless steel.
E. Drain traps shall be provided with threaded connections.
F. Air and Gas Traps Manufacturer, or Equal
1. Armstrong International, Inc.
2. Spirax Sarco, Inc.
PART 3 -- EXECUTION
3.1 GENERAL
A. This section specifies the general installation requirements for piping, valves, and related
items and shall be installed in accordance with the manufacturer's technical data and
STANTEC - 06152020 (FINAL) PIPING, GENERAL
W-354 – TRIANGLE FLOW CONTROL VALVE PAGE 40 05 00 - 9
printed instructions. Specific piping materials, systems, appurtenances, and related
installation and testing requirements are specified in related sections of Divisions 01, 33,
and 40, and as noted on the Drawings, Pipe and Valve Schedules.
B. Piping shall be installed in a neat and workmanlike manner, properly aligned and cut
from measurements taken at the Site to avoid interferences with structural members,
architectural features, openings, and equipment. Exposed pipe shall afford maximum
headroom and access to equipment, and where necessary piping shall be installed with
sufficient slopes for venting or drainage of liquids and condensate to low points.
C. CONTRACTOR shall obtain the assistance of the pipe manufacturer to instruct the pipe
fitters in the correct installation and support of the piping system. Valves and flanges
attached to the pipe shall be provided with adequate supports.
D. Lined Piping Systems
1. The lining manufacturer shall take full responsibility for the complete, final product
and its application.
2. Pipe ends and joints of lined pipes at threaded flanges shall be epoxy-coated in
order to assure continuous protection.
3.2 INSTALLATION
A. Installation shall be free from defects. Prior to installation, each pipe length shall be
carefully inspected, be flushed clean of any debris or dust, and be straightened if not
true straight. Ends of threaded pipes shall be reamed and filed smooth. Groove ends
shall be clean and free from indentations, projections, and roll marks in the area from the
pipe end to the groove. Fittings shall be equally cleaned before assembly.
B. Building gravity flow plumbing pipes shall be installed in a neat and workmanlike
manner, in accordance with the prevailing plumbing and building codes. Pipes shall
have the required slopes for proper drainage. Pipe locations inside buildings shall be
coordinated with the rest of the WORK to avoid interferences and to provide sufficient
headroom. Installations shall be acceptable to the local plumbing inspector.
C. Supports and Anchors: Piping supports, thrust, and seismic restraints shall be provided
where shown on the Drawing or where determined to be required in according to Section
40 05 07 - Pipe Supports. Where necessary to avoid stress on equipment or structural
members, the pipe shall be anchored or harnessed. Expansion joints and guides shall
compensate for pipe expansion due to temperature differences. Pipe shall be firmly
supported with fabricated or commercial hangers or supports.
D. Piping Joints: Pipe joints requirements shall conform to the applicable piping sections of
Division 33 and Division 40.
1. Threaded Joints: Pipe threads shall be full and cleanly cut with sharp dies. Not
more than 3 threads shall remain exposed after installation.
2. Welded Joints: Welded joints shall conform to the specifications and
recommendations of ASME B 31.1 - Power Piping. Welding shall be done by skilled
and qualified welders. Pipe surface residues, oxides, and heat stains are to be
removed from a field weld and the affected areas adjacent by the use of stainless
steel wire brushes. For alloy and stainless steel pipe, the post welding surfaces shall
STANTEC - 06152020 (FINAL) PIPING, GENERAL
W-354 – TRIANGLE FLOW CONTROL VALVE PAGE 40 05 00 - 10
be cleaned with a pickle agent such as nitric/hydrofluoric acid solutions or pickle
paste or equal, then complete removal of the agent by wash the surface thoroughly
with clean water.
3. Flange Joints: Flanged joints shall be made with gaskets with bolts and nuts as
specified. Care shall be taken not to over-torque the bolts, in accordance with the
manufacturer's written recommendations.
4. Fusion-Welded Joints: Fusion-welded joints shall be made with the manufacturer's
recommended equipment on clean, dry pipe ends. The joints shall be made up at
the recommended ambient temperatures, to the pipe manufacturer's written
recommendations. The pipe supplier shall be consulted to obtain machinery and
expertise for the joining by fusion welded of pipe and fittings. No pipe or fittings
shall be joined by fusion by any of the Contractor's personnel unless they are
adequately trained and qualified in the techniques involved. Butt fusion joining shall
yield a joint strength equal to or greater than the tensile strength of the pipe. Socket
fusion, extrusion welding and hot gas welding shall not be used for field
connections.
5. Brazed and Soldered Joints: Brazed and soldered joints shall conform to the
manufacturer’s recommendations and to the specifications and recommendations of
ASME B 31.1 - Power Piping. Brazing shall be done by skilled and qualified
welders. Prior to the application of flux, the ends of tubes shall be thoroughly dried
and cleaned
6. Grooved Joints: Grooves for grooved couplings and fittings shall be made with
specially designed grooving tools to the manufacturer's recommendations and
conform to AWWA C 606 – Joints, Grooved and Shouldered Type. Grooves shall
be clean and sharp without flaws, and the pipe ends shall be accurately cut at 90
degrees to the pipe axis.
7. Push On Joints: Push on joints and gasket installation shall be in accordance with
the manufacturer's recommendations and lubricants. Pipe ends shall be beveled to
facilitate assembly. Lubricants shall be suitable for potable water service and shall
be kept clean in closed containers.
8. Solvent-Welded Joints: Solvent-welded joints shall be made with fresh primer and
solvent cement on clean, dry pipe ends. The primer and cement cans shall be kept
closed at all times and the joints shall be made up at the recommended ambient
temperatures, to the pipe or cement manufacturer's written recommendations. PVC
socket connections shall be joined with PVC cement conforming to ASTM D2564
Standard Specification for Solvent Cements for Poly (Vinyl Chloride) (PVC). CPVC
socket connections shall be joined with CPVC solvent cement conforming to ASTM
F493. For chemical service applications, solvent cement shall be formulated and
labeled for use on that chemical.
9. Adhesive Joints: Adhesive joints shall be made with freshly-mixed 2-part epoxy on
clean, dry pipe ends per pipe manufacturer recommendations. The joints shall be
made up at the recommended ambient temperatures, to the pipe or adhesive
manufacturer's written recommendations. Pipe ends shall be inserted to the full
depth of the socket.
E. Valves and Unions: Unless otherwise indicated, connections to fixtures, groups of
fixtures and equipment shall be provided with a shutoff valve and union, unless the valve
STANTEC - 06152020 (FINAL) PIPING, GENERAL
W-354 – TRIANGLE FLOW CONTROL VALVE PAGE 40 05 00 - 11
has flanged ends. Unions shall be provided at threaded valves, equipment, and other
devices requiring occasional removal or disconnection.
F. Branch Connections: Branch connections in horizontal runs of air and gas piping shall
be made from the top of the pipe, to avoid drainage of condensate into the equipment.
Unless otherwise indicated for threaded pipe connections between metal and plastic
pipes, use metal FNPT and plastic MNPT.
1. Pipe ends and joints of lined pipes at threaded flanges shall be epoxy-coated in
order to assure continuous protection.
G. Isolation Joints / Dielectric Protection: Provide electrically isolate connections between
dissimilar metal piping connections. Electrical checks shall be made to assure no contact
is made between dissimilar metal piping elements.
1. Use dielectric couplings specially designed for the prevention of galvanic reaction
between dissimilar metals.
2. For flanged connections, use stainless steel bolts with isolation bushings, washers,
and full-face flange gaskets.
H. Core Drilling: Where core drilling is required for pipes passing through existing concrete,
core drilling locations shall be determined by radiograph of concrete construction in
order to avoid damage to embedded raceways and reinforcing bars.
I. Coating: Exposed pipes shall be coated with a finish coat to the pipe manufacturer's
standard protective coating, with the manufacturer's recommended prime coat and a
finish coat in accordance with Section 09 96 00 - Protective Coating.
J. Low points in piping systems and driplegs in steam, gas, and air systems shall have
drainage valves.
K. Care shall be taken to insure that piping flanges, mechanical-type couplings, sleeve-type
couplings, flexible connectors, and expansion joints are properly installed as follows:
1. Gasket surfaces shall be carefully cleaned and inspected prior to making up the
connection. Gasket shall be centered properly on the contact surfaces.
2. Connections shall be installed to prevent inducing stress to the piping system or the
equipment to which the piping is connected.
3. Contact surfaces for flanges, couplings, and piping ends shall be aligned parallel,
concentric, and square to each axis at the piping connections.
4. Flange Bolts
a. Flange bolts shall be initially hand-tightened with the piping connections
properly aligned.
b. Bolts shall be tightened with a torque wrench in a staggered sequence to the
recommended torque for the applicable piping material per AWWA or
manufacturer's recommendation. Care shall be taken to avoid over-torquing the
bolts especially on plastic flanged joints.
STANTEC - 06152020 (FINAL) PIPING, GENERAL
W-354 – TRIANGLE FLOW CONTROL VALVE PAGE 40 05 00 - 12
c. Harness, thrust restraint, and tie rod bolts used for sleeve couplings, flange
coupling adapters, or flexible joints shall be tightened gradually and equally at
diametrically opposite sides until snug, in order to prevent misalignment and to
insure that all studs carry equal loads.
d. In order to prevent induced stress or misalignment, do not over-torque
connections to adjoining pump or equipment. Flanges shall not be deformed
nor cracked.
3.3 INSPECTION
A. After completion of the WORK, cuttings, joining and wrapping materials, and other
scattered debris shall be removed from the Site. The entire piping system shall be in a
clean and functional condition.
B. Inspection: Finished installations shall be carefully inspected for proper joints and
supports, interferences, and damage to pipe, fittings, and coating. Temporary plugs and
covers shall be removed from openings and floor drains. Defective WORK shall be
repaired to the satisfaction of the field engineer or plumbing inspector.
3.4 FIELD TESTING FOR PRESSURE PIPING
A. Prior to enclosure or burying, piping systems shall be pressure tested as required in the
Piping Schedule for a period of not less than two hours without exceeding the tolerances
listed in the Piping Schedule. Where no pressures are indicated, the pipes shall be
subject to 1-1/2 times the maximum working pressure. The CONTRACTOR shall furnish
test equipment, labor, materials, and devices as part of the WORK. For additional
testing requirements, refer to Section 01 74 30 - Pressure Pipe Testing and Disinfection.
B. Leakage may be determined by loss of pressure, soap solution, chemical indicator, or
other positive and accurate method. Fixtures, devices, or other accessories which are to
be connected to the lines and which would be damaged if subjected to the test pressure
shall be disconnected and ends of the branch lines plugged or capped as required
during the testing procedures.
C. Leaks shall be repaired, and the system shall be re-tested until no leaks are found.
3.5 FIELD TESTING FOR GRAVITY PLUMBING PIPING
A. Prior to enclosure or burying, drains and vents shall be tested in the presence of the
local plumbing inspector and the ENGINEER for a period of not less than one hour, or as
requested by the plumbing inspector if the request is more stringent. The
CONTRACTOR shall furnish test equipment, labor, material, and devices as part of the
WORK. Defective WORK shall be repaired to the satisfaction of the plumbing inspector,
and the piping shall be re-tested until no leaks are found.
B. Leakage may be determined by loss of pressure, soap solution, chemical indicator, or
other positive and accurate method. Fixtures, devices, or other accessories which are to
be connected to the lines and which would be damaged if subjected to the test pressure
shall be disconnected and ends of the branch lines plugged or capped as required
during the testing procedures.
C. Testing and defective WORK shall be repaired to the satisfaction of the plumbing
inspector.
STANTEC - 06152020 (FINAL) PIPING, GENERAL
W-354 – TRIANGLE FLOW CONTROL VALVE PAGE 40 05 00 - 13
END OF SECTION
STANTEC – 06152020 (FINAL) PROCESS CONTROL AND INSTRUMENTATION
W-354 - TRIANGLE FLOW CONTROL VALVE PAGE 40 91 00 - 1
SECTION 40 91 00 - PROCESS CONTROL AND INSTRUMENTATION
PART 1 -- GENERAL
1.1 THE REQUIREMENT
A. The CONTRACTOR shall provide Process Control and Instrumentation Systems (PCIS)
complete and operable, in accordance with the Contract Documents.
B. The requirements of this Section apply to every component of the PCIS unless indicated
otherwise.
C. Responsibilities
1. The CONTRACTOR, through the use of an Instrumentation Supplier and qualified
electrical and mechanical installers, shall be responsible to the OWNER for the
implementation of the PCIS and the integration of the PCIS with other required
instrumentation and control devices.
2. Due to the complexities associated with the interfacing of numerous control system
devices, it is the intent of these specifications that the Instrumentation Supplier be
responsible to the CONTRACTOR for the integration of the PCIS with existing
devices and devices provided under other sections with the objective of providing a
completely integrated control system free of signal incompatibilities.
3. As a minimum, the Instrumentation Supplier shall perform the following WORK:
a. Implementation of the PCIS
1) prepare hardware submittals
2) Design, develop, and electronically draft loop drawings and control panel
designs
3) Prepare the test plan, the training plan, and the spare parts submittals
4) Procure hardware
5) Fabricate panels
6) Perform factory tests on panels
7) Verify calibration of systems after installation
8) Oversee and certify installation
9) Oversee, document, and certify loop testing
10) Oversee, document, and certify system commissioning
11) Conduct the performance test
12) Prepare Technical Manuals
STANTEC – 06152020 (FINAL) PROCESS CONTROL AND INSTRUMENTATION
W-354 - TRIANGLE FLOW CONTROL VALVE PAGE 40 91 00 - 2
13) Conduct training classes
14) Prepare record drawings
b. Integration of the PCIS with instrumentation and control devices provided under
other sections;
1) Develop requisite loop drawings and record loop drawings associated
with equipment provided under other Divisions of these Specifications
and OWNER-furnished and existing equipment.
2) Resolve signal, power, or functional incompatibilities between the PCIS
and interfacing devices.
c. Modify the existing water treatment facility PLC and HMI to incorporate the new
and modified instrumentation and control devices;
1) Provide new RTU Input/Output modules to be incorporated in the new
panel. Wire all the new module terminals to power, control, signal and
field terminals similar to the existing modules.
4. Any Instrumentation Supplier responsibilities in addition to the list above are at the
discretion of the CONTRACTOR and the Instrumentation Supplier. Additional
requirements in this Section and throughout Division 40 that are stated to be the
CONTRACTOR's responsibility may be performed by the Instrumentation Supplier if
the CONTRACTOR and Instrumentation Supplier so agree.
5. The OWNER assigned system Integrator (control Contractor) will modify the existing
PLC and HMI programs. This includes the existing water treatment plant
D. Certification of Intent
1. Each Bidder shall include with the Bid the following Certification from the selected
Instrumentation Supplier:
a. The Certification shall be typed on the Instrumentation Supplier firm letterhead.
b. It shall be signed by an authorized representative of the Instrumentation
Supplier's firm.
c. It shall include the following statements:
1) (Corporate name of Instrumentation Supplier) "hereby certifies intent to
assume and execute full responsibility to the CONTRACTOR to perform
all tasks defined under Section 40 91 00 - Paragraph 1.1.C.3 in full
compliance with the requirements of the Contract Documents."
2) It is certified that the quotation to the CONTRACTOR includes full and
complete compliance with the requirements of the Contract Documents
without exception."
STANTEC – 06152020 (FINAL) PROCESS CONTROL AND INSTRUMENTATION
W-354 - TRIANGLE FLOW CONTROL VALVE PAGE 40 91 00 - 3
1.2 CONTRACTOR SUBMITTALS
A. Furnish submittals in accordance with General Conditions Section 2.04 – Shop Drawings
and the following:
1. The CONTRACTOR shall coordinate the instrumentation WORK so that the
complete instrumentation and control system will be provided and will be supported
by accurate Shop Drawings and record drawings.
2. Exchange of Technical Information: During the period of preparation of these
submittals, the CONTRACTOR shall authorize a direct, informal liaison with the
ENGINEER for exchange of technical information. As a result of this liaison, certain
minor refinements and revisions in the systems as indicated may be authorized
informally by the ENGINEER, but will not alter the scope of WORK or cause
increase or decrease in the Contract Price. During this informal exchange, no oral
statement by the ENGINEER shall be construed to give approval of any component
or method, nor shall any statement be construed to grant exception to or variation
from these Contract Documents.
3. Symbology and Nomenclature: In these Contract Documents, systems, meters,
instruments, and other elements are represented schematically, and are designated
by symbology as derived from Instrument Society of America Standard ISA S5.1 -
Instrumentation Symbols and Identification. The nomenclature and numbers
designated herein and on the Drawings shall be employed exclusively throughout
Shop Drawings, and similar materials. No other symbols, designations, or
nomenclature unique to the manufacturer's standard methods shall replace those
prescribed above, used herein, or on the Drawings.
B. Shop Drawings
1. General
a. Shop Drawings shall include the letter head or title block of the Instrumentation
Supplier. The title block shall include, as a minimum, the Instrumentation
Supplier's registered business name and address, project name, drawing name,
revision level, and personnel responsible for the content of the drawing. The
quantity of submittal sets shall be as indicated in Section 01 33 00 - Contractor
Submittals.
b. Organization of the Shop Drawing submittals shall be compatible with eventual
submittals for later inclusion in the Technical Manual. Submittals not so
organized and incomplete submittals for a given loop will not be accepted.
c. Interfaces between instruments, motor starters, control valves, variable speed
drives, flow meters, chemical feeders and other equipment related to the PCIS
shall be included in the Shop Drawing submittal.
2. Hardware Equipment Submittal: The CONTRACTOR shall submit a complete
bound package at one time within 30 Days after the commencement date stated in
the Notice to Proceed, including:
a. A complete index which lists each device by tag number, type, and
manufacturer. A separate technical brochure or bulletin shall be included with
STANTEC – 06152020 (FINAL) PROCESS CONTROL AND INSTRUMENTATION
W-354 - TRIANGLE FLOW CONTROL VALVE PAGE 40 91 00 - 4
each instrument data sheet. The data sheets shall be indexed in the submittal
by systems or loops, as a separate group for each system or loop. If, within a
single system or loop, a single instrument is employed more than once, one
data sheet with one brochure or bulletin may cover multiple identical uses of
that instrument in that system. Each brochure or bulletin shall include a list of
tag numbers for which it applies. System groups shall be separated by labeled
tags.
b. Fully executed data sheets according to ISA S20 - Specification Forms for
Process Measurement and Control Instruments, Primary Elements and Control
Valves, for each component, together with a technical product brochure or
bulletin. The technical product brochures shall be complete enough to verify
conformance to Contract Document requirements. The data sheets, as a
minimum, shall show:
1) Component functional description used in the Contract Documents
2) Manufacturer's model number or other product designation
3) Project tag number used in the Contract Documents
4) Project system or loop of which the component is a part
5) Project location or assembly at which the component is to be installed
6) Input and output characteristics
7) Scale, range, units, and multiplier (if any)
8) Requirements for electric supply (if any)
9) Requirements for air supply (if any)
10) Materials of component parts to be in contact with or otherwise exposed
to process media and corrosive ambient air
11) Special requirements or features
c. Priced list of spare parts for every device.
d. Instrument installation, mounting, and anchoring details shall be submitted in an
electronic AutoCAD and hard copy format. Each instrument shall have a
dedicated 8-1/2 inch by 11-inch detail that only pertains to the specific
instrument by tag number. Each detail shall be certified by the instrument
manufacturer that the proposed installation is in accordance with the instrument
manufacturer's recommendations and is fully warrantable. These certifications
shall be embedded in the CAD files and also appear as a stamp on the hard
copies. As a minimum, each detail shall have the following contents;
1) Show necessary sections and elevation views required to define
instrument location by referencing tank, building or equipment names and
numbers, and geographical qualities such as north, south, east, west,
basement, first floor.
STANTEC – 06152020 (FINAL) PROCESS CONTROL AND INSTRUMENTATION
W-354 - TRIANGLE FLOW CONTROL VALVE PAGE 40 91 00 - 5
2) Ambient temperature and humidity of the environment that the instrument
is to be installed in.
3) Corrosive qualities of the environment that the instrument is to be
installed in.
4) Hazardous rating of the environment that the instrument is to be installed
in.
5) Process line pipe or tank size, service, and material.
6) Process tap elevation and location.
7) Upstream and downstream straight pipe lengths between instrument
installation and pipe fittings and valves.
8) Routing of tubing and identification of supports.
9) Mounting brackets, stands, and anchoring devices.
10) Conduit entry size, number, location, and delineation between power and
signal.
11) NEMA ratings of enclosures and components.
12) Clearances required for instrument servicing.
13) List itemizing manufacturer makes, model numbers, quantities, lengths
required, and materials of each item required to support the
implementation of the detail.
3. Project-Wide Loop Drawing Submittal: The CONTRACTOR shall furnish a Project-
wide Loop Drawing Submittal (PLDS) which completely defines and documents the
contents of each monitoring, alarming, interlock, and control loop associated with
equipment provided under Division 40 sections, equipment provided under sections
in other Divisions, existing, and OWNER-furnished equipment which is to be
incorporated into the PCIS. The PLDS shall be a singular complete bound package
electronically drafted in AutoCAD, submitted within 60 Days after Contract Award,
and shall include the following:
a. A complete index in the front of each bound volume. The loop drawings shall
be indexed by systems or process areas. Loops shall be tagged in a manner
consistent with the Contract Documents. Loop drawings shall be submitted for
every analog and discrete monitoring and control loop.
b. Drawings showing definitive diagrams for every analog and discrete
instrumentation loop system. These diagrams shall show and identify each
component of each loop or system using legend and symbols from ISA S5.4 -
Instrument Loop Drawings and as defined by the most recent revision in ISA.
Each system or loop diagram shall be drawn with no more than 8 loops per
drawing. Loop drawings shall be developed for loops in equipment vendor-
supplied packages, equipment provided under Division 40, and OWNER-
STANTEC – 06152020 (FINAL) PROCESS CONTROL AND INSTRUMENTATION
W-354 - TRIANGLE FLOW CONTROL VALVE PAGE 40 91 00 - 6
furnished equipment. In addition to the expanded ISA S5.4 requirements, the
loop diagrams shall also show the following details:
1) Functional name of each loop
2) Reference name, drawing, and loop diagram numbers for any signal
continuing off the loop diagram sheet.
3) MCC panel, circuit, and breaker numbers for power feeds to the loops
and instrumentation.
4) Designation, and if appropriate, terminal assignments associated with
every manhole, pullbox, junction box, conduit, and panel through which
the loop circuits pass.
5) Vendor panel, instrument panel, conduit, junction boxes, equipment and
SCADA terminations, termination identification wire numbers and colors,
power circuits, and ground identifications.
4. Startup Submittals
a. The CONTRACTOR shall submit the proposed procedures to be followed
during startup of the PCIS and its components.
b. Preliminary Submittal: Outlines of the specific procedures and examples of
proposed forms and checklists.
c. Detailed Submittal: After approval of the Preliminary Submittal, the
CONTRACTOR shall submit the proposed detailed procedures, forms, and
checklists. This submittal shall include a statement of objectives with the test
procedures.
5. Training Submittals: Subsequent to the receipt of the OWNER's and ENGINEER's
inputs made at the Presubmittal Conference, the CONTRACTOR shall submit a
training plan which includes:
a. A resubmittal of the training plan overview from the Presubmittal Conference
with incorporation of modifications agreed upon at that meeting.
b. Schedule of training courses including dates, durations, and locations of each
class.
c. Resumes of the instructors who will actually implement the plan.
C. Technical Manual
1. General: Information in the Technical Manual shall be based upon the approved
Shop Drawing submittals as modified for conditions encountered in the field during
the WORK.
2. The Technical Manual shall have the following organization for each process:
a. Section A - Process and Instrumentation Diagrams
STANTEC – 06152020 (FINAL) PROCESS CONTROL AND INSTRUMENTATION
W-354 - TRIANGLE FLOW CONTROL VALVE PAGE 40 91 00 - 7
b. Section B - Loop Descriptions
c. Section C - Loop Drawings
d. Section E - Instrument Data Sheets
e. Section F - Sizing Calculations
f. Section G - Instrument Installation Details
g. Section H - Test Results
3. Signed results from Loop Testing, Precommissioning, and Performance Testing
shall be included in Section H.
4. Initially, 2 sets of draft Technical Manuals shall be submitted for review after return
of favorably reviewed Shop Drawings and data required herein. Following the
ENGINEER's review, one set will be returned to the CONTRACTOR with
comments. The Manuals shall be revised and amended as required and the final
Manuals shall be submitted 15 Days prior to startup of systems.
D. Record Drawings
1. The CONTRACTOR shall keep current a set of complete loop and schematic
diagrams which shall include field and panel wiring, piping and tubing runs, routing,
mounting details, point-to-point diagrams with cable, wire, tube and termination
numbers. These drawings shall include every instrument and instrument element.
One set of drawings electronically formatted in AutoCAD and 2 hard copies shall be
submitted after completion of Precommissioning tasks but prior to Performance
Testing. Such drawings shall be submitted for review prior to acceptance of the
completed WORK by the OWNER.
1.3 SPECIAL CORRECTION OF DEFECTS REQUIREMENTS
A. Extended Period for Correction of Defects: The CONTRACTOR shall correct defects
in the PCIS upon notification from the OWNER within 2 years from the date of
Substantial Completion. Corrections shall be completed within 5 Days after notification.
PART 2 -- PRODUCTS
2.1 GENERAL
A. Code and Regulatory Compliance: PCIS WORK shall conform to or exceed the
applicable requirements of the National Electrical Code. Conflicts between the
requirements of the Contract Documents and any codes or referenced standards or
specifications shall be resolved according to Section 014219 - Reference Standards.
B. Current Technology: Meters, instruments, and other components shall be the most
recent field-proven models marketed by their manufacturers at the time of submittal of
the Shop Drawings unless otherwise required to match existing equipment.
C. Adverse Environmental Impact: No component of an instrumentation system shall
contain liquid mercury.
STANTEC – 06152020 (FINAL) PROCESS CONTROL AND INSTRUMENTATION
W-354 - TRIANGLE FLOW CONTROL VALVE PAGE 40 91 00 - 8
D. Hardware Commonality: Instruments which utilize a common measurement principle
(for example, d/p cells, pressure transmitters, level transmitters that monitor hydrostatic
head) shall be furnished by a single manufacturer. Panel mounted instruments shall
have matching style and general appearance. Instruments performing similar functions
shall be of the same type, model, or class, and shall be from a single manufacturer.
E. Loop Accuracy: The accuracy of each instrumentation system or loop shall be
determined as a probable maximum error; this shall be the square root of the sum of the
squares of certified "accuracies" of the designated components in each system,
expressed as a percentage of the actual span or value of the measured variable. Each
individual instrument shall have a minimum accuracy of plus and minus 0.5 percent of
full scale and a minimum repeatability of plus and minus 0.25 percent of full scale unless
otherwise indicated. Instruments that do not conform to or improve upon these criteria
are not acceptable.
F. Instrument and Loop Power: Power requirements and input/output connections for
components shall be verified. Power for transmitted signals shall, in general, originate in
and be supplied by the control panel devices. The use of "2 wire" transmitters is
preferred, and use of "4 wire" transmitters shall be minimized. Individual loop or
redundant power supplies shall be provided as required by the manufacturer's
instrument load characteristics to ensure sufficient power to each loop component.
Power supplies shall be mounted within control panels or in the field at the point of
application.
G. Loop Isolators and Converters: Signal isolators shall be provided as required to
ensure adjacent component impedance match where feedback paths may be generated,
or to maintain loop integrity during the removal of a loop component. Dropping precision
wire wound resistors shall be installed at field side terminations in the control panels to
ensure loop integrity. Signal conditioners and converters shall be provided where
required to resolve any signal level incompatibilities or provide required functions.
H. Environmental Suitability: Indoor and outdoor control panels and instrument
enclosures shall be suitable for operation in the ambient conditions associated with the
locations designated in the Contract Documents. Heating, cooling, and dehumidifying
devices shall be provided in order to maintain instrumentation devices 20 percent within
the minimums and maximums of their rated environmental operating ranges. The
CONTRACTOR shall provide power wiring for these devices. Enclosures suitable for
the environment shall be furnished. Instrumentation in hazardous areas shall be suitable
for use in the particular hazardous or classified location in which it is to be installed.
I. Signal Levels: Analog measurements and control signals shall be as indicated herein,
and unless otherwise indicated, shall vary in direct linear proportion to the measured
variable. Electrical signals outside control panels shall be 4 to 20 milliamperes dc
except as indicated. Signals within enclosures may be 1 to 5 volts dc. Electric signals
shall be electrically or optically isolated from other signals. Pneumatic signals shall be 3
to 15 psig with 3 psig equal to 0 percent and 15 psig equal to 100 percent.
J. Control Panel Power Supplies: Control panels shall be provided with redundant power
supplies which are configured in a fault-tolerant manner to prevent interruption of service
upon failure and interruption of service necessitated by the replacement of a power
STANTEC – 06152020 (FINAL) PROCESS CONTROL AND INSTRUMENTATION
W-354 - TRIANGLE FLOW CONTROL VALVE PAGE 40 91 00 - 9
supply. Power supplies shall have an excess rated capacity of 40 percent. The failure
of a power supply shall be annunciated at the control panel and have a relay output.
K. Alternative Equipment and Methods: Equipment or methods requiring redesign of
any project details are not acceptable without prior written approval of the ENGINEER
through the "or equal" process of the Bid Forms. Any proposal for approval of
alternative equipment or methods shall include evidence of improved performance,
operational advantage, and maintenance enhancement over the equipment or method
indicated, or shall include evidence that an indicated component is not available.
2.2 OPERATING CONDITIONS
A. The PCIS shall be designed and constructed for satisfactory operation and long, low
maintenance service under the following conditions:
Environment a water treatment facility
Temperature Range 32 through 122 degrees F
Thermal Shock 1 degree F per minute, max
Relative Humidity 10 through 99 percent, non-condensing
2.3 SPARE PARTS AND SPECIAL TOOLS
A. The ENGINEER will select the required spare parts from the priced list of spare parts in
the Hardware Equipment Submittal, and the CONTRACTOR shall furnish them. The
CONTRACTOR will be paid from the corresponding allowance item in the Bid, and the
total price will not exceed the amount of the allowance item.
B. The CONTRACTOR shall furnish a priced list of special tools required to calibrate and
maintain the instrumentation provided. After approval the CONTRACTOR shall furnish
tools on that list.
C. Special tools and spare parts shall be submitted before startup commences, suitably
wrapped and identified.
PART 3 -- EXECUTION
3.1 PRODUCT HANDLING
A. Shipping Precautions: After completion of shop assembly, factory test, and approval,
equipment, cabinets, panels, and consoles shall be packed in protective crates and
enclosed in heavy duty polyethylene envelopes or secured sheeting to provide complete
protection from damage, dust, and moisture. Dehumidifiers shall be placed inside the
polyethylene coverings. The equipment shall then be skid-mounted for final transport.
Lifting rings shall be provided for moving without removing protective covering. Boxed
weight shall be shown on shipping tags together with instructions for unloading,
transporting, storing, and handling at the Site.
STANTEC – 06152020 (FINAL) PROCESS CONTROL AND INSTRUMENTATION
W-354 - TRIANGLE FLOW CONTROL VALVE PAGE 40 91 00 - 10
B. Special Instructions: Special instructions for proper field handling, storage, and
installation required by the manufacturer shall be securely attached to each piece of
equipment prior to packaging and shipment.
C. Tagging: Each component shall be tagged to identify its location, instrument tag
number, and function in the system. A permanent stainless steel or other non-corrosive
material tag firmly attached and permanently and indelibly marked with the instrument
tag number, as given in the tabulation, shall be provided on each piece of equipment in
the PCIS. Identification shall be prominently displayed on the outside of the package.
D. Storage: Equipment shall not be stored outdoors. Equipment shall be stored in dry
permanent shelters, including in-line equipment, and shall be adequately protected
against mechanical injury. If any apparatus has been damaged, such damage shall be
repaired by the CONTRACTOR. If any apparatus has been subject to possible injury by
water, it shall be thoroughly dried out and put through tests as directed by the
ENGINEER. If such tests reveal defects, the equipment shall be replaced.
3.2 MANUFACTURER'S SERVICES
A. The CONTRACTOR shall furnish the following manufacturer's services for the
instrumentation listed below:
1. Perform bench calibration
2. Oversee installation
3. Verify installation of installed instrument
4. Certify installation and reconfirm manufacturer's accuracy statement
5. Oversee loop testing, prepare loop validation sheets, and certify loop testing
6. Prepare pre-commissioning validation sheets, oversee pre-commissioning, and
certify when pre-commissioning is completed.
7. Train the OWNER's personnel
B. Manufacturer's services shall be furnished for the following equipment:
1. Flow control valve
3.3 INSTALLATION
A. General
1. Instrumentation, including instrumentation furnished under other Divisions, shall be
installed under Division 40 and the manufacturers' instructions.
2. Equipment Locations: The monitoring and control system configurations indicated
are diagrammatic. The locations of equipment are approximate. The exact
locations and routing of wiring and cables shall be governed by structural conditions
and physical interferences and by the location of electrical terminations on
equipment. Equipment shall be located and installed so that it will be readily
STANTEC – 06152020 (FINAL) PROCESS CONTROL AND INSTRUMENTATION
W-354 - TRIANGLE FLOW CONTROL VALVE PAGE 40 91 00 - 11
accessible for operation and maintenance. Where job conditions require reasonable
changes in approximated locations and arrangements, or when the OWNER
exercises the right to require changes in location of equipment which do not impact
material quantities or cause material rework, the CONTRACTOR shall make such
changes without additional cost to the OWNER.
B. Conduit, Cables, and Field Wiring
1. Conduit shall be provided under Division 26 without delay to the WORK of Division
40.
2. Process equipment control wiring, 4 to 20 mA signal circuits, signal wiring to field
instruments, SCADA input and output wiring, and other field wiring and cables shall
be provided under Division 26.
3. SCADA equipment cables, shall be provided under Division 40.
4. Terminations and wire identification at PCIS equipment furnished under this or any
other Division shall be provided under Division 40.
C. Instrumentation Tie-Downs: Instruments, control panels, and equipment shall be
anchored by methods that comply with seismic requirements applicable to the Site.
D. Existing Instrumentation: Each existing instrument to be removed and reinstalled
shall be cleaned, reconditioned, and recalibrated by an authorized service facility of the
instrument manufacturer. The CONTRACTOR shall provide certification of this WORK
prior to reinstallation of each instrument.
E. Ancillary Devices: The Contract Documents show necessary conduit and instruments
required to make a complete instrumentation system. The CONTRACTOR shall be
responsible for providing any additional or different type connections as required by the
instruments and specific installation requirements. Such additions and such changes,
including the proposed method of installation, shall be submitted to the ENGINEER for
approval prior to commencing that WORK. Such changes shall not be a basis of claims
for extra WORK or delay.
F. Installation Criteria and Validation: Field-mounted components and assemblies shall
be installed and connected according to the requirements below:
1. Installation personnel have been instructed on installation requirements of the
Contract Documents.
2. Technical assistance is available to installation personnel at least by telephone.
3. Installation personnel have at least one copy of the approved Shop Drawings and
data.
4. Instrument process sensing lines shall be installed in conduit under Section 26 00
00 - Electrical General Provisions. Individual tubes shall run parallel and near the
surfaces from which they are supported. Supports shall be used at intervals of not
more than 3-feet of rigid tubing.
STANTEC – 06152020 (FINAL) PROCESS CONTROL AND INSTRUMENTATION
W-354 - TRIANGLE FLOW CONTROL VALVE PAGE 40 91 00 - 12
5. Bends shall be formed to uniform radii with the proper tool without deforming or
thinning the walls of the tubing. Plastic clips shall be used to hold individual plastic
tubes parallel. Ends of tubing shall be square cut and cleaned before being inserted
in the fittings. Bulkhead fittings shall be provided at panels requiring pipe or tubing
entries.
6. Differential pressure elements shall have 3 valve manifolds.
7. Flexible cables and capillary tubing shall be installed in flexible conduits. The
lengths shall be sufficient to withdraw the element for periodic maintenance.
8. Power and signal wires shall be terminated with crimped type lugs.
9. Connectors shall be, as a minimum, water tight.
10. Wires shall be mounted clearly with an identification tag that is of a permanent and
reusable nature.
11. Wire and cable shall be arranged in a neat manner and securely supported in cable
groups and connected from terminal to terminal without splices unless specifically
approved by the ENGINEER. Wiring shall be protected from sharp edges and
corners.
12. Mounting stands and bracket materials and workmanship shall comply with
requirements of the Contract Documents.
13. Verify the correctness of each installation, including polarity of electric power and
signal connections, and make sure process connections are free of leaks. The
CONTRACTOR shall certify in writing that discrepancies have been corrected for
each loop or system checked out.
14. The OWNER will not be responsible for any additional cost of rework attributable to
actions of the CONTRACTOR or the Instrumentation Supplier.
3.4 CALIBRATION
A. General: Devices provided under Division 40 shall have their calibration verified
according to the manufacturer's recommended procedures to verify operational
readiness and ability to meet the indicated functional and tolerance requirements.
B. Calibration Points: Each instrument shall be calibrated at 0, 25, 50, 75, and 100
percent of span using test instruments to simulate inputs. The test instruments shall
have accuracies traceable to National Institute of Standards and Testing.
C. Bench Calibration: Instruments that have been bench-calibrated shall be examined in
the field to determine whether any of the calibrations are in need of adjustment. Such
adjustments, if required, shall be made only after consultation with the ENGINEER.
D. Field Calibration: Instruments which were not bench-calibrated shall be calibrated in
the field to insure proper operation in accordance with the instrument loop diagrams or
specification data sheets.
STANTEC – 06152020 (FINAL) PROCESS CONTROL AND INSTRUMENTATION
W-354 - TRIANGLE FLOW CONTROL VALVE PAGE 40 91 00 - 13
E. Calibration Sheets: Each instrument calibration sheet shall provide the following
information and a space for sign-off on individual items and on the completed unit:
1. Project name
2. Loop number
3. Tag number
4. Manufacturer
5. Model number
6. Serial number
7. Calibration range
8. Calibration data: Input, output, and error at 0 percent, 50 percent, and 100 percent
of span
9. Switch setting, contact action, and deadband for discrete elements
10. Space for comments
11. Space for sign-off by Instrumentation Supplier and date
12. Test equipment used and associated serial numbers
F. Calibration Tags: A calibration and testing tag shall be attached to each piece of
equipment or system at a location determined by the ENGINEER. The CONTRACTOR
shall have the Instrumentation Supplier sign the tag when calibration is complete. The
ENGINEER will sign the tag when the calibration and testing has been accepted.
3.5 LOOP TESTING
A. General: Individual instrument loop diagrams per ISA Standard S5.4 - Instrument Loop
Diagrams, expanded format, shall be submitted to the ENGINEER for review prior to the
loop tests. The CONTRACTOR shall notify the ENGINEER of scheduled tests a
minimum of 10 Days prior to the estimated completion date of installation and wiring of
the PCIS. After the ENGINEER's review of the submitted loop diagrams for correctness
and compliance with the specifications, loop testing shall proceed. The loop check shall
be witnessed by the ENGINEER.
B. Control Valve Tests: Control valves, cylinders, drives and connecting linkages shall be
stroked from the operator interface units as well as local control devices and adjusted to
verify proper control action, hand switch action, limit switch settings, torque settings,
remote control actions, and remote feedback of valve status and position. Control valve
actions and positioner settings shall be checked with the valves in place to insure that no
changes have occurred since the bench calibration.
C. Interlocks: Hardware and software interlocks between the instrumentation and the
motor control circuits, control circuits of variable-speed controllers, and packaged
equipment controls shall be checked to the maximum extent possible.
STANTEC – 06152020 (FINAL) PROCESS CONTROL AND INSTRUMENTATION
W-354 - TRIANGLE FLOW CONTROL VALVE PAGE 40 91 00 - 14
D. Instrument and Instrument Component Validation: Each instrument shall be field
tested, inspected, and adjusted to its indicated performance requirement in accordance
its manufacturer's specifications and instructions. Any instrument which fails to meet
any Contract requirement, or, in the absence of a Contract requirement, any published
manufacturer performance specification for functional and operational parameters, shall
be repaired or replaced, at the discretion of the ENGINEER.
E. Loop Validation: Controllers and electronic function modules shall be field tested and
exercised to demonstrate correct operation. Control loops shall be checked under
simulated operating conditions by impressing input signals at the primary control
elements and observing appropriate responses of the respective control and monitoring
elements, final control elements, and the graphic displays associated with the SCADA.
Actual signals shall be used wherever available. Following any necessary corrections,
the loops shall be retested. Accuracy tolerances for each analog network are defined as
the root-mean-square (RMS) summation of individual component accuracy
requirements. Individual component accuracy requirements shall be as indicated by
Contract requirements or by published manufacturer accuracy specifications, whenever
Contract accuracy requirements are not indicated. Each analog network shall be tested
by applying simulated analog or discrete inputs to the first element of an analog
network. For networks which incorporate analog elements, simulated sensor inputs
corresponding to 0, 25, 50, 75, and 100 percent of span shall be applied, and the
resulting element outputs monitored to verify compliance to calculated RMS summation
accuracy tolerance requirements. Continuously variable analog inputs shall be applied
to verify the proper operation and setting of discrete devices. Provisional settings shall
be made on controllers and alarms during analog loop tests. Analog loop test data shall
be recorded on test forms attached at the end of this Section which include calculated
RMS summation system accuracy tolerance requirements for each output.
F. Loop Validation Sheets: The CONTRACTOR shall prepare loop confirmation sheets
for each loop covering each active instrumentation and control device except simple
hand switches and lights. Loop confirmation sheets shall form the basis for operational
tests and documentation. Each loop confirmation sheet shall cite the following
information and shall provide spaces for sign-off on individual items and on the complete
loop by the Instrumentation Supplier:
1. Project name
2. Loop number
3. Tag number, description, manufacturer, and model number for each element
4. Installation bulletin number
5. Specification sheet number
6. Loop description number
7. Adjustment check
8. Space for comments
9. Space for loop sign-off by Instrumentation Supplier and date
STANTEC – 06152020 (FINAL) PROCESS CONTROL AND INSTRUMENTATION
W-354 - TRIANGLE FLOW CONTROL VALVE PAGE 40 91 00 - 15
10. Space for ENGINEER witness signature and date
G. Loop Certifications: When installation tests have been successfully completed for
individual instruments and separate analog control networks, a certified copy of each
test form signed by the ENGINEER or the ENGINEER's representative as a witness,
with test data entered, shall be submitted to the ENGINEER together with a clear and
unequivocal statement that the instrumentation has been successfully calibrated,
inspected, and tested.
3.6 PRE-COMMISSIONING
A. General: Pre-commissioning shall commence after acceptance of wire test, calibration
tests and loop tests, and inspections have demonstrated that the instrumentation and
control system complies with Contract requirements. Pre-commissioning shall
demonstrate proper operation of every system with process equipment operating over
full operating ranges under conditions as closely resembling actual operating conditions
as possible.
B. Pre-commissioning Procedures and Documentation: Pre-commissioning and test
activities shall follow detailed test procedures and check lists accepted by the
ENGINEER. Test data shall be acquired using equipment as required and shall be
recorded on test forms accepted by the ENGINEER, which include calculated tolerance
limits for each step. Completion of system precommissioning and test activities shall be
documented by a certified report, including test forms with test data entered, delivered to
the ENGINEER with a clear and unequivocal statement that system pre-commissioning
and test requirements have been satisfied.
C. Operational Validation: Where feasible, system pre-commissioning activities shall
include the use of water to establish service conditions that simulate, to the greatest
extent possible, normal final control element operating conditions in terms of applied
process loads, operating ranges, and environmental conditions. Final control elements,
control panels, and ancillary equipment shall be tested under startup and steady state
operating conditions to verify that proper and stable control is achieved using motor
control center and local field mounted control circuits. Hardwired and software control
circuit interlocks and alarms shall be operational. The control of final control elements
and ancillary equipment shall be tested using both manual and automatic (where
provided) control circuits. The stable steady state operation of final control elements
running under the control of field mounted automatic analog controllers or software
based controllers shall be assured by adjusting the controllers as required to eliminate
oscillatory final control element operation. The transient stability of final control elements
operating under the control of field mounted, and software-based automatic analog
controllers shall be verified by applying control signal disturbances, monitoring the
amplitude and decay rate of control parameter oscillations (if any), and making
necessary controller adjustments as required to eliminate excessive oscillatory
amplitudes and decay rates.
D. Loop Tuning: Electronic control stations incorporating proportional, integral or
differential control circuits shall be optimally tuned, experimentally, by applying control
signal disturbances and adjusting the gain, reset, or rate settings as required to achieve
a proper response. Measured final control element variable position/speed setpoint
settings shall be compared to measured final control element position/speed values at 0,
25, 50, 75, and 100 percent of span and the results checked against indicated accuracy
tolerances.
STANTEC – 06152020 (FINAL) PROCESS CONTROL AND INSTRUMENTATION
W-354 - TRIANGLE FLOW CONTROL VALVE PAGE 40 91 00 - 16
E. Pre-commissioning Validation Sheets: Pre-commissioning shall be documented on
one of 2 types of test forms as follows:
1. For functions which can be demonstrated on a loop-by-loop basis, the form shall
include:
a. Project name
b. Loop number
c. Loop description
d. Tag number, description, manufacturer, and data sheet number for each
component.
e. Space for sign-off and date by both the Instrumentation Supplier and
ENGINEER.
2. For functions that cannot be demonstrated on a loop-by-loop basis, the test form
shall be a listing of the specific tests to be conducted. With each test description the
following information shall be included:
a. Specification page and paragraph of function demonstrated
b. Description of function
c. Space for sign-off and date by both the Instrumentation Supplier and
ENGINEER
F. Pre-commissioning Certification: The CONTRACTOR shall submit an
instrumentation and control system pre-commissioning completion report which shall
state that Contract requirements have been met and shall include a listing of
instrumentation and control system maintenance and repair activities conducted during
the pre-commissioning testing. Acceptance of the instrumentation and control system
pre-commissioning testing must be provided in writing by the ENGINEER before the
performance testing may begin. Final acceptance of the control system shall be based
upon plant completion as stated in the General Conditions.
3.7 ON-SITE SUPERVISION
A. The CONTRACTOR shall furnish the services of a resident engineer to supervise and
coordinate installation, adjustment, testing, and start-up of the PCIS. The resident
engineer shall be present during the total period required to effect a complete operating
system. Personnel shall be at the Site to check equipment, perform the tests indicated
in this Section, and furnish startup services.
3.8 COMMISSIONING
A. The entire WORK shall operate for 30 Days longer than the commissioning period in
Section 01 75 00 without failure.
STANTEC – 06152020 (FINAL) PROCESS CONTROL AND INSTRUMENTATION
W-354 - TRIANGLE FLOW CONTROL VALVE PAGE 40 91 00 - 17
B. In addition to the commissioning requirements of Section 017500, the CONTRACTOR
shall furnish support staff as required to operate the system and to satisfy the repair or
replacement requirements.
C. If any component fails during the performance test, it shall be repaired or replaced and
the performance test shall be restarted at time zero on another 22 Day period.
3.9 TRAINING
A. General: The CONTRACTOR shall train the OWNER'S personnel on the maintenance,
calibration, and repair of instruments provided under this Contract.
B. Instructions: The training shall be performed by qualified representatives of the
equipment manufacturers and shall be specific to each piece of equipment.
C. Duration: Each training class shall be a minimum of 8 hours in duration and shall cover,
as a minimum, operational theory, maintenance, troubleshooting/repair, and calibration
of the instrument.
D. Schedule: Training shall be performed during the pre-commissioning phase of the
project. The training sessions shall be scheduled a minimum of 3 weeks in advance of
when the courses are to be initiated. The ENGINEER will review the course outline for
suitability and provide comments that shall be incorporated.
E. Agenda: The training shall include operation and maintenance procedures,
troubleshooting with necessary test equipment, and changing set points, and calibration
for that specific piece of equipment.
F. Documentation: Within 10 Days after the completion of each session the
CONTRACTOR shall submit the following:
1. A list of OWNER personnel who attended the session.
2. An evaluation of OWNER personnel via written testing or equivalent evaluation.
3. A copy of the training materials utilized during the lesson with notes, diagrams, and
comments.
3.10 CRITERIA FOR SUBSTANTIAL COMPLETION
A. For the purpose of this Section and all Division 40, the following conditions shall be
fulfilled before the WORK is considered substantially complete:
1. Submittals have been completed and approved.
2. The PCIS has been calibrated, loop tested, and pre-commissioned.
3. The OWNER training has been performed.
4. Spare parts and expendable supplies and test equipment have been delivered to
the ENGINEER.
5. Commissioning has been successfully completed.
STANTEC – 06152020 (FINAL) PROCESS CONTROL AND INSTRUMENTATION
W-354 - TRIANGLE FLOW CONTROL VALVE PAGE 40 91 00 - 18
6. Punch-list items have been corrected.
7. Record drawings in both hard copy and electronic format have been submitted.
8. Revisions to the Technical Manuals that may have resulted from the field tests have
been made and reviewed.
9. Debris associated with installation of instrumentation has been removed.
10. Probes, elements, sample lines, transmitters, tubing, and enclosures have been
cleaned and are in like-new condition.
- END OF SECTION -
STANTEC – 06152020 (FINAL) PRESSURE MEASURING
W-354 - TRIANGLE FLOW CONTROL VALVE PAGE 40 91 08- 1
SECTION 40 91 08 - PRESSURE MEASURING
PART 1 -- GENERAL
1.1 THE SUMMARY
A. General: The CONTRACTOR shall provide pressure measuring systems, complete and
operable, in accordance with the Contract Documents.
1.2 REFERENCE SPECIFICATIONS, CODES AND STANDARDS
A. Section 40 91 00 - Process Control and Instrumentation Systems.
B. Applicable Sections in Division 40 – Instrumentation and Control for Process Systems.
C. Division 26 – Electrical.
1.3 ACTION SUBMITTALS / INFORMATIVE SUBMITTALS
A. Submittals shall be provided in accordance with the requirements specified in Section 40
91 00 – Process Control and Instrumentation Systems.
PART 2 -- PRODUCTS
2.1 ELECTRONIC GAUGE PRESSURE TRANSMITTERS
A. Manufacturers: Electronic Pressure Transmitter Manufacturer shall be Endress+Hauser
model PMP71S.
B. Description: Gauge pressure transmitters shall measure the in-line process pressure using
a sensor with sealed fill fluid and isolation/sensing diaphragm. The sensor shall convert
the process pressure variations to a linear 4-to-20 mA DC output signal at 24 VDC, 2-wire
type, proportional to the pressure variation, with an allowable loop load of not less than
600 ohms. A temperature compensation unit shall also be part of the sensing module.
C. Performance / Design Criteria:
1. Continuously (external) adjustable span, zero and dampening (internal) adjustment.
2. Accuracy shall be at least plus minus 0.14 percent of span.
3. Ambient operating range of minus 40 degree F to plus 250 degrees F.
4. Provide vent, drain, block and bleed valve plugs.
5. Transmitter output shall be compatible with HART protocol.
6. Sensor or transmitter failure alarm - High or low failure mode - shall be provided and
shall be user selectable.
D. Materials / Components
1. Sensor fill fluid shall be silicon.
STANTEC – 06152020 (FINAL) PRESSURE MEASURING
W-354 - TRIANGLE FLOW CONTROL VALVE PAGE 40 91 08- 2
2. Process wetted parts and diaphragm shall be as recommended by the manufacturer
for the intended service and installation application and as indicated in the data sheet.
3. As a minimum, housing material shall be 316 stainless steel or as recommended by the
manufacturer for the intended service and installation application and as indicated in
the data sheet. As a minimum, housing shall be rated NEMA 4X, unless otherwise
indicated in the data sheet. Explosion proof rated housing shall be available.
4. Non-wetted parts shall be as recommended by the manufacturer for the intended
service and installation application and as indicated in the data sheet.
5. Transmitter shall have an integral digital LCD indicator scaled in linear engineering
units.
6. Process connection style shall be ½-inch NPT or flange. Connection style and flange
size rating and material shall be as recommended by the manufacturer and as indicated
in the data sheet for the intended service and installation application.
7. Provide mounting hardware suitable for the intended service and installation
application (e.g. surface mounting, 2-inch pipe, etc.)
PART 3 -- EXECUTION
3.1 FIELD QUALITY CONTROL
A. Pressure measuring systems shall be handled, installed, calibrated, loop-tested, pre-
commissioned, and performance tested in accordance with Section 40 91 00 Process
Control and Instrumentation Systems. Manufacturer’s service, supervision, and training
shall also be in accordance with Section 40 91 00 Process Control and Instrumentation
Systems.
END OF SECTION
STANTEC – 06152020 (FINAL) CONTROL SYSTEMS HARDWARE
W-354 - TRIANGLE FLOW CONTROL VALVE PAGE 40 95 10-1
SECTION 40 95 10 – PLC/RTU CONTROL SYSTEMS HARDWARE
PART 1 -- GENERAL
1.1 REQUIREMENTS
A. The Contractor, through the use of the Instrumentation Supplier and qualified electrical
installers, shall provide the PLC-based control system (PLCS) complete and operable, in
accordance with the Contract Documents.
B. Instrumentation Supplier: The exact contractual relationship and scope definition shall
be established exclusively between the Contractor and the Instrumentation Supplier.
The Instrumentation Supplier, under the direction of the Contractor, shall assume full
responsibility for the following, as a minimum:
1. The Instrumentation Supplier shall be singularly responsible for selecting,
configuring, and verifying correct operation of compatible hardware.
2. The Instrumentation Supplier shall be the integrator of all hardware.
3. Procurement of all PLC/RTU hardware required for conformance to these
specifications.
4. Design and submit PLCS/RTU hardware and spare parts submittals.
5. Perform all required PLCS/RTU tests, adjustments, and calibrations.
6. Furnish qualified labor to supervise PLCS/RTU installation and to perform start-up
activities.
7. Furnish all required PLCS tools, test equipment, spare parts, supplies, operations
and maintenance manuals and reproducible record drawings as specified herein.
1.2 CONTRACTOR SUBMITTALS
A. Shop Drawings: PLCS submittals shall be in accordance with the applicable
requirements of Section 40 91 00. PLCS submittals shall, however, be made separately
from other process control and instrumentation system submittals.
B. Hardware Submittals: The PLCS hardware submittal shall be a single submittal that
includes at least the following:
1. A complete index appearing in the front of each bound submittal volume.
2. Complete grounding requirements for the entire PLCS including any requirements
for PLCS communication networks and control room equipment.
3. Requirements for physical separation between PLCS components and one hundred
and twenty (120) volt, four hundred and eighty (480) volt elements.
4. Data sheets shall be included for each PLCS/RTU component provided by the
Instrument Supplier together with a technical product brochure or bulletin. The data
sheets shall include the following:
STANTEC – 05152020 (FINAL) CONTROL SYSTEMS HARDWARE
W-354 - TRIANGLE FLOW CONTROL VALVE PAGE 40 95 10-2
a. Show the component name as used within the Contract Documents.
b. The manufacturer's model number or other identifying product designation.
c. The project tag number.
d. The project system of which it is a part.
e. The input and output characteristics.
f. The requirements for electric power.
g. The ambient operating condition requirements.
h. Details on materials of construction.
5. Complete and detailed bills of materials: A bill of material list, including quantity,
description, manufacturer, part number, serial number, vendor name with phone
and spare part list with unit price where required, shall be submitted for each of the
PLCS system components. Bills of material shall include all items within an
enclosure.
6. Site-specific arrangement and construction drawings for all equipment cabinets,
including dimensions identification of all components, preparation and finish data,
nameplates, and the like. Drawings shall be scaled and show the position of the
equipment on its intended installation location. Drawings must show a scaled
representation of the placement of all equipment and its spatial relationship to all
other equipment located in the abutting and adjoining areas. All acquired access
and clearances associated with the equipment must be shown with a statement of
compliance to manufacturer's recommendations, NEC, and other applicable codes.
7. Calibration, adjustment, and test details for all PLCS/RTU components.
C. Owner’s Manuals: General requirements for Owner’s Manuals are as described in
Section 409100. The following items shall also be included in the PLCS manual:
1. A documented PLC panel configuration.
2. Operation and maintenance manuals for all of the PLC I/O cards.
1.3 SERVICES OF MANUFACTURER'S REPRESENTATIVE
A. The Contractor/Instrumentation Supplier shall arrange for visits by, and services of,
technical field representatives of the PLC manufacturer for installation certification,
system testing, and start-up. These services shall be part of the Work.
1.4 STORAGE AND HANDLING
A. All equipment and materials delivered to the Site shall be stored and handled in a
manner that shall afford maximum protection to the equipment and materials. It is the
Contractor’s responsibility to assure proper handling and on-site storage.
STANTEC – 06152020 (FINAL) CONTROL SYSTEMS HARDWARE
W-354 - TRIANGLE FLOW CONTROL VALVE PAGE 40 95 10-3
1.5 SPECIAL WARRANTY REQUIREMENTS
A. Special warranty requirements shall be in accordance with the applicable requirements
of Division 0.
B. The complete PLCS included therein shall be guaranteed to meet or exceed the design
requirements set forth in the Contract Documents.
C. Equipment and materials that do not achieve design requirements after installation shall
be replaced or modified by the Instrumentation Supplier to attain compliance. The cost
for doing so shall be the Contractor’s responsibility. Following replacement or
modification, the Contractor shall retest the system and perform any additional
procedures needed to place the complete PLCS in satisfactory operation and attain
design compliance approval from the Engineer.
D. The Contractor warrants the materials and workmanship used for the PLCS equipment
and materials and further guarantees the materials and workmanship used for any
equipment and materials produced and furnished hereunder as a part of the Work to be
as required and agreed upon, free from injurious defects, and in all respects satisfactory
for the service required.
E. The Contractor warrants/guarantees the satisfactory performance of the equipment and
materials under operating conditions for a period of two (2) years after the date of final
acceptance of the entire PLCS (i.e., completion of all contractual items including a
successful full system-wide thirty (30) day performance test as specified in Part 3). In
the event that tests and inspections disclose latent defects or failure to meet the
specified requirements, the Instrumentation Supplier upon notification by the Owner shall
proceed at once to correct or repair any such defects or non-conformance or to furnish,
at the delivery point named in the Contract Documents, such new equipment or parts as
may be necessary for conformity to the requirements, and shall receive no additional
compensation therefore. In case of any required repairs or other corrective or remedial
work covered under warranty, the warranties on all such corrections, repairs, new
equipment, or parts shall be extended for an additional twenty four (24) months from the
date of final acceptance or twelve (12) months from the date of completion of any such
corrections, repairs, new equipment, or parts, whichever date is later. If the Owner
performs repair, the Contractor shall reimburse the Owner for all costs incurred in the
removal of the defective material and installation of the replacement.
PART 2 -- PRODUCTS
2.1 GENERAL
A. The requirements of Section 40 91 00 apply to this Section.
B. All materials and all PLCS equipment furnished under this Contract by the Instrument
Supplier shall be new, free from defects, of first quality, and produced by manufacturers
regularly engaged in the manufacture of these products.
C. Hardware Commonality: Where there is more than one (1) item of similar equipment
being furnished all such similar equipment shall be the product of a singular
manufacturer.
STANTEC – 05152020 (FINAL) CONTROL SYSTEMS HARDWARE
W-354 - TRIANGLE FLOW CONTROL VALVE PAGE 40 95 10-4
1. All equipment and resources shall be able to modularly accept any anticipated
future expansion without the need to replace or retire any PLCS component or
resource.
2.2 PLCS/RTU ENCLOSURES
A. Please refer to P&ID sheet I-2 for RTU enclosure
2.3 PROGRAMMABLE LOGIC CONTROLLER HARDWARE (PLC)
A. For the RTU hardware platform including the CPU, I/O modules and communication
modules please refer to P&ID sheet I-1, I-2 and I-3.
B. For other smart modules such as valve controller, ethernet switch, DC-UPS, etc. refer to
P&ID sheet I-2.
PART 3 -- EXECUTION
3.1 INSTALLATION
A. The Contractor shall utilize personnel to accomplish, or supervise the physical
installation of all elements, components, accessories, or assemblies that it provides.
The Contractor shall employ installers who are skilled and experienced in the installation
and connection of all elements, components, accessories, and assemblies it provides.
B. All components of the PLCS including all communication cabling shall be the installation
responsibility of the Contractor unless specifically noted otherwise. The installation of the
communication network shall be the complete installation responsibility of the Contractor
including all cables, connectors, transceivers, and any required electrical grounds.
Grounding shall be shown on submittal drawings. After installation of the PLCS is
completed, the installation shall be inspected jointly by the Contractor and the
Equipment Manufacturer's representatives. Any problems shall be corrected, and when
both are satisfied with the installation, a written certification of the installation shall be
delivered to the Engineer. The certification shall state that all PLC communication and
I/O modules, modems, system grounds, communication network, workstations, printers,
and all other components of the PLCS System have been inspected and are installed in
accordance with the manufacturer's guidelines.
C. The Contractor shall provide one day services of a PLC factory representative to certify
the PLC system.
3.2 TESTING, AND INSTALLATION
A. The requirements of Section 40 91 00 apply to this Section.
- END OF SECTION -
STANTEC – 06152020 (FINAL) CONTROL PANELS
W-354 - TRIANGLE FLOW CONTROL VALVE PAGE 40 95 13-1
SECTION 40 95 13 – CONTROL PANELS
PART 1 -- GENERAL
1.1 REQUIREMENTS
A. The CONTRACTOR shall provide control panels, complete and operable, in accordance
with the Contract Documents.
B. The provisions of this Section apply to local panels provided in equipment systems
specified in other sections unless indicated otherwise in those sections.
C. The CONTRACTOR shall provide control panels in accordance with NEC Article 409
except where indicated otherwise.
1.2 CONTRACTOR SUBMITTALS
A. General: Submittals shall be furnished in accordance with General Conditions Section
2.04 – Shop Drawings.
B. Control Panel Engineering Submittal: The CONTRACTOR shall submit a control panel
engineering submittal (CPES) for each control panel and enclosure provided under
Division 40. The CPES shall completely define and document the construction, finish,
layout, power circuits, signal and safety grounding circuits, fuses, circuit breakers, signal
circuits, internally-mounted instrumentation and SCADA system components, faceplate-
mounted instrumentation components, internal panel arrangements, and external panel
arrangements. Panel drawings shall, as a minimum, be "B" size with data sheets and
manufacturer specification sheets being "A" size. The submittal shall be in conformance
with ISA S20 - Standard Forms for Process Measurement and Control Instruments,
Primary Elements and Control Valves, shall be submitted as a singular complete bound
volume or multi-volume package within one hundred and twenty (120) days after Notice
to Proceed, and shall have the following contents:
1. A complete index shall appear in the front of each bound volume. Drawings and data
sheets associated with a panel shall be grouped together with the panels being
indexed by systems or process areas. Panel tagging and nameplate nomenclature
shall be consistent with the requirements of the Contract Documents.
2. Scale construction drawings which define and quantify the type and gauge of steel to
be used for panel fabrication, the ASTM grade to be used for structural shapes and
straps, panel door locks and hinge mechanisms, type of bolts and bolt locations for
section joining and anchoring, details and proposed locations for "UNISTRUT"
members, stiffener materials and locations, electrical terminal box and outlet
locations, electrical access locations, print pocket locations, writing board locations,
and lifting lug material and locations.
3. Scaled physical arrangement drawings drawn to scale which define and quantify the
physical groupings comprising control panel sections, auxiliary panels, subpanels,
and racks. Cutout locations with nameplate identifications shall be shown.
4. The CONTRACTOR shall verify that panels supplied as part of this contract will fit into
the available space.
STANTEC – 06152020 (FINAL) CONTROL PANELS
W-354 - TRIANGLE FLOW CONTROL VALVE PAGE 40 95 13-2
5. Front of panel layouts for control panels.
6. Schematic/elementary diagrams shall depict control devices and circuits and their
functions.
7. Wiring/connection diagrams shall locate and identify electrical devices, terminals, and
interconnecting wiring. These diagrams shall show interconnecting wiring by lines,
designate terminal assignments, and show the physical location of electrical and
control devices.
8. Interconnection diagrams shall locate and identify external connections between the
control panel/control panel devices and associated equipment. These diagrams shall
show interconnecting wiring by lines, designate terminal assignments, and show the
physical locations of panel ingress and egress points.
9. Control sequence diagrams to portray the contact positions or connections required
to be made for each successive step of the control action. Written descriptions
explaining the control sequence diagrams and system operation shall be furnished.
a. Completed ISA S20 data sheets for instrumentation devices associated with
each control panel supplemented with manufacturer specification sheets which
verify conformance to the requirements of the Contract Documents.
10. A bill of material which enumerates devices associated with the control panel.
11. A priced listing of analog spare parts in conformance with Section 40 91 00.
1.3 EXTENDED PERIOD FOR CORRECTION OF DEFECTS
A. The CONTRACTOR shall correct defects in accordance with Section 40 91 00.
PART 2 -- PRODUCTS
2.1 GENERAL
A. Environmental Suitability: Indoor and outdoor control panels and instrument enclosures
shall be suitable for operation in the ambient conditions associated with the locations
designated in the Contract Documents. Heating, cooling, and dehumidifying devices shall
be provided in order to maintain instrumentation devices 20 percent within the minimums
and maximums of their rated environmental operating ranges. The CONTRACTOR shall
provide power wiring for these devices. Enclosures suitable for the environment shall be
provided. Instrumentation in hazardous areas shall be suitable for use in the particular
hazardous or classified location in which it is to be installed.
B. The control panel controls shall be one hundred and twenty (120) VAC. Where the
electrical power supply to the control panel is two hundred and forty (240) VAC single-
phase or four hundred and eighty (480) VAC three (3) phase, the control panel shall be
provided with a control panel transformer. Control conductors shall be provided in
accordance with the indicated requirements.
C. The control panel shall be the source of power for any one hundred and twenty (120) VAC
solenoid valves interconnected with the control panel. Equipment associated with the
STANTEC – 06152020 (FINAL) CONTROL PANELS
W-354 - TRIANGLE FLOW CONTROL VALVE PAGE 40 95 13-3
control panel shall be ready for service after connection of conductors to equipment,
controls, and control panel.
D. The main feeder disconnect shall have a door-mounted handle unless otherwise indicated.
E. Unless indicated otherwise, control panels shall be housed in NEMA rated enclosures in
accordance with Division 26. Control panels shall be either freestanding, pedestal-
mounted or equipment skid-mounted, as indicated. Internal control components shall be
mounted on an internal back-panel or side-panel as required.
F. Each source of foreign voltage shall be isolated by providing disconnecting or pull-apart
terminal blocks or a disconnect operable from the control panel front. Each control panel
shall be provided with identified terminal strips for the connection of external conductors.
The CONTRACTOR shall provide sufficient terminal blocks to connect twenty five (25) %
additional conductors for future use.
G. Motor starters, where required, shall be in accordance with Section 260440 – Motor
Control Centers. Each motor starter shall be provided with contact closures for motor
overload, local indication, and remote alarm. Electrical components shall be of standard
American manufacture.
H. Discrete outputs from the control panel shall be provided by electrically-isolated contacts
rated for five (5) amps at one hundred and twenty (120) VAC. Analog inputs and outputs
shall be isolated 4 to 20 mA, 2 wire signals with power supply.
I. Control panel mounted devices shall be mounted a minimum of three 3-ft above finished
floor elevation. Provide combination motor starters not furnished in a MCC but specified
in Section 46 01 00 – Equipment General Provisions
J. Painting: Steel control panels shall be thoroughly cleaned and sand blasted per Society
for Protective Coatings SP6 (Commercial Blast), after which surfaces shall receive
manufacturer's standard prime plus finish coats. The CONTRACTOR shall match the
finish color of new panels to existing for those being integrated into existing panel suites.
The finish color shall be grey unless otherwise indicated. Interior of the control panel,
back-panel, and side panels shall have a white finish coat. The CONTRACTOR shall
furnish 2 one pint containers of the finish coat for future maintenance purposes.
2.2 CONTROL PANELS
A. Materials & Fabrication: Panel enclosures shall be manufactured by Hoffman Modular
Enclosure systems or equal and in full accordance with NEC Article 409.
B. Instrument Finishing: The final coats applied to painted surface of instrument cases,
doors, or bezels which are visible from the front of panels shall be manufacturer's standard
unless otherwise indicated. Black japan or "crinkle" finishes on instrument cases are not
acceptable.
C. Mounting of Instruments
1. The panel vendor shall provide cut-outs and shall mount instrument items indicated
to be panel mounted, including any instruments indicated to be furnished by other
vendors but installed in the panel.
2. The panel vendor shall also mount behind the panels other instrument accessory
items as required for functionality as indicated.
STANTEC – 06152020 (FINAL) CONTROL PANELS
W-354 - TRIANGLE FLOW CONTROL VALVE PAGE 40 95 13-4
3. Equipment mounted at the rear of panel shall be installed to allow for commissioning
adjustments, servicing requirements, and cover removal.
4. Spare space shall be kept clear of wiring, etc., to give maximum space for future
additions.
D. Electrical Requirements
1. The CONTRACTOR shall provide conduit, wireways, switches, wire, and electrical
fittings for one hundred and twenty (120) volt circuits to instruments and other
electrical devices as required for a complete and operable installation.
2. Conduit, wireways, junction boxes, and fittings shall be provided for signal wire,
thermocouple, or resistance thermometer lead wire. Conduit or wireway runs shall
include those required between temperature sensors and temperature transmitters
and between the thermocouple wireway or junction box and instruments.
3. Each terminal connection shall have a plastic plate with a terminal and instrument tag
number. Wiring shall be identified with stamped tubular wire end markers.
4. Freestanding panels shall be provided with switched one hundred (100) watt
incandescent back-of-panel lights. One light shall be provided for every four (4) ft of
panel width and shall be mounted inside and in the top of the back-of-panel area.
5. Freestanding panels shall be provided with a fifteen (15) amp, one hundred and
twenty (120) volt, service outlet circuit within the back-of-panel area. The circuit shall
be provided with three (3) wire, 120 volt, fifteen (15) ampere, duplex receptacles, one
for every four (4) ft of panel width (one minimum per panel), spaced evenly along the
back-of-panel area.
6. Wall-mounted or pedestal-mounted panels shall be sized to adequately dissipate heat
generated by equipment mounted in or on the panel.
7. Wall-mounted or pedestal-mounted panels outside or in unshaded areas shall be
provided with thermostatically-controlled heaters that maintain inside temperatures
above four (4)° C.
8. Provide a hand switch-controlled twenty six (26) watt CFL and a breaker-protected
one hundred and twenty (120) volt, fifteen (15) amp duplex receptacle within each
wall mounted or pedestal mounted panel larger than four (4) cubic ft volume.
9. Wiring Methods: Wiring methods and materials for panels shall be in accordance
with the NEC requirements for General Purpose (no open wiring) unless otherwise
indicated.
E. Signal and Control Circuit Wiring
1. Wire type and sizes: Conductor shall be flexible stranded copper machine tool wire,
UL listed Type MTW, and shall be rated six hundred (600) volts. Wires for instrument
signal circuits and alarm input circuits shall be 14 AWG. Other wires, including
shielded cables, shall be 16 AWG minimum.
STANTEC – 06152020 (FINAL) CONTROL PANELS
W-354 - TRIANGLE FLOW CONTROL VALVE PAGE 40 95 13-5
2. Wire Insulation Colors: Conductors supplying one hundred and twenty (120) VAC
power on the line side of a disconnecting switch shall have a black insulation for the
ungrounded conductor. Grounded circuit conductors shall have white insulation.
Insulation for ungrounded (one hundred and twenty (120) VAC control circuit
conductors shall be red. Wires energized by a voltage source external to the control
panel shall have yellow insulation. Insulation for DC conductors shall be blue.
3. Wire Marking: Wire numbers shall be marked using white numbered wire markers
made from plastic-coated cloth, Brady Type B 500 or equal, or shall be heat shrink
plastic.
4. Flexible conduit is not acceptable except when specifically approved by the
ENGINEER in writing.
5. Conduit fittings shall be Crouse Hinds cast fittings or equal.
6. Splicing of wires will only be allowed in junction boxes. Splices shall be either soldered
or pressure crimped type.
7. For case grounding, panels shall be provided with a 1/4-inch by one-inch copper
ground bus complete with solderless connector for one four (4) AWG bare stranded
copper cable. The copper cable shall be provided by the CONTRACTOR and be
connected to a system ground loop.
F. Electrical Locations
1. When the Contract Documents call for thermocouple-actuated instruments, the
thermocouple lead wire shall be installed without junction by the CONTRACTOR. The
panel vendor shall provide dedicated empty conduits or wireways running from the
instruments to the top or bottom of the panel as called for in the material specifications
or as otherwise required. Sizing of the conduit or wireway shall be in accordance with
the capacity of the instruments.
2. Single case (no remote logic) annunciator units shall be installed at the top of panel
and may be considered as a terminal box when top of panel wire entry is indicated.
If bottom of panel entry is indicated, a terminal box shall be provided at the bottom of
the panel and be wired to the annunciator unit. Terminals shall be identified with
plastic marker strips.
3. Terminal boxes for incoming and outgoing signal leads shall be located at the top or
bottom of the panel as indicated in the material specification or as otherwise required.
G. Power Supply Wiring
1. Unless otherwise indicated, instruments, alarm systems, and motor controls shall
operate on one hundred and twenty (120) volt, sixty (60) Hz circuits.
2. At a location near the top of the panel (or bottom), the panel fabricator shall provide
terminal box connections for the main power supply entry.
3. Power supply switches for alarm units shall be three (3) pole type, arranged to open
both power circuits and alarm circuits. Each annunciator unit shall be equipped with
a separate switch.
STANTEC – 06152020 (FINAL) CONTROL PANELS
W-354 - TRIANGLE FLOW CONTROL VALVE PAGE 40 95 13-6
4. Instruments located on the same panel section and serving the same process unit
may be connected to a common branch circuit from the power supply. The number
of circuits depends on the circuit load as noted herein. A fifteen (15) amp, two (2)-
pole circuit breaker shall be provided in each branch circuit. The circuit load shall not
exceed ten (10) amp. Different panel sections or different process units must not use
common branch circuits. When instruments do not come equipped with integral
fuses, provide fuses as required for the protection of individual instruments against
fault currents. Fuses shall be mounted on the back of the panel in a fuse holder, and
each fuse shall be identified by a service name tag. Fuses shall be as manufactured
by Bussmann Manufacturing Division, Type KAW TRON or equal.
5. Each potentiometer type instrument, electronic transducer, controller, or analyzer
shall have an individual disconnect switch. Disconnect switches shall have metal or
plastic tags indicating instrument tag numbers. Individual plug and cord set power
supply connections may be used without switches when indicated in the material
specification.
6. Where alarm units are single unit types, one switch may be used to disconnect not
more than six (6) alarm units located on the same or adjacent panels.
H. Alarm Wiring: The panel vendor shall install and wire alarms including light cabinets,
audible signal units, test and acknowledge switches, and remote logic units as indicated.
Interconnecting wiring to panel mounted initiating devices shall also be wired by the panel
vendor. The wiring from external initiating devices shall be provided by the
CONTRACTOR. Where plug and cord sets are provided for component interconnection,
the panel vendor shall harness and support the cables in neat and orderly fashion. Where
separate wire is required, panel vendor shall install sixteen (16) AWG with dual rated
THWN/THHN insulation between components.
I. Signal Wiring
1. Signal Wire - Non Computer Use
a. Signal wire shall be twisted pair or triads in conduit or troughs. Cable shall be
constructed of sixteen (16) AWG copper signal wires with THWN or THHN
insulation.
b. Color code for instrument signal wiring shall be as follows:
c. Positive (+): Black
d. Negative ( ): Red
e. Multiconductor cables where indicated shall consist of 16 AWG copper signal
wires twisted in pairs with 90-C, 600 V fault insulation. A copper drain wire shall
be provided for the bundle with a wrap of aluminum polyester shield. The overall
bundle jacket shall be PVC.
J. Signal Wire - Computer Use
1. Signal wires shall be similar to those for non-computer use but each pair shall be
triplexed with a copper drain wire and aluminum polyester tape shall be applied over
the triplexed group. Cable shields, including thermocouple extension leads shall be
STANTEC – 06152020 (FINAL) CONTROL PANELS
W-354 - TRIANGLE FLOW CONTROL VALVE PAGE 40 95 13-7
terminated in the central control room at the computer system grounding bus.
Continuity of the shield shall be maintained throughout the cable runs.
2. Multi-conductor cables, wireways, and conduit shall be sized to allow for ten (10) %
spare signal wire.
K. Specification
1. Nominal voltage: 5 VDC.
2. Maximum continuous operating voltage: 5.2 VDC.
3. Nominal current: 450 mA. f) Voltage protection level at 1 kV/micro-second: 55 V.
4. Nominal discharge surge current: 10 kA.
5. Voltage protection level at 1 kV/micro-second: 55 V.
6. Shall withstand a maximum discharge surge current (8/20-micro second combination
wave) of 10 kA.
7. Operating Temperature Range: -40 to 85° Celsius.
2.3 SCADA SYSTEM ENCLOSURES
A. Each SCADA system PLC and remote I/O system and corresponding housing, I/O
modules, power supply modules, communication interface devices, and peripheral
equipment shall be mounted inside a NEMA enclosure in accordance with Section 26. I/O
wiring from the field to the remote I/O system shall be terminated on terminal blocks in the
lower portion of the enclosure. A nameplate shall be mounted on the outside of the door
of the enclosure and be engraved with "PLC-X" or "RIO-X" where "X" is the number as
shown on the Drawings. Where indicated, PLCs mounted in free-standing enclosures
shall be as defined on the respective P&IDs. Enclosures shall be as manufactured by
Hoffman, or equal and in full accordance with NEC Article 409.
2.4 SPARE PARTS AND SPECIAL TOOLS
A. Control panel spare parts selected by the ENGINEER and special tools shall be furnished
in accordance with Section 409100.
PART 3 -- EXECUTION
3.1 INSTALLATION
A. Preparation for Shipment and Shipping
1. Panels shall be crated for shipment using a heavy framework and skids. Panel
sections shall be cushioned to protect the finish of the instruments and panel during
shipment. Instruments that are shipped with the panel shall have suitable shipping
stops and cushioning material installed to protect parts that could be damaged due to
mechanical shock. Each separate panel unit shall be provided with removable lifting
lugs to facilitate handling.
STANTEC – 06152020 (FINAL) CONTROL PANELS
W-354 - TRIANGLE FLOW CONTROL VALVE PAGE 40 95 13-8
B. Shipments shall be by air ride van unless otherwise indicated.
C. Control panel testing and inspection shall be performed prior to shipping.
D. Control panels shall be installed in accordance with Section 409100.
3.2 CONTROL PANEL SIGNAL AND CONTROL CIRCUIT WIRING
A. Wiring Installation: Wires shall be run in plastic wireways except (1) field wiring, (2)
wiring between mating blocks in adjacent sections, (3) wiring from components on a swing
out panel to components on a part of the fixed structure, and (4) wiring to panel-mounted
components. Wiring run from components on a swing out panel to other components on
a fixed panel shall be made up in tied bundles. These bundles shall be tied with nylon
wire ties and shall be secured to panels at both sides of the hinge loop so that conductors
are not strained at the terminals.
B. Wiring run to control devices on the front panels shall be tied together at short intervals
with nylon wire ties and be secured to the inside face of the panel using adhesive mounts.
C. Wiring to rear terminals on panel-mount instruments shall be in plastic wireways secured
to horizontal brackets above or below the instruments in about the same plane as the rear
of the instruments.
D. Shop Drawings shall show conformance to the above wiring installation requirements.
E. Wire Marking: Each signal, control, alarm, and indicating circuit conductor connected to
a given electrical point shall be designated by a single unique number which shall be
shown on Shop Drawings. These numbers shall be marked on conductors at every
terminal.
3.3 CALIBRATION, TESTING, AND INSTRUCTION
A. General: Calibration, testing, and instruction shall be performed in accordance with
Section 409100 – Process Control and Instrumentation.
B. Inspection and Approval
1. Panel fabricator shall conduct the following tests prior to arrival of the ENGINEER or
before shipment, if the ENGINEER chooses not to witness factory testing.
a. Alarm circuits rung out to determine their operability.
b. Electrical circuits checked for continuity and where applicable, operability.
c. Any other test required to place the panel in an operating condition.
C. It shall be the responsibility of the CONTRACTOR to furnish necessary testing devices
and sufficient manpower to perform the tests required by the ENGINEER.
D. Field Testing: Each control panel shall be tested again for functional operation in the field
after the connection of external conductors and prior to equipment startup.
END OF SECTION
STANTEC - 06152020 (FINAL) VALVES, GENERAL
W-354 – TRIANGLE FLOW CONTROL VALVE PAGE 43 30 00 - 1
SECTION 43 30 00 - VALVES, GENERAL
PART 1 -- GENERAL
1.1 THE SUMMARY
A. Provide valves, actuators, and appurtenances, complete and operable, as indicated in
accordance with the Contract Documents.
B. The provisions of this Section shall apply to all valves and valve actuators except where
otherwise indicated.
C. Valves and actuators in particular locations may require a combination of units, sensors,
limit switches, and controls, as indicated.
D. Unit Responsibility
1. The CONTRACTOR shall assign a single manufacturer to be responsible for the
supply, coordination of design, assembly, testing, and furnishing of each valve;
however, the CONTRACTOR shall be responsible to the OWNER for compliance
with the requirements of each valve Section.
E. Single Manufacturer
1. Where 2 or more valves of the same type and size are required, the valves shall be
furnished by the same manufacturer.
1.2 CONTRACTOR SUBMITTALS
A. Furnish submittals in accordance with the requirements of General Conditions Section
2.04 – Shop Drawings.
B. Furnish the following information on Shop Drawings:
1. valve name, size, Cv factor, pressure rating, identification number (if any), and
specification section number;
2. complete information on the valve actuator, hydraulic power units (HPU), pneumatic
air supply system including size, manufacturer, model number, limit switches, and
mounting;
3. cavitation limits for control valves;
4. assembly drawings showing part nomenclature, materials, dimensions, weights, and
relationships of valve handles, hand wheels, position indicators, limit switches,
integral control systems, needle valves, and control systems;
5. data in accordance with Section 26 05 10 – Electric Motors, for electric motor-
actuated valves;
6. complete wiring diagrams and control system schematics; and,
7. A valve-labeling schedule, listing the valves to be furnished with stainless steel tags,
indicating in each case the valve location and the proposed wording for the label.
STANTEC - 06152020 (FINAL) VALVES, GENERAL
W-354 – TRIANGLE FLOW CONTROL VALVE PAGE 43 30 00 - 2
C. Furnish a technical manual containing the required information for each valve, as
indicated.
D. Furnish a spare parts list, containing the required information for each valve assembly,
as indicated.
E. Factory Test Data
1. Where indicated, submit signed, dated, and certified factory test data for each valve
requiring certification, before shipping the valve.
2. Furnish a certification of quality and test results for factory-applied coatings.
F. Field Test Data
1. Submit signed, dated, and certified field test data for each valve.
PART 2 -- PRODUCTS
2.1 PRODUCTS
A. General
1. Provide valves and gates of new and current manufacture.
2. Provide valves 6-inch and larger with actuators with position indicators.
B. Protective Coating
1. Coat the exterior surfaces of valves and the wet interior surfaces of ferrous valves of
sizes 2-inch and larger as indicated on the Drawings.
2. The valve manufacturer shall certify in writing that the required coating has been
applied and tested in the manufacturing plant prior to shipment, in accordance with
the indicated requirements.
3. Do not coat the machined flange faces of valves except where such flanges are not
adjoining a mating flange as shown in the Contract Documents. Apply rust inhibitor
coating on machined surfaces of the flange prior to shipment.
C. Valve Labeling
1. Except when such requirement is waived by the ENGINEER in writing, provide a
label on shut-off valves and control valves except for hose bibbs and chlorine
cylinder valves.
2. Furnish a label composed of 1/16-inch plastic or stainless steel, a minimum of 2
inches by 4 inches in size and permanently attached to the valve or on the wall
adjacent to the valve as directed by the ENGINEER.
D. Valve Testing
1. As a minimum, unless otherwise indicated or recommended by the reference
standards, test valves 3 inches in diameter and smaller in accordance with the
manufacturer's standard procedure.
STANTEC - 06152020 (FINAL) VALVES, GENERAL
W-354 – TRIANGLE FLOW CONTROL VALVE PAGE 43 30 00 - 3
2. Factory-test valves 4 inches in diameter and larger as follows:
a. Hydrostatic Testing
1) Subject valve bodies to an internal hydrostatic pressure equivalent to
twice the water-rated pressure of the valve.
2) Metallic valves rating pressures shall be based at 100 degrees F.
3) Plastic valves rating pressures shall be based at 73 degrees F, or at a
higher temperature according to material type.
4) During the hydrostatic test, there shall be no visible leakage through the
valve body, end joints, or shaft seals, nor shall parts of the valve be
permanently deformed.
5) Allow test duration of at least 10 minutes, in order to allow visual
examination for leakage.
b. Seat Testing
1) Test the valves for leaks in the closed position, with the pressure
differential across the seat equal to the water rated pressure of the valve.
2) Provide test duration of at least 10 minutes, in order to allow visual
examination for leakage.
3) The leakage rate shall be the more stringent of the following:
a) As recommended by the reference standard for that type of valve; or
b) Leakage past the closed valve not to exceed one fluid ounce per hour
per inch diameter for metal seated valves, and drop-tight for resilient
seated valves.
c. Performance Testing
1) Shop-operate the valves from the fully-closed to the fully-open position,
and reverse under no-flow conditions in order to demonstrate that the
valve assembly operates properly.
E. Certification
1. Prior to shipment of valves with sizes larger than 12-inches in diameter, submit
certified, notarized copies of the hydrostatic factory tests, showing compliance with
the applicable standards of AWWA, ANSI, or ASTM.
F. Valve Markings
1. Permanently mark valve bodies in accordance with MSS SP25 - Standard Marking
Systems for Valves, Fittings, Flanges, and Unions.
2.2 MATERIALS
A. General
STANTEC - 06152020 (FINAL) VALVES, GENERAL
W-354 – TRIANGLE FLOW CONTROL VALVE PAGE 43 30 00 - 4
1. Provide materials suitable for the intended application.
2. Provide materials in contact with potable water listed as compliant with NSF
Standard 61.
3. Ensure that materials not indicated are of high-grade standard commercial quality,
free from defects and imperfections that might affect the serviceability of the product
for the purpose for which it is intended.
4. Unless otherwise indicated, provide valve and actuator bodies conforming to the
following requirements:
a. Cast Iron: Close-grained gray cast iron, conforming to ASTM A 48 - Gray Iron
Castings, Class 30, or to ASTM A 126 - Gray Iron Castings for Valves, Flanges,
and Pipe Fittings
b. Ductile Iron: ASTM A 536 - Ductile Iron Castings, or to ASTM A 395 - Ferritic
Ductile Iron Pressure-Retaining Castings for Use at Elevated Temperatures
c. Steel: ASTM A 216 - Steel Castings, Carbon Suitable for Fusion Welding for
High-Temperature Service, or to ASTM A 515 - Pressure Vessel Plates, Carbon
Steel, for Intermediate- and Higher-Temperature Service
d. Bronze: ASTM B 62 - Composition Bronze or Ounce Metal Castings, and valve
stems not subject to dezincification shall conform to ASTM B 584 - Copper
Alloy Sand Castings for General Applications. Bronze materials in contact with
potable water service shall be free of lead content meeting the Lead Reduction
Act.
e. Stainless Steel: Stainless steel valve and operator bodies and trim shall
conform to ASTM A 351 - Steel Castings, Austenitic, for High-Temperature
Service, Grade CF8M, or shall be Type 316 stainless steel
f. PVC: Polyvinyl chloride materials for valve body, flanges, and cover shall
conform to Cell Classification 12454
g. CPVC: Chlorinated Poly Vinyl Chloride materials for valve body, flanges, and
cover shall conform to Cell Classification 23447
h. NSF Standard 61: Materials shall be listed for use in contact with potable water.
i. Elastomeric materials used for seat, seals and O-rings shall be compatible with
temperature, pressures and fluid or gas service.
1) Elastomeric materials for water with chloramines shall be Teflon or Viton-
A.
2) Elastomeric materials for water with dissolved ozone residual shall be
Teflon suitable for ozone service.
3) Elastomeric materials for oxygen (LOX or GOX) shall be Teflon specially
manufactured and packaged suitable for oxygen service.
STANTEC - 06152020 (FINAL) VALVES, GENERAL
W-354 – TRIANGLE FLOW CONTROL VALVE PAGE 43 30 00 - 5
2.3 VALVE CONSTRUCTION
A. Bodies
1. Provide valve bodies that are cast, molded (in the case of plastic valves), forged, or
welded, of the materials indicated, and with smooth interior passages.
2. Provide wall thicknesses uniform and in agreement with the applicable standards for
each type of valve, without casting defects, pinholes, and other defects that could
weaken the body.
3. Perform welds on welded bodies by certified welders and ground welds smooth.
4. Provide valve ends as indicated, and rated for the maximum temperature and
pressure to which the valve will be subjected.
B. Valve End Connections
1. Unless otherwise indicated, valves 2-1/2 inches in diameter and smaller may be
provided with threaded end connections.
2. Provide valves 3 inches in diameter and larger with flanged end connections.
3. Flanges, bolts and gaskets shall be as specified in Section 40 05 00 - Piping,
General.
C. Bonnets
1. Connect valve bonnets to the body by clamping, screwing, or flanging.
2. Provide bonnets of the same material, temperature, and pressure rating as the
body.
3. Make provisions for the stem seal with the necessary glands, packing nuts, and
yokes.
D. Stems
1. Provide valve stems of the materials indicated, or, if not indicated, of the best
commercially-available material for the specific service, with adjustable stem
packing, O-rings, chevron V-type packing, or other suitable seal. Bronze materials in
contact with potable water shall be NSF 61 approved and free of lead. Elastomeric
materials shall be compatible with fluid service.
2. Where dezincification is not a problem, bronze conforming to ASTM B 584 may be
used, except that the zinc content shall not exceed 16 percent.
E. Stem Guides
1. Provide stem guides spaced with an L/R ratio not to exceed 200:1. Submit
calculations for L/R ratios and guide spacing to the ENGINEER for review.
2. Stem guides shall have slotted holes and shall be adjustable in two directions.
3. Construct submerged stem guides from Type 316 stainless steel.
STANTEC - 06152020 (FINAL) VALVES, GENERAL
W-354 – TRIANGLE FLOW CONTROL VALVE PAGE 43 30 00 - 6
F. Internal Parts
1. Provide internal parts and valve trim as indicated for each individual valve.
2. Where not indicated, construct valve trim from Type 316 stainless steel or other
material best-suited for the intended service.
G. Nuts and Bolts
1. Unless otherwise indicated, provide nuts and bolts on valve flanges and supports in
accordance with the requirements of Section 05 50 00 – Miscellaneous Metalwork
and Section 40 05 00 – Piping, General.
2.4 Torque Tubes
A. Submerged or buried valves with a remote gearbox and actuator shall be supplied with a
torque tube to transfer torque from the actuator to the valve. Torque tubes shall be
directly connected to the valve and the floor stand and gear actuator. Each torque tube
and floor stand shall be sized to operate under the maximum service conditions for the
valve. Unless otherwise indicated, torque tubes shall be made of schedule 40, steel pipe
with epoxy coating suitable for the fluid service. Each submerged valve, torque tube,
floor stand and actuator shall be pre-assembled and “matched marked” in the
manufacturer’s shop to ensure proper fit when assembled in field.
2.5 Extension Shaft Stem
A. Valves mounted in dry areas with gearbox attached to the valve and with remote
actuator shall be supplied with an extension shaft stem with universal joint attached to
the gear and actuator. All components shall be sized to operate under the maximum
service conditions for the valve. Unless otherwise indicated, shaft stem and universal
joints shall be made of carbon steel with epoxy coating suitable for the fluid service.
Each valve, shaft stem, floor stand and actuator shall be pre-assembled and “matched
marked” in the manufacturer’s shop to ensure proper fit when assembled in field.
2.6 VALVE ACCESSORIES
A. Provide valves complete with the accessories required to provide a functional system.
2.7 SPARE PARTS
A. Furnish the required spare parts, suitably packaged and labeled with the valve name,
location, and identification number.
B. Furnish the name, address, and telephone number of the nearest distributor for the
spare parts of each valve.
C. Spare parts are intended for use by the OWNER, after expiration of the correction of
defects period.
2.8 MANUFACTURERS
A. Valve manufacturers shall have a successful record of not less than 5 years in the
manufacture of the indicated valves.
STANTEC - 06152020 (FINAL) VALVES, GENERAL
W-354 – TRIANGLE FLOW CONTROL VALVE PAGE 43 30 00 - 7
PART 3 -- EXECUTION
3.1 VALVE INSTALLATION AND TRIAL OPERATION
A. General
1. Install valves, actuating units, stem extensions, valve boxes, and accessories in
accordance with the manufacturer's written instructions and as indicated.
2. Adequately brace gates in order to prevent warpage and bending under the
intended use.
3. Firmly support valves in order to avoid undue stresses on the pipe.
B. Access
1. Install valves in a manner to provide easy access for actuation, removal, and
maintenance, and to avoid interference between valve actuators and structural
members, handrails, and other equipment.
C. Valve Accessories
1. Where combinations of valves, sensors, switches, and controls are indicated,
properly assemble and install such items such that systems are compatible and
operating properly.
2. Clearly note the relationship between interrelated items on Shop Drawing
submittals.
D. Trial Operation
1. After installation, schedule trial operation witnessed by the ENGINEER and the
OWNER representative.
2. All valves shall be cleaned thoroughly of all foreign materials and final adjustments
made. The valves shall then be operated through one complete cycle from a fully
closed position to a fully open position and back to a fully closed position to verify that
the assembly is functional.
3. For control valves that operate in multiple operating scenarios, the CONTRACTOR
shall simulate all operational scenarios including the hydraulic power units, pilot
control system or pneumatic air supply system to demonstrate compliance to the
specifications.
4. A field leakage test meeting the maximum allowable specified requirement shall be
conducted.
5. Test certificate shall be signed by the valve manufacturer and the CONTRACTOR
and shall be submitted to the ENGINEER.
END OF SECTION
STANTEC - 06152020 (FINAL) RATE OF FLOW CONTROL VALVES
W-354 – TRIANGLE FLOW CONTROL VALVES PAGE 43 30 36 - 1
SECTION 43 30 36 - RATE OF FLOW CONTROL VALVES
PART 1 -- GENERAL
1.1 THE SUMMARY
A. The CONTRACTOR shall provide rate of flow control valves and appurtenances,
complete and operable, in accordance with the Contract Documents.
B. The requirements of Section 43 30 00 - Valves, General apply to this Section.
1.2 CONTRACTOR SUBMITTALS
A. Furnish submittals in accordance with Section 43 30 00- Valves, General.
PART 2 -- PRODUCTS
2.1 VALVE CHARACTERISTICS
A. The rate of flow control valve shall be an electronic control valve and capable of
controlling a predetermined rate of flow regardless of fluctuations in the upstream
pressure. Solenoid pilot controls equipped onto the electronic control valve are actuated
by electrical signals received from SCADA and/or a local VC-22D electronic valve
controller. The solenoid pilots either add or relieve line pressure from the cover chamber
of the control valve, causing it to open or close, ensuring the process variable signal
follows the set-point command signal. This enables remote control over the electronic
control valve operations. The process variable signal would come from a flow meter. The
electric solenoid pilot controls can also be combined with hydraulic or electronic
motorized pilot controls to create dual function, or fail-safe capability. Upon receiving the
remote setpoint command from SCADA or a local command from the electronic valve
controller, the electronic valve shall modulate and maintain the desired setpoint value.
When the feedback signal deviates from the setpoint, the appropriate opening or closing
solenoid on the valve will pulse. As the feedback signal approaches the setpoint, this
on/off pulse time will gradually decrease to smoothly modulate the valve to setpoint.
When the feedback signal is within a programmable dead band, the opening and closing
solenoids will lock the cover and the electronic valve will maintain position. Necessary
repairs shall be possible without removing the valve from the pipeline.
B. Materials: materials of construction shall be in accordance with the following
requirements:
Component Materials
Body and Cover Ductile iron ASTM A536
Main Valve Trim Stainless steel
Seat Stainless steel
Stem, Nut and Spring Stainless steel
Seal Disc Buna-N rubber
STANTEC - 06152020 (FINAL) RATE OF FLOW CONTROL VALVES
W-354 – TRIANGLE FLOW CONTROL VALVES PAGE 43 30 36 - 2
Diaphragm Nylon Reinforced Buna-N rubber
Internal Trim Parts Stainless steel
Pressure Rating Class 150lb. (250psi Max.)
Temperature Range Water to 180 °F
Any other wetted metallic parts Stainless steel
Coating Fusion Bonded Epoxy coating (interior and exterior),
ANSI/NSF 61 approved
2.2 VALVE CONSTRUCTION
A. Main Valve: The main valve shall be hydraulically operated, single diaphragm actuated,
globe pattern. The valve shall consist of three major components; the body with seat
installed, the cover with bearing installed and the diaphragm assembly. The diaphragm
assembly shall be the only moving part and shall form a sealed chamber in the upper
portion of the valve, separating the operating pressure from line pressure. Packing glands,
stuffing boxes and/or rolling diaphragm technology will not be permitted and there shall be
no pistons operating the main valve or pilot controls. No fabrication or welding shall be
used in the manufacturing process. Y-pattern valves shall not be permitted. Main valve
shall be certified by NSF/ANSI Standard 61 as a safe drinking water system component.
B. End Connections: End Connections for control valve shall be flanged per ASME/ANSI
B16.42, Class 150.
C. Main Valve Body:
1. No separate chamber(s) below the diaphragm shall be allowed between the main
valve cover and body. No fabrication or welding shall be used in the manufacturing
process.
2. The valve shall contain a resilient, synthetic rubber disc with a rectangular cross-
section contained on three and one half sides by a disc retainer and forming a tight
seal against a single removable seat insert. No O-ring type discs (circular, square, or
quad type) shall be permitted as the seating surface. The disc guide shall be of the
contoured type to permit smooth transition of flow and shall hold the discs firmly in
place. The disc retainer shall be of a sturdy one-piece design capable of withstanding
opening and closing shocks. It must have straight edge sides and a radius at the top
edge to prevent excessive diaphragm wear as the diaphragm flexes across this
surface. No hours-glass shaped disc retainers shall be permitted and no V-type or
slotted-type disc guides shall be used.
3. The diaphragm assembly containing a non-magnetic stainless steel stem; of sufficient
diameter to withstand high hydraulic pressures and shall be fully guided at both ends
by a bearing in the main valve cover and an integral bearing in the valve seat. The
valve seat shall be a solid, one-piece design and shall have a minimum five-degree
taper on the seating surface for a positive, drip-tight shut off. No center guides shall
be permitted. The stem shall be drilled and tapped in the cover end to receive and
STANTEC - 06152020 (FINAL) RATE OF FLOW CONTROL VALVES
W-354 – TRIANGLE FLOW CONTROL VALVES PAGE 43 30 36 - 3
affix such accessories as may be deemed necessary. The diaphragm assembly shall
be the only moving part and shall form a sealed chamber in the upper portion of the
valve, separating the operating pressure from the line pressure. No bolts or cap
screws shall be permitted for use in the construction of the diaphragm assembly.
4. The flexible, non-wicking, FDA approved diaphragm shall consist of nylon fabric
bonded with synthetic rubber compatible with the operating fluid. The diaphragm’s
center hole for the main valve stem must be sealed by the vulcanized process or a
rubber grommet sealing the center stem hole from the operating pressure. The
diaphragm must withstand a Mullins Burst Test of a minimum of 600 X per layer of
nylon fabric and shall be cycled tested 100,000 times to insure longevity. The
diaphragm shall not be used as the seating surface. The diaphragm shall be fully
supported in the valve body and cover by machined surfaces which support no less
than one-half of the total surface area of the diaphragm in either the fully opened or
fully closed position. Bellofram type rolling diaphragms shall not be permitted.
5. The main valve seat and stem bearing in the valve cover shall be removable. The
cover bearing and seat in the 6” and smaller size valve shall be threaded into the
cover and body. The valve seat in the 8” and larger size valves shall be retained by
flat head machine screws for ease of maintenance. The lower bearing of the valve
stem shall be contained concentrically within the seat and shall be exposed to the flow
on all sides to avoid deposits. To insure proper alignment of the valve stem, the valve
body and cover shall be machined with a locating lip. No “pinned” covers to the valve
body shall be permitted. Cover bearing, disc retainer and seat shall be made of the
same material. All necessary repairs and/or modifications other than replacement of
the main valve body shall be possible without removing the valve from the pipeline.
The valve shall be designed such that both the cover assembly and internal
diaphragm assembly can be disassembled and lifted vertically straight up from the top
of a narrow opening/vault. Y-pattern valves shall not be permitted. The seat shall be
of the solid one piece design. Two piece seats or seat inserts shall not be permitted.
Packing glands and/or stuffing boxes shall not be permitted.
D. Pilot Control System: The pilot control shall be through two direct acting two-way
solenoid pilot valves controlled by an external power source. The pilot control system
shall include strainers and solenoid manual by-pass valves. The pilot control system
shall utilize copper control tubing and brass fittings. The solenoid pilot valves either add
or relieve line pressure from the cover chamber of the main valve, causing it to open or
close as directed by the electronic controller. Solenoids shall have NEMA 4 enclosures.
E. Material of Construction for Solenoid Pilot Controls:
Component Materials
Body Brass B283
Pilot Trim Brass & 303 Stainless steel
Seals and Disc NBR
Core and Plugnut 430F Stainless steel
Core Springs 302 Stainless steel
STANTEC - 06152020 (FINAL) RATE OF FLOW CONTROL VALVES
W-354 – TRIANGLE FLOW CONTROL VALVES PAGE 43 30 36 - 4
Shading Coil Copper
Disc-Holder CA
Core Guide CA
Connections FNPT
Pressure Rating 400 psi Max.
Temperature Range Water to 125 °F
Power Supply 120VAC / 60 Hz
Enclosure NEMA Type 1, General purpose, watertight
Control Tubing Copper
Control Fittings Brass
F. Valve Accessories: The valve shall be furnished with pressure gauges and transmitters
on valve inlet and outlet. The pressure transmitter shall be with 4-20mA looped power,
NEMA 6 (IP 68) enclosure, stainless steel construction, and an isolation valve. For
remote position indication, the valve shall be furnished with a position transmitter of 4-
20mA output and NEMA 6 (IP 68) enclosure.
G. Nameplates: Each valve and associated pilot(s) shall be provided with an identifying
nameplate. Nameplates, depending on type and size of control valve, shall be mounted
in the most practical position possible, typically on the inlet side of the valve body.
Nameplates shall be brass and a minimum of 3/32” thick, 3/4" high and 2-3/4” long.
Pertinent control valve data shall be etched or stamped into the nameplate. Data shall
include control valve Catalog number, function, size, material, pressure rating, end-
connection details, type of pilot controls used and control adjustment range.
2.3 FACTORY TESTS AND WARRANTY
A. Valves shall be factory-tested with a hydrostatic test and a functional test, and a test
certificate shall be submitted to the ENGINEER prior to delivery of the valve. The valve
shall be warranted for a period of 3 years from the date of shipment to be free of defects
in materials and workmanship.
2.4 OPERATING CONDITIONS
A. The valve shall be designed to operate under the following conditions:
Maximum inlet pressure, psi 27.5
Minimum inlet pressure, psi 20.0
Minimum outlet pressure, psi 11.0
STANTEC - 06152020 (FINAL) RATE OF FLOW CONTROL VALVES
W-354 – TRIANGLE FLOW CONTROL VALVES PAGE 43 30 36 - 5
Maximum flow, gpm 11,000
Minimum flow, gpm 0
Valve size, inches 16
2.5 SPARE PARTS
A. The following spare parts shall be furnished in accordance with Section 43 30 00-
Valves, General:
1. One complete set of resilient seals and discs
2. One diaphragm
2.6 MANUFACTURERS
A. Cla-Val Company, Model 131G-01
B. No Equal
PART 3 -- EXECUTION
3.1 INSTALLATION
A. Valves shall be installed in accordance with provisions of Section 43 30 00- Valves,
General.
3.2 SERVICES OF MANUFACTURER
A. Inspection, Startup, and Field Adjustment: The service representative of the valve
manufacturer shall be present at the Site for 2 Days, to assist the CONTRACTOR in the
installation and adjustment of the valve(s).
B. Instruction of OWNER'S Personnel: The training representative of the valve
manufacturer shall be present at the Site for 1 Day to instruct the personnel in the
operation, adjustment, and maintenance of the valve(s).
C. For the purpose of this paragraph, a Day is defined as an 8 hour period, excluding travel
time.
END OF SECTION
APPENDIX “A”
WATER STANDARD DRAWINGS
DRAWN:
DATE:
SCALE:APPROVED:
DWG. NO.
SHEET
OF
06-29-2020
x
x
x
DRAWN:
DATE:
SCALE:APPROVED:
DWG. NO.
SHEET
OF
06-29-2020
x
x
x
12" MIN.
36" MAX.
DRAWN:
DATE:
SCALE:APPROVED:
DWG. NO.
SHEET
OF
06-29-2020
x
x
x
NO JOINTS IN SEWER
3'2'
NO JOINTS IN SEWER
5'
5'10'
12"
12"
5'
3'
10'
DRAWN:
DATE:
SCALE:APPROVED:
DWG. NO.
SHEET
OF
06-29-2020
DRAWN:
DATE:
SCALE:APPROVED:
DWG. NO.
SHEET
OF
06-29-2020
APPENDIX “B”
PUBLIC WORKS STANDARD DRAWINGS
__________________________________________________________________
DANIEL BOBADILLA, P.E., DIRECTOR OF PUBLIC WORKS / CITY ENGINEER AUGUST 07, 2017
G1-1..……………………………………………………………Standard Title Block
R1-1………………………………………………...…...........Standard Street Section
R2-1…..……………………………………………Standard Cul-de-sac Dimensions
R3-1………..……………………………………………………..…….Street Knuckle
R4-1………..……………………………………………..…Curb and Gutter Details
R5-1………………..………………………………………Standard Drive Approach
R6-1….……………………………………………………Standard Sidewalk Details
R7-1..………….………………………………………………Standard Cross Gutter
R8-1..…………….………………………………………Standard Alley Intersection
R9-1..………………………………………………………………………Curb Drain
R10-1…………….………………………………………Standard Sidewalk Culvert
R11-1………...…..………………………………………...Reconstruction of Asphalt
Abutting New Portland
Cement Concrete
Improvements
R12-1..…………………………………..………………...…Restoration of Asphalt –
Street Excavation
R13-1..…………………………………………………...…………...Asphalt Cut-Off
R14-1..……………………………………………………………Standard Barricade
R15-1..……………….……………………………………Standard Sign Installation
CITY OF AZUSA
ENGINEERING DIVISION
R12-1
PAGE 2 OF 2
RESTORATION OF ASPHALT - STREET EXCAVATION
6&277+(15<SEPTEMBER 21, 2020 UB9/21/2020
8(10)8FURNISH AND INSTALL BOLLARDS PER DETAIL ON SHEET 4.
CALL BEFORE YOU DIGSEAL
UNDERGROUND SERVICE ALERTCALL: TOLL FREE811TWO WORKING DAYS BEFORE YOU DIGCITY OF AZUSAAZUSA LIGHT AND WATERPLANS PREPARED BYREVISIONSBENCHMARKPERMIT REQUIRED OF 9300 NORTH LAKE AVENUE, SUITE 400PASADENA, CA 91101626.796.9141 stantec.comW-35433CONSTRUCTION PLANS FORTRIANGLE FLOW CONTROLVALVE PROJECTGENERAL ELECTRICAL NOTESABBREVIATIONSSCHEMATIC SYMBOLSPOWER PLAN SYMBOLSLIGHTING PLAN SYMBOLSGROUNDING
CALL BEFORE YOU DIGSEAL
UNDERGROUND SERVICE ALERTCALL: TOLL FREE811TWO WORKING DAYS BEFORE YOU DIGCITY OF AZUSAAZUSA LIGHT AND WATERPLANS PREPARED BYREVISIONSBENCHMARKPERMIT REQUIRED OF 9300 NORTH LAKE AVENUE, SUITE 400PASADENA, CA 91101626.796.9141 stantec.comW-35433CONSTRUCTION PLANS FORTRIANGLE FLOW CONTROLVALVE PROJECTGENERAL NOTESFRONT ELEVATIONSIDE PANEL ELEVATIONINTERIOR PANEL DETAILMETERREADINGWINDOW16.25"METERCOVERLP1HINGEDDOOR48.00"METERSAFETYSOCKETLOADCENTERMANUALBYPASS16.00"HINGEDHOODMETERSOCKETCOVERMETERSECTIONCUSTOMERSECTIONUTILITY ACCESSCOVER W/PADKLOCK17.25"MYERS MEGU16 PANEL NEMA 3R MYERS MEGU16 PANEL MYERS MEGU16 PANEL METERING PANEL4.00"3.00"3.00"3.00"CONCRETEPAD8"18"INDICATEDON DWGS10" OR AS INDICATEDON DRAWINGS1:1#4TOOLEDEDGE#4 @ 12" UNLESSOTHERWISE NOTED3 1/2" OR ASLEVEL OR SLOPED ASINDICATED ON DWGSSLAB-ON-GRADES-902FOR EQUIPMENT FOUNDATIONNOTES:COMPACTED FILLPER SPEC SECTION31 30 00 (TYP)1. PROVIDE 1/2" PREMOLDED EXPANSION JOINT FILLER BETWEEN SLAB ANDADJACENT STRUCTURE.2. WHERE EQUIPMENT IS ANCHORED TO SLAB, SLAB SIZE SHALL BE ADEQUATE TOMEET THE EMBED LENGTH AND EDGE DISTANCE REQUIREMENTS FROM THEANCHOR OR BOLT CALCULATIONS. THE MINIMUM SLAB THICKNESS SHALL BE 1.5TIMES THE ANCHOR BOLT EMBED DEPTH.S-902ALWBOLLARD DETAIL6'-6"3'-6"6" MIN.16"Ø PCC FOOTING4" GALV. STEEL PIPE, 1/4"WALL (MIN.) FILLED W/NON-SHRINK GROUTCROWN CONCRETE BASE ATTHE TOP TO SHED WATERFINISHED GRADENOTES:1. PAINT THE PIPE BARRIERS YELLOW. POSITION POSTS 2' IN FRONT OF AND 2.5' EACHSIDE OF UTILITY.2. A MINIMUM OF TWO BARRIER SHALL BE INSTALLED IN FRONT OF ABOVE GRADEWATER FACILITIES IF NO CURB EXISTS. FOUR BARRIERS SHALL BE USED IFTRAFFIC CAN ACCESS FACILITIES FROM ALL SIDES.1. THE BOLLARDS SHALL BE PAINTED YELLOW. 2. TEN (10) BARRIERS ARE REQUIRED TO GO AROUND THE PANEL. THE POSITION OF THE POSTS SHALL BE DETERMINED BY ALW IN THE FIELD.
CALL BEFORE YOU DIGSEAL
UNDERGROUND SERVICE ALERTCALL: TOLL FREE811TWO WORKING DAYS BEFORE YOU DIGCITY OF AZUSAAZUSA LIGHT AND WATERPLANS PREPARED BYREVISIONSBENCHMARKPERMIT REQUIRED OF 9300 NORTH LAKE AVENUE, SUITE 400PASADENA, CA 91101626.796.9141 stantec.comW-35433CONSTRUCTION PLANS FORTRIANGLE FLOW CONTROLVALVE PROJECTNKEY NOTESGENERAL NOTES
CALL BEFORE YOU DIGSEAL
UNDERGROUND SERVICE ALERTCALL: TOLL FREE811TWO WORKING DAYS BEFORE YOU DIGCITY OF AZUSAAZUSA LIGHT AND WATERPLANS PREPARED BYREVISIONSBENCHMARKPERMIT REQUIRED OF 9300 NORTH LAKE AVENUE, SUITE 400PASADENA, CA 91101626.796.9141 stantec.comW-35433CONSTRUCTION PLANS FORTRIANGLE FLOW CONTROLVALVE PROJECTFIC3011:1X** XXXSPEC. No.CASE/POSMODELCONTROLLER:PCM No.CARD No.NEST No.SLOT No.TRANSMITTER:MODELSPEC. No.CRSLAINSTRUMENT SYMBOLSEE INSTRUMENT SYMBOLSINSTRUMENT SYMBOLS - CONTPLC / REMOTE I/O POINTS* 2-WIRE NETWORK INTERFACE. SEE SPECIFICATION FOR MORE INFORMATIONSAMPLE LOOP DIAGRAM (ISA EXPANDED FORMAT)FIELD PROCESS AREAFIELD JUNCTIONNOTE 34-20 mADCFE301FT301FY301NOTE 20-100JB400111213141516FV301FL27262524232221500JBA6A5PR-20800181578XX120-1000 CFMPANEL FRONT (CONSOLE No.XX)PANEL REAR0-XXXX PR-1PR-2NOTE 1VALVE:MODELBODY/PORT SIZESPEC. No.SPEC. No.MODELTRANSDUCER:PR-14PR-15JB300123456INSTRUMENT RANGEINSTRUMENT SYMBOLSINSTRUMENT** * ****************aaaaaaaaaaaaaaaaaaabbbbbbbbbbbbbbbbbbb*abCOMPUTING OR CONVERTING FUNCTIONSCOMPUTINGCONVERTINGXXXCONTROL FUNCTION DESIGNATIONSINDICATING LIGHT - FIELD MOUNTED, MAY BE LOCATEDON A CONTROL PANELIINSTRUMENTATION LINE SYMBOLOGYINSTRUMENT LINES24 VDCASOTHER INSTRUMENTATION SYMBOLS AND SYMBOLOGYABBREVIATIONSMODIFIERFIRST LETTER SUCCEEDING LETTER(S)MODIFIEROUTPUT FUNCTIONFIRST LETTERSUCCEEDING LETTER(S)RUN INDICATION SHALL BE RED, OFF INDICATION SHALL BE GREENTAG SCHEMAPAH01GENERAL INSTRUMENTATION NOTESINSTRUMENTATION CALL-OUTLOOP NUMBERxxxabINSTRUMENT SET POINT REMOTE I/OACDEFGHIJKNOPQRSTUVWXYZANALYSISBURNER, COMBUSTIONCONDUCTIVITYDENSITYVOLTAGEFLOW RATEGAUGEHANDCURRENT (ELECTRICAL)POWERTIME, TIME SCHEDULELEVELMOTORTORQUEPRESSURE, VACUUMQUANTITYRADIATIONSPEED, FREQUENCYTEMPERATUREMULTIVARIABLEVIBRATION, MECHANICAL ANALYSISWEIGHT, FORCEINTRUSIONEVENT, STATE, OR PRESENCEPOSITION, DIMENSIONBLMDIFFERENTIALRATIO (FRACTION)SCANTIME RATE OF CHANGEMOMENTARYINTEGRATE, TOTALIZESAFETYX AXISY AXISZ AXISINDICATEISOLATEALARMSENSOR (PRIMARY ELEMENT)GLASS, VIEWING DEVICELIGHTORIFICE, RESTRICTIONPOINT (TEST) CONNECTIONRECORDMULTIFUNCTIONWELLCONTROLTRANSMITISOLATORCONTROL STATIONSWITCHMULTIFUNCTIONVALVE, DAMPER, LOUVERCOMPUTER, CONVERTDRIVER, ACTUATOR, FINALCONTROL ELEMENTCLOSEDHIGHLOWMIDDLE, INTERMEDIATEOPENMULTIFUNCTIONTYPICAL TAG FORMATPAH-01PAH01INSTRUMENT TAG NUMBERFUNCTIONAL IDENTIFICATIONEXPANDED TAG FORMAT12PAHPAH01AINSTRUMENT TAG NUMBERAREA / BUILDING NUMBERREV 07052008INSTRUMENT ID OR TAG NUMBER(SEE TAG SCHEMA)LOCATION OR CONTROL FUNCTIONSEE INSTRUMENT SYMBOLSPRIMARYLOCATION(ACCESSIBLE)(1)PRIMARYLOCATION(INACCESSIBLE)(2)FIELDMOUNTEDAUXILIARYLOCATION(ACCESSIBLE)(1)AUXILIARYLOCATION(INACCESSIBLE)(2)SHARED DISPLAYSHARED CONTROLCOMPUTERFUNCTIONPROGRAMMABLELOGIC CONTROL(1)(2)*ABDESIGNATIONS SUCH AS 100 (LOCAL CONTROL PANEL NO 100),200 (LOCAL CONTROL PANEL NO 200), ETC., ARE USED WHENNECESSARY TO SPECIFY INSTRUMENT OR FUNCTION LOCATION.NORMALLY ACCESSIBLE TO OPERATORNORMALLY INACCESSIBLE TO OPERATOR (BEHIND-THE-PANEL)LOCATION OR CONTROL FUNCTION - SEE BELOWINSTRUMENT IDENTIFICATION/TAG NUMBER(SEE TAG DESIGNATION FOR MORE INFO)INSTRUMENT LOOP NUMBERAHCAMASDEVHMLHOAHORLORLOSLRMOAOACOCOACAUTO/HOLD/CLOSEAUTO/MANUALAIR SUPPLYDEVIATIONHIGH/MID/LOWHAND/OFF/AUTOHAND/OFF/REMOTELOCAL/OFF/REMOTELOCKOUT STOPLOCAL/REMOTEMANUAL/OFF/AUTOOPEN/AUTO/CLOSEOPEN/CLOSEOPEN/AUTO/CLOSEOLHOOOSCPIDPOTRLRSLSDSELSPSRSSSTSTROFF/LOW/HIGHON/OFFOPEN/STOP/CLOSEPROPORTIONAL/INTEGRAL/DERIVATIVEPOTENTIOMETERRAISE/LOWERRAISE/STOP/LOWERSHUTDOWNSELECTSET POINTSTART/RESETSTART/STOPSTARTSTOP/RESET(E)(F)(R)DISCRETEOUTPUTDATA SIGNALINPUT*VOLTAGECURRENTPNEUMATICEIPRDOANALOGBINARYHYDRAULICABHRESISTANCE (ELECT)DIGITALELECTROMAGNETIC,SONICFIRST LETTERSUCCEEDING LETTER(S)LOOP NUMBEROPTIONAL SUFFIXNOTES:/MEASURED ORINITIATING VARIABLEREADOUT ORPASSIVE FUNCTIONDISCRETEINPUTANALOGOUTPUTDATA SIGNALOUTPUT*ELEVATION 12 FTABOVE GRADEORIFICE ID=X.XXB RATIO = 0.XXCABLENo 10CABLENo 30ES115V60HzREVERSE ACTINGOUTPUT SIGNALINDICATING LIGHT - PANEL MOUNTEDCONTROL RELAYLIGHTNING SURGE ARRESTOREXPONENTIALBIASHIGH LIMITINGLOW LIMITINGLINEARIZERFOCFORFOTHMILCPLCSMCCMCPMOVMSNCNOOIPCPLCRIORVSSRTUSWTCTSPUPSVCPVFDVSDDIRECT ACTINGOUTPUT SIGNALPOWER SUPPLY (SIZE AS NOTED)AIR SUPPLYPRIMARY ELECTRICAL POWER(120V/60HZ UNLESS INDICATED OTHERWISE)INDICATES VENDOR FURNISHED EQUIPMENTCABLE (MULTICONDUCTOR OR COAXIAL)FURNISHED WITH EQUIPMENTEXISTING EQUIPMENTFUTURE EQUIPMENTRELOCATED EQUIPMENTSINGLE INSTRUMENT OR OTHER COMPONENT HAVINGMULTIPLE FUNCTIONSRELAY INTERLOCK LOGIC - SEE SCHEMATICS ORSPECIFICATIONS FOR MORE INFORMATIONSUMMINGADDITIONSUBTRACTIONMULTIPLYINGDIVIDINGSQ ROOT EXTRACTIONPROPORTIONALDERIVATIVEAVERAGINGRATIODIFFERENCEHIGH SELECTINGLOW SELECTINGINTEGRALNEW WORK (UNSCREENED)EXISTING (SCREENED)EXISTING TO BE DEMOLISHEDFUTURE EQUIPMENT (LONG DASH, SHORT DASH)NETWORK DATA COMMUNICATIONCAPILLARYDATA LINKELECTRIC (PULSE SIGNAL)ELECTRICAL SIGNALULTRASONIC SIGNALHYDRAULIC SIGNALMECHANICAL LINKPNEUMATIC SIGNALPROCESS3-15PSIGAS100PSIGAS20 PSIG4-20mADC1. FV-301 FULLY OPEN AT 15 PSIG AND FULLY CLOSED AT 3 PSIG.2. STAND MOUNT NEAR, BUT NOT ON THE CONTROL VALVE.3. FE-301 REQUIRES 10 PIPE DIAMETERS UPSTREAM AND 5 PIPE DIAMETERS DOWNSTREAM OF STRAIGHT PIPE.4. DETAIL SURGE ARRESTOR INSTALLATION AND GROUNDING AS APPLICABLE1. ADDITIONAL INSTRUMENTATION AND CONTROL SYMBOLS MAY BE USED AS REQUIRED. SYMBOLS AND NOMENCLATURE ARE BASED ON ISA STANDARD 5.1-INSTRUMENTATION SYMBOLS AND IDENTIFICATION.2. SEE ELECTRICAL AND GENERAL SHEETS FOR ADDITIONAL SYMBOLS AND ABBREVIATIONS.3. SEE SPECIFICATION SECTION 409100 FOR COMPLETE DETAILS OF LOOP DRAWING SUBMITTAL REQUIREMENTS.4. POWER SUPPLIES FOR INSTRUMENT LOOPS OR SYSTEMS SHALL BE FURNISHED BY THE INSTRUMENTATION SUPPLIER TO MEET THE VOLTAGE AND CURRENT REQUIREMENTS OF THE COMPONENTS IN EACH LOOP OR SYSTEM.5. FIELD SWITCHES FOR ELECTRIC MOTOR OPERATION SHALL BE SUPPLIED BY THE ELECTRICAL CONTRACTOR. EXCEPTIONS ARE SWITCHES THAT ARE PART OF VENDOR PACKAGES.6. VALVE ACTUATORS SHALL BE SUPPLIED WITH THE VALVE BY THE VALVE SUPPLIER, UNLESS OTHERWISE NOTED.FIRST LETTERSUCCEEDING LETTER(S)LOOP NUMBERANALOGINPUTFIBER OPTIC CABLEFIBER OPTIC REPEATERFIBER OPTIC TRANSCEIVERHUMAN MACHINE INTERFACELOCAL CONTROL PANELLOCAL CONTROL STATIONMOTOR CONTROL CENTERMAIN CONTROL PANELMOTOR OPERATED VALVEMOTOR STARTERNORMALLY CLOSEDNORMALLY OPENOPERATOR INTERFACEPERSONAL COMPUTERPROGRAMMABLE LOGICCONTROLLERREMOTE I/OREDUCED VOLTAGE SOLID-STATE STARTERREMOTE TERMINAL UNITSEAL WATERTHERMOCOUPLETWISTED SHIELD PAIRUNINTERRUPTABLE POWERSUPPLYVENDOR SUPPLIED PANELVARIABLE FREQUENCY DRIVEVARIABLE SPEED DRIVEPOSITION B-3BUILDING - APAH12-RW-PAH-01ARWFUNCTIONAL IDENTIFICATIONPROCESS ABBREVIATION
CALL BEFORE YOU DIGSEAL
UNDERGROUND SERVICE ALERTCALL: TOLL FREE811TWO WORKING DAYS BEFORE YOU DIGCITY OF AZUSAAZUSA LIGHT AND WATERPLANS PREPARED BYREVISIONSBENCHMARKPERMIT REQUIRED OF 9300 NORTH LAKE AVENUE, SUITE 400PASADENA, CA 91101626.796.9141 stantec.comW-35433CONSTRUCTION PLANS FORTRIANGLE FLOW CONTROLVALVE PROJECTRTU PANELLCP-001LOCALRTU RACKVALVECONTROLLERVC-22DSS24"x16"16"x24"TO SIERRA MADRERESERVOIRFROM WTPEFFLUENT TANKMCLA-VAL&24"x16"
2'1'-6"1'-9"5'5'4'-9"3"3"4"3"3"4"CALL BEFORE YOU DIGSEAL
UNDERGROUND SERVICE ALERTCALL: TOLL FREE811TWO WORKING DAYS BEFORE YOU DIGCITY OF AZUSAAZUSA LIGHT AND WATERPLANS PREPARED BYREVISIONSBENCHMARKPERMIT REQUIRED OF 9300 NORTH LAKE AVENUE, SUITE 400PASADENA, CA 91101626.796.9141 stantec.comW-35433CONSTRUCTION PLANS FORTRIANGLE FLOW CONTROLVALVE PROJECTSCALE: 3" = 1 '65432ITEM QTYPART NUMBERBILL OF MATERIALHOFFMANMANUFACTURER DESCRIPTIONCONTROLWAVECONTROLWAVE7CONTROLWAVEPULS-CS5.243396560-02-4396897-02-9A60P24396657-02-8396563-16-3S1111CONTROLWAVEPULSPULS8PHOENIX CONTACT1HOFFMAN60"x24"x18" ENCLOSURE - NEMA 4X FREE STANDING, SINGLE DOOR ACCESSA602418SSFSN4110A 24-28VDC UPS CONTROLLER910FUSED DOUBLE LEVEL TERMINAL BLOCK AND FUSE PLUG151161811920121461722212425126271282913031PHOENIX CONTACT2132ABBANALOG SURGE PROTECTOR COVERENCLOSURE BACKPLANECWM POWER SUPPLYCPU MODULE W/ ETHERNET W/O GASMIXED I/O CARD: 6DIO, 4AI, 1AOPULS-UB10.24524V 5A POWER SUPPLYSINGLE LEVEL TERMINAL BLOCK1113TRIPLE LAYER TERMINAL BLOCKTRIPLE LAYER TERMINAL BLOCK COVERABBABBPHOENIX CONTACTAUTOMATION DIRECTSIEMENSSINGLE POLE CIRCUIT BREAKERSABBHOFFMANGE-MDSPOWER SONIC231AUTOMATION DIRECT1154121117411111111SOS4 SLOT BASE CHASSISPHOENIX CONTACTPHOENIX CONTACTPHOENIX CONTACTPHOENIX CONTACTPHOENIX CONTACTPHOENIX CONTACTPHOENIX CONTACTPHOENIX CONTACTPHOENIX CONTACTABB30441023047028304731630448143044720 / 30368060461018SINGLE LEVEL TERMINAL BLOCK COVERDOUBLE LEVEL TERMINAL BLOCKDOUBLE LEVEL TERMINAL BLOCK COVER2770024296617128381862838995S201-C20S201-C6S201-C162905557 / 2905234DN-G8DN-EB35ECGB10330036DAH1001AORBIT-ECR-900RABPS-12120 F22966197ABB-01732200533THOMAS AND BETTS1TY2X3NPG6 / TY2CPG634SIXNET1SLX-5ES135CLA-VAL1VC-22D24V DIGITAL OUTPUT RELAYANALOG SURGE PROTECTORSINGLE POLE CIRCUIT BREAKERSSINGLE POLE CIRCUIT BREAKERS120V TVSSGROUND BLOCKDIN RAIL END ANCHORGROUND BARENCLOSURE OUTLETENCLOSURE ELECTRIC HEATER, THERMOSTATICALLY CONTROLLED WITH FAN DRIVEN HEATERSPREAD SPECTRUM RADIORADIO BRACKET12V RECHARGEABLE BATTERY120V SLIM RELAY2"x3" WIRE DUCTETHERNET SWITCHVALVE CONTROLLERDIN RAIL1'0.5'0'1.5'GENERAL NOTES:A. THE PANEL MANUFACTURER SHALL BE "GEORGE E. BOOTH CO., INC.".B. GEORGE E. BOOTH CO., INC. SHALL BE THE CONTROL SYSTEMS INTEGRATOR AND SHALL PERFORM ALL PLC AND SCADA PROGRAMING.C. THE CONTROL PANEL DETAILS HEREIN ARE DIAGRAMMATIC IN NATURE FOR THE PURPOSE OF ILLUSTRATING INTERNAL CONNECTIONS AND OVERALLCONTROL DESIGN. CONTROL PANEL VENDOR TO PROVIDE CONFIGURATION.D. ALL CONDUCTORS SHALL BE SIZED PER THE LATEST ADOPTED NATIONAL ELECTRIC CODE (NEC).E. THE CONTROL PANEL SHALL BE ASSEMBLED BY GEORGE E. BOOTH CO., INC. AND BEAR A UL LABEL.F. THE BILL OF MATERIAL REPRESENTS BASIS OF DESIGN FOR MAJOR COMPONENTS AND IS NOT INTENDED TO BE COMPREHENSIVE OF ALL COMPONENTSREQUIRED FOR MANUFACTURE. THE PANEL MANUFACTURER SHALL COORDINATE AND PROVIDE A FINAL BILL OF MATERIAL WHICH INCLUDES ALLAPPURTENANCES REQUIRED FOR A COMPLETE SYSTEM. DISTRICT STANDARD AND PROJECT SPECIFICATIONS SHALL TAKE PRECEDENCE.34282926645333273033337832241135926231920211113111116141731361FLUORESCENT LIGHT371FAN AND FILTER363637373737CONCRETE PADS-90238381ADJUSTABLE THERMOSTAT TO CONTROL ENCLOSURE TEMPERATUREHOFFMAN
CALL BEFORE YOU DIGSEAL
UNDERGROUND SERVICE ALERTCALL: TOLL FREE811TWO WORKING DAYS BEFORE YOU DIGCITY OF AZUSAAZUSA LIGHT AND WATERPLANS PREPARED BYREVISIONSBENCHMARKPERMIT REQUIRED OF 9300 NORTH LAKE AVENUE, SUITE 400PASADENA, CA 91101626.796.9141 stantec.comW-35433CONSTRUCTION PLANS FORTRIANGLE FLOW CONTROLVALVE PROJECTCLA-VALVC-22DSSLCP-001RTU CONTROLLOCATED AT FCU-001810810NGHGNDBUSNLGNLLNGLNGLNGLNGLNGNLG+-+-+--++-G37+-+-17275747+-+-4757AIAIDODODII/O TYPE I/O TAGREPLACE BATTERY (LOW BATTERY)DESCRIPTIONOPEN VALVECLOSE VALVEAIVALVE POSITION (%)HS-001HS-002ZI-001PI-002UPSTREAM PRESSDOWNSTREAM PRESSFLOW SET POINTAOFLOW RATEDICONTROL POWER ONYL-001AOFI-001YA-001PI-001FI-001I/O LIST37BACKUP UPSTREAM PRESSAIPIT-001BACKUP DOWNSTREAM PRESSAIPIT-0023747+-+-
6&277+(15<SEPTEMBER 21, 2020 UB9/21/2020
8(10)8FURNISH AND INSTALL BOLLARDS PER DETAIL ON SHEET 4.
CALL BEFORE YOU DIGSEAL
UNDERGROUND SERVICE ALERTCALL: TOLL FREE811TWO WORKING DAYS BEFORE YOU DIGCITY OF AZUSAAZUSA LIGHT AND WATERPLANS PREPARED BYREVISIONSBENCHMARKPERMIT REQUIRED OF 9300 NORTH LAKE AVENUE, SUITE 400PASADENA, CA 91101626.796.9141 stantec.comW-35433CONSTRUCTION PLANS FORTRIANGLE FLOW CONTROLVALVE PROJECTGENERAL ELECTRICAL NOTESABBREVIATIONSSCHEMATIC SYMBOLSPOWER PLAN SYMBOLSLIGHTING PLAN SYMBOLSGROUNDING
CALL BEFORE YOU DIGSEAL
UNDERGROUND SERVICE ALERTCALL: TOLL FREE811TWO WORKING DAYS BEFORE YOU DIGCITY OF AZUSAAZUSA LIGHT AND WATERPLANS PREPARED BYREVISIONSBENCHMARKPERMIT REQUIRED OF 9300 NORTH LAKE AVENUE, SUITE 400PASADENA, CA 91101626.796.9141 stantec.comW-35433CONSTRUCTION PLANS FORTRIANGLE FLOW CONTROLVALVE PROJECTGENERAL NOTESFRONT ELEVATIONSIDE PANEL ELEVATIONINTERIOR PANEL DETAILMETERREADINGWINDOW16.25"METERCOVERLP1HINGEDDOOR48.00"METERSAFETYSOCKETLOADCENTERMANUALBYPASS16.00"HINGEDHOODMETERSOCKETCOVERMETERSECTIONCUSTOMERSECTIONUTILITY ACCESSCOVER W/PADKLOCK17.25"MYERS MEGU16 PANEL NEMA 3R MYERS MEGU16 PANEL MYERS MEGU16 PANEL METERING PANEL4.00"3.00"3.00"3.00"CONCRETEPAD8"18"INDICATEDON DWGS10" OR AS INDICATEDON DRAWINGS1:1#4TOOLEDEDGE#4 @ 12" UNLESSOTHERWISE NOTED3 1/2" OR ASLEVEL OR SLOPED ASINDICATED ON DWGSSLAB-ON-GRADES-902FOR EQUIPMENT FOUNDATIONNOTES:COMPACTED FILLPER SPEC SECTION31 30 00 (TYP)1. PROVIDE 1/2" PREMOLDED EXPANSION JOINT FILLER BETWEEN SLAB ANDADJACENT STRUCTURE.2. WHERE EQUIPMENT IS ANCHORED TO SLAB, SLAB SIZE SHALL BE ADEQUATE TOMEET THE EMBED LENGTH AND EDGE DISTANCE REQUIREMENTS FROM THEANCHOR OR BOLT CALCULATIONS. THE MINIMUM SLAB THICKNESS SHALL BE 1.5TIMES THE ANCHOR BOLT EMBED DEPTH.S-902ALWBOLLARD DETAIL6'-6"3'-6"6" MIN.16"Ø PCC FOOTING4" GALV. STEEL PIPE, 1/4"WALL (MIN.) FILLED W/NON-SHRINK GROUTCROWN CONCRETE BASE ATTHE TOP TO SHED WATERFINISHED GRADENOTES:1. PAINT THE PIPE BARRIERS YELLOW. POSITION POSTS 2' IN FRONT OF AND 2.5' EACHSIDE OF UTILITY.2. A MINIMUM OF TWO BARRIER SHALL BE INSTALLED IN FRONT OF ABOVE GRADEWATER FACILITIES IF NO CURB EXISTS. FOUR BARRIERS SHALL BE USED IFTRAFFIC CAN ACCESS FACILITIES FROM ALL SIDES.1. THE BOLLARDS SHALL BE PAINTED YELLOW. 2. TEN (10) BARRIERS ARE REQUIRED TO GO AROUND THE PANEL. THE POSITION OF THE POSTS SHALL BE DETERMINED BY ALW IN THE FIELD.
CALL BEFORE YOU DIGSEAL
UNDERGROUND SERVICE ALERTCALL: TOLL FREE811TWO WORKING DAYS BEFORE YOU DIGCITY OF AZUSAAZUSA LIGHT AND WATERPLANS PREPARED BYREVISIONSBENCHMARKPERMIT REQUIRED OF 9300 NORTH LAKE AVENUE, SUITE 400PASADENA, CA 91101626.796.9141 stantec.comW-35433CONSTRUCTION PLANS FORTRIANGLE FLOW CONTROLVALVE PROJECTNKEY NOTESGENERAL NOTES
CALL BEFORE YOU DIGSEAL
UNDERGROUND SERVICE ALERTCALL: TOLL FREE811TWO WORKING DAYS BEFORE YOU DIGCITY OF AZUSAAZUSA LIGHT AND WATERPLANS PREPARED BYREVISIONSBENCHMARKPERMIT REQUIRED OF 9300 NORTH LAKE AVENUE, SUITE 400PASADENA, CA 91101626.796.9141 stantec.comW-35433CONSTRUCTION PLANS FORTRIANGLE FLOW CONTROLVALVE PROJECTFIC3011:1X** XXXSPEC. No.CASE/POSMODELCONTROLLER:PCM No.CARD No.NEST No.SLOT No.TRANSMITTER:MODELSPEC. No.CRSLAINSTRUMENT SYMBOLSEE INSTRUMENT SYMBOLSINSTRUMENT SYMBOLS - CONTPLC / REMOTE I/O POINTS* 2-WIRE NETWORK INTERFACE. SEE SPECIFICATION FOR MORE INFORMATIONSAMPLE LOOP DIAGRAM (ISA EXPANDED FORMAT)FIELD PROCESS AREAFIELD JUNCTIONNOTE 34-20 mADCFE301FT301FY301NOTE 20-100JB400111213141516FV301FL27262524232221500JBA6A5PR-20800181578XX120-1000 CFMPANEL FRONT (CONSOLE No.XX)PANEL REAR0-XXXX PR-1PR-2NOTE 1VALVE:MODELBODY/PORT SIZESPEC. No.SPEC. No.MODELTRANSDUCER:PR-14PR-15JB300123456INSTRUMENT RANGEINSTRUMENT SYMBOLSINSTRUMENT** * ****************aaaaaaaaaaaaaaaaaaabbbbbbbbbbbbbbbbbbb*abCOMPUTING OR CONVERTING FUNCTIONSCOMPUTINGCONVERTINGXXXCONTROL FUNCTION DESIGNATIONSINDICATING LIGHT - FIELD MOUNTED, MAY BE LOCATEDON A CONTROL PANELIINSTRUMENTATION LINE SYMBOLOGYINSTRUMENT LINES24 VDCASOTHER INSTRUMENTATION SYMBOLS AND SYMBOLOGYABBREVIATIONSMODIFIERFIRST LETTER SUCCEEDING LETTER(S)MODIFIEROUTPUT FUNCTIONFIRST LETTERSUCCEEDING LETTER(S)RUN INDICATION SHALL BE RED, OFF INDICATION SHALL BE GREENTAG SCHEMAPAH01GENERAL INSTRUMENTATION NOTESINSTRUMENTATION CALL-OUTLOOP NUMBERxxxabINSTRUMENT SET POINT REMOTE I/OACDEFGHIJKNOPQRSTUVWXYZANALYSISBURNER, COMBUSTIONCONDUCTIVITYDENSITYVOLTAGEFLOW RATEGAUGEHANDCURRENT (ELECTRICAL)POWERTIME, TIME SCHEDULELEVELMOTORTORQUEPRESSURE, VACUUMQUANTITYRADIATIONSPEED, FREQUENCYTEMPERATUREMULTIVARIABLEVIBRATION, MECHANICAL ANALYSISWEIGHT, FORCEINTRUSIONEVENT, STATE, OR PRESENCEPOSITION, DIMENSIONBLMDIFFERENTIALRATIO (FRACTION)SCANTIME RATE OF CHANGEMOMENTARYINTEGRATE, TOTALIZESAFETYX AXISY AXISZ AXISINDICATEISOLATEALARMSENSOR (PRIMARY ELEMENT)GLASS, VIEWING DEVICELIGHTORIFICE, RESTRICTIONPOINT (TEST) CONNECTIONRECORDMULTIFUNCTIONWELLCONTROLTRANSMITISOLATORCONTROL STATIONSWITCHMULTIFUNCTIONVALVE, DAMPER, LOUVERCOMPUTER, CONVERTDRIVER, ACTUATOR, FINALCONTROL ELEMENTCLOSEDHIGHLOWMIDDLE, INTERMEDIATEOPENMULTIFUNCTIONTYPICAL TAG FORMATPAH-01PAH01INSTRUMENT TAG NUMBERFUNCTIONAL IDENTIFICATIONEXPANDED TAG FORMAT12PAHPAH01AINSTRUMENT TAG NUMBERAREA / BUILDING NUMBERREV 07052008INSTRUMENT ID OR TAG NUMBER(SEE TAG SCHEMA)LOCATION OR CONTROL FUNCTIONSEE INSTRUMENT SYMBOLSPRIMARYLOCATION(ACCESSIBLE)(1)PRIMARYLOCATION(INACCESSIBLE)(2)FIELDMOUNTEDAUXILIARYLOCATION(ACCESSIBLE)(1)AUXILIARYLOCATION(INACCESSIBLE)(2)SHARED DISPLAYSHARED CONTROLCOMPUTERFUNCTIONPROGRAMMABLELOGIC CONTROL(1)(2)*ABDESIGNATIONS SUCH AS 100 (LOCAL CONTROL PANEL NO 100),200 (LOCAL CONTROL PANEL NO 200), ETC., ARE USED WHENNECESSARY TO SPECIFY INSTRUMENT OR FUNCTION LOCATION.NORMALLY ACCESSIBLE TO OPERATORNORMALLY INACCESSIBLE TO OPERATOR (BEHIND-THE-PANEL)LOCATION OR CONTROL FUNCTION - SEE BELOWINSTRUMENT IDENTIFICATION/TAG NUMBER(SEE TAG DESIGNATION FOR MORE INFO)INSTRUMENT LOOP NUMBERAHCAMASDEVHMLHOAHORLORLOSLRMOAOACOCOACAUTO/HOLD/CLOSEAUTO/MANUALAIR SUPPLYDEVIATIONHIGH/MID/LOWHAND/OFF/AUTOHAND/OFF/REMOTELOCAL/OFF/REMOTELOCKOUT STOPLOCAL/REMOTEMANUAL/OFF/AUTOOPEN/AUTO/CLOSEOPEN/CLOSEOPEN/AUTO/CLOSEOLHOOOSCPIDPOTRLRSLSDSELSPSRSSSTSTROFF/LOW/HIGHON/OFFOPEN/STOP/CLOSEPROPORTIONAL/INTEGRAL/DERIVATIVEPOTENTIOMETERRAISE/LOWERRAISE/STOP/LOWERSHUTDOWNSELECTSET POINTSTART/RESETSTART/STOPSTARTSTOP/RESET(E)(F)(R)DISCRETEOUTPUTDATA SIGNALINPUT*VOLTAGECURRENTPNEUMATICEIPRDOANALOGBINARYHYDRAULICABHRESISTANCE (ELECT)DIGITALELECTROMAGNETIC,SONICFIRST LETTERSUCCEEDING LETTER(S)LOOP NUMBEROPTIONAL SUFFIXNOTES:/MEASURED ORINITIATING VARIABLEREADOUT ORPASSIVE FUNCTIONDISCRETEINPUTANALOGOUTPUTDATA SIGNALOUTPUT*ELEVATION 12 FTABOVE GRADEORIFICE ID=X.XXB RATIO = 0.XXCABLENo 10CABLENo 30ES115V60HzREVERSE ACTINGOUTPUT SIGNALINDICATING LIGHT - PANEL MOUNTEDCONTROL RELAYLIGHTNING SURGE ARRESTOREXPONENTIALBIASHIGH LIMITINGLOW LIMITINGLINEARIZERFOCFORFOTHMILCPLCSMCCMCPMOVMSNCNOOIPCPLCRIORVSSRTUSWTCTSPUPSVCPVFDVSDDIRECT ACTINGOUTPUT SIGNALPOWER SUPPLY (SIZE AS NOTED)AIR SUPPLYPRIMARY ELECTRICAL POWER(120V/60HZ UNLESS INDICATED OTHERWISE)INDICATES VENDOR FURNISHED EQUIPMENTCABLE (MULTICONDUCTOR OR COAXIAL)FURNISHED WITH EQUIPMENTEXISTING EQUIPMENTFUTURE EQUIPMENTRELOCATED EQUIPMENTSINGLE INSTRUMENT OR OTHER COMPONENT HAVINGMULTIPLE FUNCTIONSRELAY INTERLOCK LOGIC - SEE SCHEMATICS ORSPECIFICATIONS FOR MORE INFORMATIONSUMMINGADDITIONSUBTRACTIONMULTIPLYINGDIVIDINGSQ ROOT EXTRACTIONPROPORTIONALDERIVATIVEAVERAGINGRATIODIFFERENCEHIGH SELECTINGLOW SELECTINGINTEGRALNEW WORK (UNSCREENED)EXISTING (SCREENED)EXISTING TO BE DEMOLISHEDFUTURE EQUIPMENT (LONG DASH, SHORT DASH)NETWORK DATA COMMUNICATIONCAPILLARYDATA LINKELECTRIC (PULSE SIGNAL)ELECTRICAL SIGNALULTRASONIC SIGNALHYDRAULIC SIGNALMECHANICAL LINKPNEUMATIC SIGNALPROCESS3-15PSIGAS100PSIGAS20 PSIG4-20mADC1. FV-301 FULLY OPEN AT 15 PSIG AND FULLY CLOSED AT 3 PSIG.2. STAND MOUNT NEAR, BUT NOT ON THE CONTROL VALVE.3. FE-301 REQUIRES 10 PIPE DIAMETERS UPSTREAM AND 5 PIPE DIAMETERS DOWNSTREAM OF STRAIGHT PIPE.4. DETAIL SURGE ARRESTOR INSTALLATION AND GROUNDING AS APPLICABLE1. ADDITIONAL INSTRUMENTATION AND CONTROL SYMBOLS MAY BE USED AS REQUIRED. SYMBOLS AND NOMENCLATURE ARE BASED ON ISA STANDARD 5.1-INSTRUMENTATION SYMBOLS AND IDENTIFICATION.2. SEE ELECTRICAL AND GENERAL SHEETS FOR ADDITIONAL SYMBOLS AND ABBREVIATIONS.3. SEE SPECIFICATION SECTION 409100 FOR COMPLETE DETAILS OF LOOP DRAWING SUBMITTAL REQUIREMENTS.4. POWER SUPPLIES FOR INSTRUMENT LOOPS OR SYSTEMS SHALL BE FURNISHED BY THE INSTRUMENTATION SUPPLIER TO MEET THE VOLTAGE AND CURRENT REQUIREMENTS OF THE COMPONENTS IN EACH LOOP OR SYSTEM.5. FIELD SWITCHES FOR ELECTRIC MOTOR OPERATION SHALL BE SUPPLIED BY THE ELECTRICAL CONTRACTOR. EXCEPTIONS ARE SWITCHES THAT ARE PART OF VENDOR PACKAGES.6. VALVE ACTUATORS SHALL BE SUPPLIED WITH THE VALVE BY THE VALVE SUPPLIER, UNLESS OTHERWISE NOTED.FIRST LETTERSUCCEEDING LETTER(S)LOOP NUMBERANALOGINPUTFIBER OPTIC CABLEFIBER OPTIC REPEATERFIBER OPTIC TRANSCEIVERHUMAN MACHINE INTERFACELOCAL CONTROL PANELLOCAL CONTROL STATIONMOTOR CONTROL CENTERMAIN CONTROL PANELMOTOR OPERATED VALVEMOTOR STARTERNORMALLY CLOSEDNORMALLY OPENOPERATOR INTERFACEPERSONAL COMPUTERPROGRAMMABLE LOGICCONTROLLERREMOTE I/OREDUCED VOLTAGE SOLID-STATE STARTERREMOTE TERMINAL UNITSEAL WATERTHERMOCOUPLETWISTED SHIELD PAIRUNINTERRUPTABLE POWERSUPPLYVENDOR SUPPLIED PANELVARIABLE FREQUENCY DRIVEVARIABLE SPEED DRIVEPOSITION B-3BUILDING - APAH12-RW-PAH-01ARWFUNCTIONAL IDENTIFICATIONPROCESS ABBREVIATION
CALL BEFORE YOU DIGSEAL
UNDERGROUND SERVICE ALERTCALL: TOLL FREE811TWO WORKING DAYS BEFORE YOU DIGCITY OF AZUSAAZUSA LIGHT AND WATERPLANS PREPARED BYREVISIONSBENCHMARKPERMIT REQUIRED OF 9300 NORTH LAKE AVENUE, SUITE 400PASADENA, CA 91101626.796.9141 stantec.comW-35433CONSTRUCTION PLANS FORTRIANGLE FLOW CONTROLVALVE PROJECTRTU PANELLCP-001LOCALRTU RACKVALVECONTROLLERVC-22DSS24"x16"16"x24"TO SIERRA MADRERESERVOIRFROM WTPEFFLUENT TANKMCLA-VAL&24"x16"
2'1'-6"1'-9"5'5'4'-9"3"3"4"3"3"4"CALL BEFORE YOU DIGSEAL
UNDERGROUND SERVICE ALERTCALL: TOLL FREE811TWO WORKING DAYS BEFORE YOU DIGCITY OF AZUSAAZUSA LIGHT AND WATERPLANS PREPARED BYREVISIONSBENCHMARKPERMIT REQUIRED OF 9300 NORTH LAKE AVENUE, SUITE 400PASADENA, CA 91101626.796.9141 stantec.comW-35433CONSTRUCTION PLANS FORTRIANGLE FLOW CONTROLVALVE PROJECTSCALE: 3" = 1 '65432ITEM QTYPART NUMBERBILL OF MATERIALHOFFMANMANUFACTURER DESCRIPTIONCONTROLWAVECONTROLWAVE7CONTROLWAVEPULS-CS5.243396560-02-4396897-02-9A60P24396657-02-8396563-16-3S1111CONTROLWAVEPULSPULS8PHOENIX CONTACT1HOFFMAN60"x24"x18" ENCLOSURE - NEMA 4X FREE STANDING, SINGLE DOOR ACCESSA602418SSFSN4110A 24-28VDC UPS CONTROLLER910FUSED DOUBLE LEVEL TERMINAL BLOCK AND FUSE PLUG151161811920121461722212425126271282913031PHOENIX CONTACT2132ABBANALOG SURGE PROTECTOR COVERENCLOSURE BACKPLANECWM POWER SUPPLYCPU MODULE W/ ETHERNET W/O GASMIXED I/O CARD: 6DIO, 4AI, 1AOPULS-UB10.24524V 5A POWER SUPPLYSINGLE LEVEL TERMINAL BLOCK1113TRIPLE LAYER TERMINAL BLOCKTRIPLE LAYER TERMINAL BLOCK COVERABBABBPHOENIX CONTACTAUTOMATION DIRECTSIEMENSSINGLE POLE CIRCUIT BREAKERSABBHOFFMANGE-MDSPOWER SONIC231AUTOMATION DIRECT1154121117411111111SOS4 SLOT BASE CHASSISPHOENIX CONTACTPHOENIX CONTACTPHOENIX CONTACTPHOENIX CONTACTPHOENIX CONTACTPHOENIX CONTACTPHOENIX CONTACTPHOENIX CONTACTPHOENIX CONTACTABB30441023047028304731630448143044720 / 30368060461018SINGLE LEVEL TERMINAL BLOCK COVERDOUBLE LEVEL TERMINAL BLOCKDOUBLE LEVEL TERMINAL BLOCK COVER2770024296617128381862838995S201-C20S201-C6S201-C162905557 / 2905234DN-G8DN-EB35ECGB10330036DAH1001AORBIT-ECR-900RABPS-12120 F22966197ABB-01732200533THOMAS AND BETTS1TY2X3NPG6 / TY2CPG634SIXNET1SLX-5ES135CLA-VAL1VC-22D24V DIGITAL OUTPUT RELAYANALOG SURGE PROTECTORSINGLE POLE CIRCUIT BREAKERSSINGLE POLE CIRCUIT BREAKERS120V TVSSGROUND BLOCKDIN RAIL END ANCHORGROUND BARENCLOSURE OUTLETENCLOSURE ELECTRIC HEATER, THERMOSTATICALLY CONTROLLED WITH FAN DRIVEN HEATERSPREAD SPECTRUM RADIORADIO BRACKET12V RECHARGEABLE BATTERY120V SLIM RELAY2"x3" WIRE DUCTETHERNET SWITCHVALVE CONTROLLERDIN RAIL1'0.5'0'1.5'GENERAL NOTES:A. THE PANEL MANUFACTURER SHALL BE "GEORGE E. BOOTH CO., INC.".B. GEORGE E. BOOTH CO., INC. SHALL BE THE CONTROL SYSTEMS INTEGRATOR AND SHALL PERFORM ALL PLC AND SCADA PROGRAMING.C. THE CONTROL PANEL DETAILS HEREIN ARE DIAGRAMMATIC IN NATURE FOR THE PURPOSE OF ILLUSTRATING INTERNAL CONNECTIONS AND OVERALLCONTROL DESIGN. CONTROL PANEL VENDOR TO PROVIDE CONFIGURATION.D. ALL CONDUCTORS SHALL BE SIZED PER THE LATEST ADOPTED NATIONAL ELECTRIC CODE (NEC).E. THE CONTROL PANEL SHALL BE ASSEMBLED BY GEORGE E. BOOTH CO., INC. AND BEAR A UL LABEL.F. THE BILL OF MATERIAL REPRESENTS BASIS OF DESIGN FOR MAJOR COMPONENTS AND IS NOT INTENDED TO BE COMPREHENSIVE OF ALL COMPONENTSREQUIRED FOR MANUFACTURE. THE PANEL MANUFACTURER SHALL COORDINATE AND PROVIDE A FINAL BILL OF MATERIAL WHICH INCLUDES ALLAPPURTENANCES REQUIRED FOR A COMPLETE SYSTEM. DISTRICT STANDARD AND PROJECT SPECIFICATIONS SHALL TAKE PRECEDENCE.34282926645333273033337832241135926231920211113111116141731361FLUORESCENT LIGHT371FAN AND FILTER363637373737CONCRETE PADS-90238381ADJUSTABLE THERMOSTAT TO CONTROL ENCLOSURE TEMPERATUREHOFFMAN
CALL BEFORE YOU DIGSEAL
UNDERGROUND SERVICE ALERTCALL: TOLL FREE811TWO WORKING DAYS BEFORE YOU DIGCITY OF AZUSAAZUSA LIGHT AND WATERPLANS PREPARED BYREVISIONSBENCHMARKPERMIT REQUIRED OF 9300 NORTH LAKE AVENUE, SUITE 400PASADENA, CA 91101626.796.9141 stantec.comW-35433CONSTRUCTION PLANS FORTRIANGLE FLOW CONTROLVALVE PROJECTCLA-VALVC-22DSSLCP-001RTU CONTROLLOCATED AT FCU-001810810NGHGNDBUSNLGNLLNGLNGLNGLNGLNGNLG+-+-+--++-G37+-+-17275747+-+-4757AIAIDODODII/O TYPE I/O TAGREPLACE BATTERY (LOW BATTERY)DESCRIPTIONOPEN VALVECLOSE VALVEAIVALVE POSITION (%)HS-001HS-002ZI-001PI-002UPSTREAM PRESSDOWNSTREAM PRESSFLOW SET POINTAOFLOW RATEDICONTROL POWER ONYL-001AOFI-001YA-001PI-001FI-001I/O LIST37BACKUP UPSTREAM PRESSAIPIT-001BACKUP DOWNSTREAM PRESSAIPIT-0023747+-+-